VSDS Manual-ABB

ACS800
Hardware Manual
ACS800-04 Drive Modules (0.55 to 160 kW)
ACS800-U4 Drive Modules (0.75 to 200 HP)
ACS800 Single Drive Manuals
HARDWARE MANUALS (appropriate manual is included in the

delivery)
ACS800-01/U1 Hardware Manual 0.55 to 160 kW (0.75 to 200 HP)

3AFE64382101 (English)
ACS800-01/U1/04 Marine Supplement 0.55 to 160 kW (0.75 to
200 HP) 3AFE64291275 (English)
ACS800-31/U31 Hardware Manual 5.5 to110 kW (7.5 to 125 HP)
ACS800-02/U2 Hardware Manual 90 to 500 kW (125 to 600 HP)
ACS800-04/04M/U4 Hardware Manual 45 to 560 kW (60 to
ACS800-04/04M/U4 Cabinet Installation 45 to 560 kW (60 to
ACS800-07/U7 Hardware Manual 45 to 560 kW (50 to 600 HP)
ACS800-07/U7 Dimensional Drawings 45 to 560 kW (50 to
600 HP) 3AFE64775421
ACS800-07 Hardware Manual 500 to 2800 kW
ACS800-17 Hardware Manual 55 to 2500 kW (75 to 2800 HP)
ACS800-37 Hardware Manual 55 to 2700 kW (75 to 3000 HP)
• Safety instructions
• Electrical installation planning
• Mechanical and electrical installation
• Motor control and I/O board (RMIO)
• Maintenance
• Technical data
• Dimensional drawings
• Resistor braking
FIRMWARE MANUALS, SUPPLEMENTS AND GUIDES

(appropriate documents are included in the delivery)
Standard Control Program Firmware Manual

System Control Program Firmware Manual
Control Program Template Firmware Manual
Master/Follower 3AFE64590430 (English)
Pump Control Program Firmware Manual
Extruder Control Program Supplement 3AFE64648543 (English)
Centrifuge Control Program Supplement 3AFE64667246 (English)
Traverse Control Program Supplement 3AFE64618334 (English)
Crane Control Program Firmware Manual 3BSE11179 (English)
Adaptive Programming Application Guide
OPTION MANUALS (delivered with optional equipment)
Fieldbus Adapters, I/O Extension Modules etc.

ACS800-04 Drive Modules
0.55 to 160 kW
ACS800-U4 Drive Modules
0.75 to 200 HP
Hardware Manual
3AFE68372984 Rev D EN
EFFECTIVE: 25.6.2007
© 2007 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

5
Safety instructions
What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, the motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the unit.
Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and
notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or
death and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger.
Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:
Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause

physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by

electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge warning warns of electrostatic discharge which
can damage the equipment.
Hot surface warning warns of hot surfaces which can cause physical
injury.
Safety instructions
6
Installation and maintenance work

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment:
• Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive.
• Never work on the drive, the motor cable or the motor when main power is
applied. After switching off the input power, always wait for 5 min to let the
intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive,
the motor or the motor cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm)
that:
1. voltage between drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the frame is close to
0V
2. voltage between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and the frame is close to 0 V.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause
dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is
switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive
modules.
• When reconnecting the motor cable, always check that the phase order is
correct.
Note:
• The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when
the input power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not.
• The brake control terminals (UDC+, UDC-, R+ and R- terminals) carry a

dangerous DC voltage (over 500 V).
• Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V)

may be present on the terminals of relay outputs RO1 to RO3 or on the optional
AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start).
• The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not remove the voltage from
the main and auxiliary circuits.
• At installation sites above 2000 m (6562 ft), the terminals of the RMIO board
and optional modules attached to the board do not fulfil the Protective Extra
Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178.
Safety instructions
7
Grounding
These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the
drive.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury, death,
increased electromagnetic interference and equipment malfunction:
• Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in
all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and interference.
• Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by

safety regulations.
• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective

earth (PE).
• In first environment (EU EMC Directive): make a 360° high frequency

grounding of the motor cable entry at the cabinet lead-through.
• Do not install a drive with EMC filter option +E202 or +E200 on an ungrounded
power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system.
Note:
• Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding conductors only
when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.
• As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA

DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is
required.
Safety instructions
8
Mechanical installation and maintenance

These instructions are intended for all who install and service the drive.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death,
or damage to the equipment:
• Handle the unit carefully.
• The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Place the unit only on its back.
• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power

semiconductors, remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical
supply.
• Make sure that dust from borings and grindings does not enter the drive when
installing. Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or
malfunctioning.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
• Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.
Printed circuit boards
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the printed
circuit boards:
• The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic

discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not
touch the boards unnecessarily.
Fibre optic cables
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause equipment malfunction

and damage to the fibre optic cables:
• Handle the fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always
grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibres with
bare hands as the fibre is extremely sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed
bend radius is 35 mm (1.4 in.).
Safety instructions
9
Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate
the drive.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death,
or damage to the equipment:
• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor
and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at
speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly
to the power line.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Control Program if

dangerous situations can occur. When activated, these functions will reset the
drive and resume operation after a fault.
• Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device (means); instead, use
the control panel keys and , or commands via the I/O board of the drive.
The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors (i.e.
power-ups by applying power) is five in ten minutes.
Note:
• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive (with
Standard / Motion Control Program) will start immediately after fault reset
unless the drive is configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
• When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the status row of
the display), the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop
the drive using the control panel, press the LOC/REM key and then the stop
key .
Safety instructions
10
Permanent magnet motor

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring
the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.
Installation and maintenance work
WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is rotating.
Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped, a rotating
permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the
supply connections become live.
Before installation and maintenance work on the drive:
• Stop the motor.
• Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Prevent the start-up of any
drives in the same mechanical group by opening the “prevention of unexpected
start” switch and padlocking it. Make sure that no other system, like hydraulic
crawling drives, are able to rotate the motor directly or through any mechanical
connection like felt, nip, rope, etc.
• Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals:
Alternative 1) Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other
means. Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output
terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-).
Alternative 2) Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output
terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-). Ground the drive output
terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the PE.
Alternative 3) If possible, both of the above.
Start-up and operation
WARNING! Do not run the motor over the rated speed. Motor overspeed leads to
overvoltage which may damage or explode the capacitors in the intermediate circuit
of the drive.
Controlling a permanent magnet motor is only allowed using the ACS800 Permanent
Magnet Synchronous Motor Drive Control Program, or other control programs in
scalar control mode.
Safety instructions
11
Table of contents
ACS800 Single Drive Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety instructions
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Use of warnings and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mechanical installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Permanent magnet motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table of contents
About this manual

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Categorization according to the frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Categorization according to the + code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ACS800-04/U4
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main circuit and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table of contents
12
Planning the cabinet assembly

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Cabinet construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Disposition of the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Grounding of mounting structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Free space around the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Cooling and degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Preventing the recirculation of hot air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Outside the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Inside the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Cabinet layout example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Cabinet heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mounting the optional control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Installing the control panel directly on the cabinet door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Control panel mounting platform kit (RPMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
EMC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Mechanical installation
Unpacking the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Flange mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Planning the electrical installation

Motor selection and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Requirements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Permanent magnet synchronous motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Disconnecting device (means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
EEA / Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Main contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Thermal overload protection of the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Protection against short-circuit in the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Protection against short-circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Emergency stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Prevention of Unexpected Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Table of contents
13
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Armored cable / shielded power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Power factor compensation capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Equipment connected to the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Before opening a contactor (DTC control mode selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads . . . . 55
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Electrical installation
Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Input cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IT (ungrounded) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Power cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Grounding the motor cable shield at the motor end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Frame sizes R2 to R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Frame size R6: Cable lug installation [16 to 70 mm2 (6 to 2/0 AWG) cables] . . . . . . . 64
Power cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
360 degrees grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material . . . . . . 69
Connecting the shield wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Pulse encoder module cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Installation of optional modules and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fibre optic link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table of contents
14
External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board via terminal X34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Connecting +24 V external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Prevention of Unexpected Start, AGPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO)

Note on terminal labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Note on external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
External control connections (non-US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
External control connections (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
RMIO board specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Constant voltage output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Auxiliary power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
DDCS fibre optic link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
24 VDC power input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Installation checklist
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Maintenance
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Fan replacement (R2, R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Fan replacement (R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Additional fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Replacement (R2, R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Replacement (R4, R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Replacement (R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Reforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Table of contents
15
Technical data
IEC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Altitude derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cooling characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cooling requirements for flange mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Frame sizes R2 to R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Frame sizes R5 and R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Calculation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
gG fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Ultrarapid (aR) fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NEMA data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cable Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Input power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
AGPS-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Compliance with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Compliance with the EN 61800-3 (2004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Second environment (drive of category C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table of contents
16
“C-tick” marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Compliance with IEC 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Second environment (drive of category C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Marine type approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
UL/CSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
UL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Equipment warranty and liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Product protection in the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Dimensional drawings
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Frame size R2 (with optional control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Flange mounting kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Flange mounting kit for frame size R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
AGPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Resistor braking
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Availability of brake choppers and resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
How to select the correct drive/chopper/resistor combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Optional brake chopper and resistor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Resistor installation and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Protection of frame sizes R2 to R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Protection of frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Brake circuit commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Table of contents
17
About this manual

This chapter describes the intended audience and contents of this manual. It
contains a flowchart of steps in checking the delivery, installing and commissioning
the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS800-04/U4 (frame sizes R2...R6).
Intended audience
This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, commission, use
and service the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. The reader is
expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and
electrical schematic symbols.
This manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations within the United States that must be
installed per the National Electrical Code and local codes are marked with (US).
Categorization according to the frame size

Some instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size R2, R3... or R6.
The frame size is not marked on the drive designation label. To identify the frame
size of your drive, see the rating tables in chapter Technical data.
Categorization according to the + code

The instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain optional selections are marked with + codes, e.g. +E202. The options
included in the drive can be identified from the + codes visible on the type
designation label of the drive. The + code selections are listed in chapter ACS800-
04/U4 in section Type code.
About this manual

18
Contents
The chapters of this manual are briefly described below.
Safety instructions give safety instructions for the installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the drive.
About this manual lists the steps in checking the delivery and installing and
commissioning the drive and refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals for particular tasks.
ACS800-04/U4 describes the drive.
Planning the cabinet assembly guides in planning the installation of a drive module
into a user-defined cabinet.
Mechanical installation instructs how to place and mount the drive.
Planning the electrical installation instructs on the motor and cable selection, the
protections and the cable routing.
Electrical installation shows how to wire the drive.
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) shows the external control connections to the
I/O board.
Installation checklist contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical
installation of the drive.
Maintenance contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Technical data contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings,
sizes and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE
and other markings and warranty policy.
Dimensional drawings contains the dimensional drawings of the drive.
Resistor braking describes how to select, protect and wire brake choppers and
resistors. The chapter also contains the technical data.
About this manual

19
Installation and commissioning flowchart
Task See
Identify the frame size of your drive: R2, R3, R4, R5 Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data
or R6.
Plan the installation. Technical data

Check the ambient conditions, ratings, required Planning the electrical installation
cooling air flow, input power connection, compatibility
Option manual (if optional equipment is
of the motor, motor connection, and other technical
included)
data.
Select the cables.
Unpack and check the units. Mechanical installation: Unpacking the unit
Check that all necessary optional modules and If the converter has been non-operational for
equipment are present and correct. more than one year, the converter DC link
Only intact units may be started up. capacitors need to be reformed. Ask ABB for
instructions.
Check the installation site. Mechanical installation: Before installation

Technical data
If the drive is about to be connected to an IT ACS800-04/U4: Type code

(ungrounded) system, check that the drive is not
For instructions on how to disconnect the EMC
equipped with EMC filtering.
filtering, contact ABB.
Install the drive in a cabinet. Mechanical installation
Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

cables
Check the insulation of the motor and the motor Electrical installation: Checking the insulation of
cable. the assembly
About this manual

20
Task See
Connect the power cables. Electrical installation, Motor control and I/O
Connect the control and the auxiliary control cables. board (RMIO), Resistor braking (optional) and
the optional module manual delivered with the
module.
Check the installation. Installation checklist
Commission the drive. Appropriate Firmware Manual
Commission the optional brake chopper (if present). Resistor braking
Operating of the drive: start, stop, speed control etc. Appropriate Firmware Manual
Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting
the type code and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and
selecting Drives – Sales, Support and Service network on the right pane.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select
Drives – Training courses on the right pane.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives, then
select successively Drives – Document Library – Manuals feedback form on the right
pane.
About this manual

21
Terms and abbreviations

Term/Abbreviation Explanation
CDP312R Drive control panel
DDCS Distributed Drives Communication System; a protocol used in optical fibre

communication inside and between ABB drives.
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
Frame (size) Size of the frame into which the drive module is assembled. Several
supply modules with different nominal powers may have the same frame
size. The term refers to modules that have a similar mechanical
construction.
To determine the frame size of a drive module, refer to the rating tables in
chapter Technical data.
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor; a voltage-controlled semiconductor type

widely used in inverters due to their easy controllability and high switching
frequency.
I/O Input/Output
AGPS Gate driver Power Supply board. An optional board used to implement the
Prevention of Unexpected Start function.
RDCO DDCS communication option module
RDIO Digital I/O Extension Module
RFI Radio-frequency interference
RINT Main circuit board
RMIO Motor control and I/O board. The external I/O control signals are
connected to RMIO.
RPMP Control panel mounting platform kit
About this manual

22
About this manual

23
ACS800-04/U4

This chapter describes the operating principle and construction of the drive in short.
Layout
The ACS800-04/U4 (frame sizes R2 to R6) is an IP20 drive module for controlling
AC motors. It is to be installed into a cabinet by the customer with wall fastening.
Control panel CDP312R Frame size R2

(optional)
Option slots
Power cable
terminal
Heatsink
PE
Location of the components vary depending on the frame size.
ACS800-04/U4
24
Type code
The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the
drive. The first digits from left express the basic configuration (e.g. ACS800-04-
0016-3). The optional selections are given thereafter, separated by + signs (e.g.
+E202). The main selections are described below. Not all selections are available for
all types. For more information, refer to ACS800 Ordering Information
[3AFE64556568 (English)], available on request.
Selection Alternatives
Product series ACS800 product series
Type 04 Drive module. When no options are selected: IP20, no control panel, no
EMC filter, Standard Control Program, brake chopper in frame sizes R2,
R3, and R4 (only 690 V), boards without coating, one set of manuals.
U4 Drive module (USA). When no options are selected: UL open type, no
control panel, no EMC filter, Standard Control Program, brake chopper in
frame sizes R2, R3, and R4 (only 690 V), boards without coating, one set
of manuals.
Size See Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data.
Voltage range 2 208/220/230/240 VAC
(nominal rating in bold) 3 380/400/415 VAC
5 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 VAC
7 525/575/600/690 VAC
+ options
Control panel J400 Control panel CDP312R assembled on the drive module
J414 Control panel holder for frame sizes R2, R3 and R4 (not to be used with
option J400)
Construction C132 Marine drive (coated boards included)
C135 Flange mounting. Flange mounting plate assembled. IP55 for heat sink
side and IP20 for drive front side.
Filter E200 EMC/RFI filter for second environment TN (grounded) system, drive
category C3
E202 EMC/RFI filter for first environment TN (grounded) system, drive category
C2. (Not available for 690 V units.)
E210 EMC/RFI filter for second environment TN/IT (grounded/ungrounded)
system, drive category C3 (frame size R6 only)
Resistor braking D150 Brake chopper. Included as standard in frame sizes R2, R3 and R4 (only
690 V).
Safety Q950 Prevention of Unexpected Start: AGPS board and 3 m connection wire.
Fieldbus K... Refer to ACS800 Ordering Information [3AFE64556568 (English)].
I/O L...
Control program N...
Manual language R...
Specialities P901 Coated boards
P904 Extended warranty
ACS800-04/U4
25
Main circuit and control
Diagram
This diagram shows the control interfaces and the main circuit of the drive. Location
of terminals vary depending on the drive frame size.
Drive
Optional module 1:
Motor Slot1 RMBA, RAIO, RDIO, RDNA, RLON, RIBA,
control and RPBA, RCAN, RCNA, RMBP, RETA, RRIA or
I/O board RTAC
(RMIO)
Slot2
Optional module 2: RTAC, RAIO, RRIA or
RDIO
External control via
analogue/digital X33 DDCS communication option module 3:
inputs and outputs RDCO-01, RDCO-02 or RDCO-03
The fibre optic channels provided by the
X41
RDCO module can be used for fieldbus
connection (Nxxx fieldbus adapter modules),
Prevention of Unexpected
PC connection (DriveWare® PC tools) or
Start (AGPS board)
Advant Fieldbus 100 connection (e.g.
AC 800M, AC80)
= ~
Input power
~ = Output power
Brake chopper in frame sizes R2, R3 and

690 V frame R4 (optional in other frame
sizes).
R- UDC+ UDC-
R+
ACS800-04/U4
26
Operation
This table describes the operation of the main circuit in short.
Component Description
Six-pulse rectifier Converts the three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage.
Capacitor bank Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage.
IGBT inverter Converts the DC voltage to AC voltage and vice versa. The motor
operation is controlled by switching the IGBTs.
Printed circuit boards

The drive contains the following printed circuit boards as standard:
• main circuit board (RINT)
• motor control and I/O board (RMIO)
• EMC filter board (RRFC) when EMC equipment is selected or varistor board
(RVAR) otherwise.
Motor control
The motor control is based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method. Two phase
currents and DC link voltage are measured and used for the control. The third phase
current is measured for earth fault protection.
ACS800-04/U4
27

This chapter guides in planning the installation of a drive module into a user-defined
cabinet. The issues discussed are essential for safe and trouble-free use of the drive
system.
Note: The installation examples in this manual are provided only to help the installer
in designing the installation. The installation must always be designed and made
according to applicable local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any
liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and/or other
regulations.
Cabinet construction
The cabinet frame must be sturdy enough to carry the weight of the drive
components, control circuitry and other equipment installed in it.
The cabinet must protect the drive module against contact and meet the
requirements for dust and humidity (see chapter Technical data).
Disposition of the devices

For easy installation and maintenance, a spacious layout is recommended. Sufficient
cooling air flow, obligatory clearances, cables and cable support structures all
require space.
For layout examples, see section Cabinet layout example.
Grounding of mounting structures

Make sure all cross-members or shelves on which components are mounted are
properly grounded and the connecting surfaces left unpainted.
Note: Ensure that the modules are properly grounded through their fastening points
to the installation base.

28
Free space around the unit

The modules can be installed side by side. Recommended free space above and
below the drive to enable cooling air flow, service and maintenance is shown below
in millimetres and [inches].
The temperature of the cooling air entering the unit must not exceed the maximum
allowed ambient temperature. See section Ambient conditions in chapter Technical
data.
200 [7.9]
300 [12]
IP20 (UL open type)

29
Cooling and degrees of protection

The cabinet must have enough free space for the components to ensure sufficient
cooling. Observe the minimum clearances given for each component.
The air inlets and outlets must be equipped with gratings that
• guide the air flow
• protect against contact
• prevent water splashes from entering the cabinet.
The drawing below shows two typical cabinet cooling solutions. The air inlet is at the
bottom of the cabinet, while the outlet is at the top, either on the upper part of the
door or on the roof.
Air outlet
Air inlet
Arrange the cooling air flow through the modules so that the requirements given in
chapter Technical data are met:
• cooling air flow
Note: The values in Technical data apply to continuous nominal load. If the load is cyclic or less
than nominal, less cooling air is required.
• allowed ambient temperature

• the air inlet and outlet sizes required for the module cooling and recommended
filter material (if used).
In addition to the above, the heat dissipated by cables and other additional
equipment must also be ventilated.
The internal cooling fans of the modules are usually sufficient to keep the component
temperatures low enough in IP22 (UL type 1) cabinets.

30
In IP54 (UL type 12) cabinets, thick filter mats are used to prevent water splashes
from entering the cabinet. This entails the installation of additional cooling
equipment, such as a hot air exhaust fan.
The installation site must be sufficiently ventilated.
Preventing the recirculation of hot air
Normal vertical mounting Flange mounting
Main
Cabinet (side view) air Cabinet (side view)
flow
out
HOT
AREA Air flow out
Main air flow out HOT AREA
Air baffle
Air baffle plate
plates
COOL AREA COOL AREA
Main air flow in Air flow in
Main
air
flow
in
Outside the cabinet

Prevent hot air circulation outside the cabinet by leading the outcoming hot air away
from the area where the inlet air to the cabinet is taken. Possible solutions are listed
below:
• gratings that guide air flow at the air inlet and outlet
• air inlet and outlet at different sides of the cabinet
• cool air inlet in the lower part of the front door and an extra exhaust fan on the
roof of the cabinet.

31
Inside the cabinet

Prevent hot air circulation inside the cabinet with leak-proof air baffle plates. No
gaskets are usually required.
When several modules are installed vertically in one cabinet, the hot air from one
module must not be allowed to enter another module. In a cabinet with multiple
modules, a practical way of achieving this is to install a mounting plate to separate
the cool area (at the front part of the cabinet) from the hot area (back part). The
mounting plate can be fastened to two vertical pillars on both left and right. Since the
air outlet at the top of the modules points directly upwards, the air must be guided to
the hot area. See cabinet layout examples below.
Cabinet layout example
Vertical mounting
AC switch fuse
AC fuse bases
AC fuses
Airflow guides
du/dt filter Hot area
Cool area
Mounting
plates
Modules
Motor cable entries
Front view of three R2 Side view of three R3

modules in cabinet modules in cabinet

32
Cabinet heaters
Use a cabinet heater if there is a risk of condensation in the cabinet. Although the
primary function of the heater is to keep the air dry, it may also be required for
heating at low temperatures. When placing the heater, follow the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
Mounting the optional control panel

The optional control panel CDP312R is factory assembled on the drive module.The
panel can also be fastened directly to the cabinet door or to a mounting platform.
Installing the control panel directly on the cabinet door

Fasten the control panel from the back side with two screws of one of the following
types:
• standard screw with nominal diameter of 4 mm (0.16 in.)
• tapping screw with nominal diameter of 4.2 mm (0.17 in.) DIN 7981 C, DIN 7982
C, DIN 7983 C or DIN 7976 C
• PT screw for thermoplastics with nominal diameter of 4 mm (0.16 in.).
View from outside the cabinet door
Control panel
Cabinet door
4...8 mm
(0.16...0.31 in.)
Control panel footprint
Tightening torque:
1 Nm (0.74 lbf ft) 10 mm (0.39 in.)

33
Control panel mounting platform kit (RPMP)

For installation of the mounting platform, see Control Panel Mounting Platform Kit
(RPMP) Installation Guide [3AFE64677560 (English)].
EMC requirements
Generally, the fewer and smaller the holes in the cabinet, the better the interference
attenuation. The maximum recommended diameter of a hole in galvanic metal
contact in the covering cabinet structure is 100 mm. Special attention must be paid
to the cooling air inlet and outlet gratings.
The best galvanic connection between the steel panels is achieved by welding them
together as no holes are necessary. If welding is not possible, the seams between
the panels are recommended to be left unpainted and equipped with special
conductive EMC strips to provide adequate galvanic connection. Usually, reliable
strips are made of flexible silicon mass covered with a metal mesh. The non-
tightened touch-contact of the metal surfaces is not sufficient, so a conductive
gasket between the surfaces is required. The maximum recommended distance
between assembly screws is 100 mm.
Sufficient high-frequency grounding network must be constructed in the cabinet to
avoid voltage differences and forming of high-impedance radiator structures. A good
high-frequency grounding is made with short flat copper braids for low inductance.
One-point high-frequency grounding cannot be used due to the long distances inside
the cabinet.
First environment EMC compliance *) of the drive requires 360° high frequency
grounding of the motor cable shields at their entries. The grounding can be
implemented by a knitted wire mesh screening as shown below.
Bare cable shield

Cable ties
Knitted wire mesh
Lead-through plate
Cable
Cabinet bottom plate
*) First environment EMC compliance is defined in section CE marking in chapter Technical data.

34
360° high frequency grounding of the control cable shields is recommended at their
entries. The shields can be grounded by means of conductive shielding cushions
pressed against the cable shield from both directions:
Bare cable shield Shielding cushion

(conductive)
Cabinet bottom plate
Cable
Cable grommet

35
Unpacking the unit

The drive is delivered in a box that also contains:
• plastic bag containing: screws (M3), clamps and cable lugs (2 mm2, M3) for
grounding the control cable screens
• residual voltage warning stickers
• hardware, firmware and other module manuals
• delivery documents.
Unpack the unit of frame sizes R2 to R5 as follows.
Tear
36
Delivery check
Check that there are no signs of damage. Before attempting installation and
operation, check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify
that the unit is of the correct type. The label includes IEC rating, C-UL US, CSA,
C-tick and CE markings, a type code and a serial number, which allow individual
recognition of each unit. The first digit of the serial number refers to the
manufacturing plant. The next four digits refer to the unit’s manufacturing year and
week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there
are no two units with the same serial number.
The type designation label is attached to the heat sink and the serial number label to
the upper part of the back plate of the unit.
Type designation label
Serial number label
Before installation
Check the installation site according to the requirements below. See Dimensional
drawings for frame details.
Requirements for the installation site

See Technical data for the allowed operation conditions of the drive.
Floor
The floor/material below the cabinet should be non-flammable.
37
Installation procedure
1. Mark the locations for the four holes. The mounting points are shown in
Dimensional drawings. With frame sizes R2...R5, use the mounting template cut
from the package.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
3. Position the drive onto the screws on the cabinet wall. Note: Lift the drive by its
chassis (R6: by its lifting holes).
4. Tighten the screws in the cabinet wall securely.
38
Flange mounting
The flange mounting plate is factory assembled on the drive. With flange mounting,
the degree of protection is IP55 for the heat sink side and IP20 for the drive front
side. The drive front side must always be housed in a cabinet.
R6 with flange mounting plate
Connect a drive with flange mounting plate as follows:

1. Make the appropriate mounting and screw holes for the drive into the mounting
plate. The sizes and locations of the holes vary according to the frame size. See
chapter Dimensional drawings. Screw holes can be replaced with rivet nuts.
Recommended type is closed M6 rivet nut, L = 23 mm, code 23351060030 /
Rivkle provided by Böllhoff (www.boellhoff.de).
2. Lift the drive by its lifting lugs and place it into the mounting hole.
3. Fix the washers and screws (M6) delivered with the drive (MRP code 68390419).
The tightening torque is 2 Nm.
Note: The flange mounting kit does not ground the drive. The drive needs to be
grounded according to instructions given in chapter Electrical installation.
Note: Maximum allowed vibration for the drive has not been tested with flange
mounting. If the drive is exposed to vibration, it is recommended to fix the drive also
from the normal mounting holes located on the heat sink. See section Installation
procedure.
39
R6 flange mounting
1
2 Lifting lug
Mounting plate
3
Washer
Screw
40
41

This chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when selecting the motor,
cables, protections, cable routing and way of operation for the drive system.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if
the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.
Motor selection and compatibility

1. Select the motor according to the rating tables in chapter Technical data. Use the
DriveSize PC tool if the default load cycles are not applicable.
2. Check that the motor ratings lie within the allowed ranges of the drive control
program:
• motor nominal voltage is 1/2 ... 2 · UN of the drive
• motor nominal current is 1/6 ... 2 · I2hd of the drive in DTC control and
0 ... 2 · I2hd in scalar control. The control mode is selected by a drive parameter.
3. Check that the motor voltage rating meets the application requirements:
• If no resistor braking is in use, the motor voltage rating is UN.
UN = rated input voltage of the drive
• If frequent or long term brake cycles will be used, the motor voltage rating is
UACeq.
UACeq = UDC/1.35
where
UACeq is the equivalent AC power source voltage of the drive in V AC.
UDC is the maximum DC link voltage of the drive in V DC.
For resistor braking: UDC = 1.2 × 1.35 × UN.
See note 6 below the Requirements table.
4. Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor in a drive system where the
motor nominal voltage differs from the AC power source voltage.

42
5. Ensure that the motor insulation system withstands the maximum peak voltage in
the motor terminals. See the Requirements table below for the required motor
insulation system and drive filtering.
Example: When the supply voltage is 440 V and the drive is operating in motor
mode only, the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals can be
approximated as follows: 440 V · 1.35 · 2 = 1190 V. Check that the motor
insulation system withstands this voltage.
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings

The output of the drive comprises – regardless of output frequency – pulses of
approximately 1.35 times the equivalent mains network voltage with a very short rise
time. This is the case with all drives employing modern IGBT inverter technology.
The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals, depending on
the attenuation and reflection properties of the motor cable and the terminals. This in
turn can cause additional stress on the motor and motor cable insulation.
Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching
frequencies can generate current pulses that flow through the motor bearings, which
can gradually erode the bearing races and rolling elements.
The stress on motor insulation can be avoided by using optional ABB du/dt filters.
du/dt filters also reduce bearing currents.
To avoid damage to motor bearings, the cables must be selected and installed
according to the instructions given in the hardware manual. In addition, insulated N-
end (non-driven end) bearings and output filters from ABB must be used according
to the following table. Two types of filters are used individually or in combinations:
• optional du/dt filter (protects motor insulation system and reduces bearing
currents).
• common mode filter (mainly reduces bearing currents).

43
Requirements table
The following table shows how to select the motor insulation system and when an optional ABB du/dt
filter, insulated N-end (non-driven end) motor bearings and ABB common mode filters are required. The
motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and
additional requirements for explosion-safe (Ex) motors. Failure of the motor to fulfil the following
requirements or improper installation may shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings and voids
the warranty.
Motor type Nominal mains Requirement for

voltage (AC line Motor ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common
voltage) insulation mode filter
Manufacturer
system PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < PN > 350 kW

and 350 kW or or
frame size < IEC frame size > IEC frame size > IEC
315 315 400
PN < 134 HP 134 HP < PN < PN > 469 HP
and frame size < 469 HP or frame size >
NEMA 500 or frame size > NEMA 580
NEMA 500
A Random- UN < 500 V Standard - +N + N + CMF
B wound M2_ 500 V < UN < 600 V Standard + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
B and M3_
or
Reinforced - +N + N + CMF
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
Form-wound 380 V < UN < 690 V Standard n.a. + N + CMF PN < 500 kW: + N
HX_ and + CMF
AM_ PN > 500 kW: + N
+ CMF + du/dt
Old* form- 380 V < UN < 690 V Check with the + du/dt with voltages over 500 V + N + CMF
wound HX_ motor
and modular manufacturer.
Random- 0 V < UN < 500 V Enamelled wire + N + CMF
wound HX_ 500 V < UN < 690 V with fibre glass + du/dt + N + CMF
and AM_ ** taping

44

Manufacturer

and 350 kW or or
frame size < IEC frame size > IEC frame size > IEC
315 315 400
PN < 134 HP 134 HP < PN < PN > 469 HP
and frame size < 469 HP or frame size >
NEMA 500 or frame size > NEMA 580
NEMA 500
N Random- UN < 420 V Standard: ÛLL = - + N or CMF + N + CMF
O wound and 1300 V
N form-wound 420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: ÛLL = + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
- 1300 V or
A + du/dt + CMF
B
or
B
Reinforced: - + N or CMF + N + CMF
ÛLL = 1600 V,
0.2
microsecond
rise time
500 V < UN < 600 V Reinforced: ÛLL + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
= 1600 V or
+ du/dt + CMF
or
Reinforced: - + N or CMF + N + CMF
ÛLL = 1800 V
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced: + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
ÛLL = 1800 V
Reinforced: - N + CMF N + CMF
ÛLL = 2000 V,
0.3
microsecond
rise time ***
* manufactured before 1.1.1998
** For motors manufactured before 1.1.1998, check for additional instructions with the motor
manufacturer.
*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive will be increased from the nominal level by resistor
braking or by the IGBT Supply Control Program (parameter selectable function), check with the
motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.

45
Note 1: The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.
Abbreviation Definition
UN nominal voltage of the supply network
ÛLL peak line-to-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must withstand
PN motor nominal power
du/dt du/dt filter at the output of the drive +E205
CMF common mode filter +E208
N N-end bearing: insulated motor non-driven end bearing
n.a. Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Note 2: Explosion-safe (Ex) motors

The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and
additional requirements for explosion-safe (Ex) motors.
Note 3: High-output motors and IP23 motors
For motors with higher rated output than what is stated for the particular frame size in EN 50347 (2001)
and for IP23 motors, the requirements of ABB random-wound motor series M3AA, M3AP, M3BP are
given below. For other motor types, see the Requirements table above. Apply the requirements of
range 100 kW < PN < 350 kW to motors with PN < 100 kW. Apply the requirements of range
PN > 350 kW to motors within the range 100 kW < PN < 350 kW. In other cases, consult the motor
manufacturer.

Manufacturer
200 kW
PN < 74 HP 74 HP < PN < PN > 268 HP
268 HP
A Random- UN < 500 V Standard - +N + N + CMF
B wound M3AA, 500 V < U < 600 V Standard + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
N
B M3AP, M3BP
or
Reinforced - +N + N + CMF
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
Note 4: HXR and AMA motors

All AMA machines (manufactured in Helsinki) for drive systems have form-wound windings. All HXR
machines manufactured in Helsinki starting 1.1.1998 have form-wound windings.
Note 5: ABB motors of types other than M2_, M3_, HX_ and AM_
Use the selection criteria given for non-ABB motors.
Note 6: Resistor braking of the drive
When the drive is in braking mode for a large part of its operation time, the intermediate circuit DC
voltage of the drive increases, the effect being similar to increasing the supply voltage by up to 20
percent. The voltage increase should be taken into consideration when determining the motor insulation
requirement.
Example: Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V application must be selected as if the drive were
supplied with 480 V.

46
Note 7: Calculating the rise time and the peak line-to-line voltage
The peak line-to-line voltage at the motor terminals generated by the drive as well as the voltage rise
time depend on the cable length. The requirements for the motor insulation system given in the table
are “worst case” requirements covering installations with 30 metre and longer cables. The rise time can
be calculated as follows: t = 0.8 · ÛLL/(du/dt). Read ÛLL and du/dt from the diagrams below. Multiply
the values of the graph by the supply voltage (UN).With resistor braking, the ÛLL and du/dt values are
approximately 20 % higher.
3.0 5.5
ÛLL/UN 5.0
2.5 du/dt
------------- (1/μs)
4.5 UN
2.0 4.0
3.5
1.5
3.0
ÛLL/UN
1.0 2.5
du/dt
------------- (1/μs)
UN 2.0
0.5
1.5
0.0 1.0
100 200 300 100 200 300
Cable length (m) Cable length (m)
With du/dt filter Without du/dt filter
Note 8: Sine filters protect the motor insulation system. Therefore, du/dt filter can be replaced with
a sine filter. The peak phase-to-phase voltage with the sine filter is approximately 1.5 × UN.
Note 9: Common mode filter is available as a separate kit (one box including three rings for one cable).
Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Only one permanent magnet motor can be connected to the inverter output.
It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet
synchronous motor and the drive output. The switch is needed to isolate the motor
during any maintenance work on the drive.
Supply connection
Disconnecting device (means)

Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.

47
EEA / Europe
If the drive is used in an application which must meet the European Union Machinery
Directive according to standard EN 60204-1 Safety of Machinery, the disconnecting
device must be one of the following types:
• a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
• a disconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
• a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
US
The disconnecting means must conform to the applicable safety regulations.
Main contactor
If used, dimension the contactor according to the nominal voltage and current of the
drive. The utilization category (IEC 947-4) is AC-1.
Fuses
See section Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection
Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables
The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional thermal protection devices are needed.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal overload

switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These
devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.

48
Thermal overload protection of the motor

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. Depending on a drive parameter value, the function either monitors
a calculated temperature value (based on a motor thermal model) or an actual
temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors. The user can tune the
thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data.
The most common temperature sensors are:
• motor sizes IEC180.225: thermal switch (e.g. Klixon)
• motor sizes IEC200.250 and larger: PTC or Pt100.
See the firmware manual for more information on the motor thermal protection, and
the connection and use of the temperature sensors.
Protection against short-circuit in the motor cable

The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional protection devices are needed.
Protection against short-circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable

Arrange the protection according to the following guide lines.
Circuit diagram Short-circuit
protection
Protect the drive and
Distribution Drive or drive input cable with fuses
board Input cable module or a circuit breaker.
See footnotes 1) and
1) 2).
~ M
~ 3~
2)
~ M
I>
~ 3~
1) Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data. The fuses will protect the input
cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in
case of a short-circuit inside the drive.

49
2) Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS800 can be used. Fuses must be used
with other circuit breakers. Contact your local ABB representative for approved breaker types and
supply network characteristics.
The protective characteristics of circuit breakers depend on the type, construction and settings of the
breakers. There are also limitations pertaining to the short-circuit capacity of the supply network.
WARNING! Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers,
independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker
enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure safe use, special attention must be paid to
the installation and placement of the breakers. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Circuit breakers must not be used without fuses in the USA.
Ground fault protection

The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the
unit against ground faults in the motor and the motor cable. This is not a personal
safety or a fire protection feature. The ground fault protective function can be
disabled with a parameter, refer to the appropriate ACS800 Firmware Manual.
The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit
and the frame. These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage
current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function.
Emergency stop devices

For safety reasons, install the emergency stop devices at each operator control
station and at other operating stations where emergency stop may be needed.
Note: Pressing the stop key ( ) on the control panel of the drive does not generate
an emergency stop of the motor or separate the drive from dangerous potential.

50
Prevention of Unexpected Start

The drive can be equipped with an optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function
according to standards IEC/EN 60204-1: 1997; ISO/DIS 14118: 2000 and EN 1037:
1996.
The Prevention of Unexpected Start function disables the control voltage of the
power semiconductors, thus preventing the inverter from generating the AC voltage
required to rotate the motor. By using this function, short-time operations (like
cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can be
performed without switching off the AC power supply to the drive.
The operator activates the Prevention of Unexpected Start function by opening a
switch on a control desk. An indicating lamp on the control desk will light, signalling
that the prevention is active. The switch can be locked out.
A Gate Driver Power Supply board (AGPS) and a 3 m connection wire are delivered
with the Prevention of Unexpected Start option kit. The Prevention of Unexpected
Start function complies with EN954-1 categories 1 and 3 when the following
installations are made:
The user must install on a control desk near the machinery:
• switching/disconnecting device for the circuitry. “Means shall be provided to
prevent inadvertent, and/or mistaken closure of the disconnecting device.”
EN 60204-1: 1997.
• indicating lamp; on = starting the drive is prevented, off = drive is operative.
• safety relay (type BD5935 has been approved by ABB)
(Switching/disconnecting device, indicating lamp and safety relay are not included in
the delivery.)
For connections to the drive, see section Prevention of Unexpected Start, AGPS
board in chapter Electrical installation.
WARNING! The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not disconnect the
voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work
on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the
drive system from the main supply.
Note: The Prevention of Unexpected Start function is not intended for stopping the
drive. If a running drive is stopped by using the Prevention of Unexpected Start
function, the drive will cut off the motor supply voltage and the motor will coast to
stop.

51
Selecting the power cables
General rules
Dimension the mains (input power) and motor cables according to local
regulations:
• The cable must be able to carry the drive load current. See chapter Technical
data for the rated currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70°C maximum permissible temperature of
conductor in continuous use. For US, see section Additional US requirements.
• The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor/cable (grounding wire) must
be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions
(so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault
occurs).
• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC. 750 V AC cable is accepted for
up to 600 V AC. For 690 V AC rated equipment, the rated voltage between the
conductors of the cable should be minimum 1 kV.
For drive frame size R5 and larger, or motors larger than 30 kW (40 HP),
symmetrical shielded motor cable must be used (figure below). A four-conductor
system can be used up to frame size R4 with up to 30 kW (40 HP) motors, but
shielded symmetrical motor cable is always recommended. The shield(s) of motor
cable(s) must have 360° bonding at both ends.
Note: When continuous metal conduit is employed, shielded cable is not required.
The conduit must have bonding at both ends as with cable shield.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but shielded symmetrical cable
is recommended. To operate as a protective conductor, the shield conductivity must
be as follows when the protective conductor is made of the same metal as the phase
conductors:
Cross-sectional area of the phase Minimum cross-sectional area of the corresponding
conductors protective conductor
S (mm2) Sp (mm2)
S < 16 S
16 < S < 35 16
35 < S S/2
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of symmetrical shielded cable

reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as the stress on
motor insulation, bearing currents and wear.
The motor cable and its PE pigtail (twisted shield) should be kept as short as
possible in order to reduce high frequency electromagnetic emission, as well as
stray currents outside the cable and capacitive current (relevant in power range
below 20 kW).

52
Alternative power cable types

Power cable types that can be used with the drive are represented below.
Recommended
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase conductors A separate PE conductor is required if the conductivity
and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically of the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the
constructed PE conductor, and a shield phase conductor.
PE conductor Shield
and shield Shield
PE
PE
PE Shield
A four-conductor system:
three phase conductors
and a protective
conductor.
Not allowed for motor cables Not allowed for motor cables with phase
conductor cross section larger than 10 mm2
[motors > 30 kW (40 HP)].
Motor cable shield

To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the
shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The
requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum
requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a
concentric layer of copper wires with an open helix of copper tape or copper wire.
The better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and the bearing
currents.
Copper wire screen Helix of copper tape Inner insulation

Insulation jacket
or copper wire
Cable core

53
Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable must be used for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used. For the North American market, 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to
500 V AC. 1000 V AC cable is required above 500 V AC (below 600 V AC). For
drives rated over 100 amperes, the power cables must be rated for 75°C (167°F).
Conduit
Separate parts of a conduit must be coupled together, bridge the joints with a ground
conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to
the drive enclosure and motor frame. Use separate conduits for input power, motor,
brake resistor, and control wiring. When conduit is employed, type MC continuous
corrugated aluminium armor cable or shielded cable is not required. A dedicated
ground cable is always required.
Note: Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.
Armored cable / shielded power cable

Six conductor (3 phases and 3 ground) type MC continuous corrugated aluminium
armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers (trade
names in parentheses):
• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)
• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)
• Oaknite (CLX).
Shielded power cables are available from Belden, LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX) and
Pirelli.

54
Power factor compensation capacitors

Power factor compensation is not needed with AC drives. However, if a drive is to be
connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed, note the following
restrictions.
WARNING! Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors or harmonic

filters to the motor cables (between the drive and the motor). They are not meant to
be used with AC drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or
themselves.
If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase
input of the drive:
1. Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the drive is
connected. The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even
damage the drive.
2. If capacitor load is increased/decreased step by step when the AC drive is
connected to the power line: Ensure that the connection steps are low enough not
to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive.
3. Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with
AC drives i.e. harmonic generating loads. In such systems, the compensation unit
should typically be equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter.
Equipment connected to the motor cable
Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc.

To minimize the emission level when safety switches, contactors, connection boxes
or similar equipment are installed in the motor cable between the drive and the
motor:
• EU: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degrees grounding for the
screens of both the incoming and outgoing cable, or connect the screens of the
cables otherwise together.
• US: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor
cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor.
Bypass connection
WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2, V2
and W2. If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches
or contactors. Mains (line) voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the unit.

55
Before opening a contactor (DTC control mode selected)

Stop the drive and wait for the motor to stop before opening a contactor between the
output of the drive and the motor when the DTC control mode is selected. See the
appropriate ACS800 Control Program Firmware Manual for the required parameter
settings. Otherwise, the contactor will be damaged. In scalar control, the contactor
can be opened with the drive running.
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case

of inductive loads
Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
The relay contacts on the RMIO board are protected with varistors (250 V) against
overvoltage peaks. In spite of this, it is highly recommended to equip inductive loads
with noise attenuating circuits [varistors, RC filters (AC) or diodes (DC)] in order to
minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, the disturbances may
connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form
a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.
Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the RMIO board terminal block.
RMIO
Relay outputs
Varistor X25
1 RO1
230 V AC 2 RO1
3 RO1
RC filter X26
1 RO2
230 V AC 2 RO2
3 RO2
Diode X27
1 RO3
24 VD C 2 RO3
3 RO3

56
Selecting the control cables

All control cables must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, e.g. JAMAK by NK Cables,
Finland) for analogue signals. This type of cable is recommended for the pulse
encoder signals also. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not
use common return for different analogue signals.
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but
single-shielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
a b
A double-shielded twisted A single-shielded twisted
pair cable multipair cable
Run analogue and digital signals in separate, shielded cables.

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals be run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.
Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (e.g. ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL,
Germany) has been tested and approved by ABB.
Control panel cable

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed
3 metres (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
option kits.

57
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O
WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, the connection of a thermistor (and other similar
components) to the digital inputs of the drive can be implemented in three alternate
ways:
1. There is double or reinforced insulation between the thermistor and live parts of
the motor.
2. Circuits connected to all digital and analogue inputs of the drive are protected
against contact and insulated with basic insulation (the same voltage level as the
drive main circuit) from other low voltage circuits.
3. An external thermistor relay is used. The insulation of the relay must be rated for
the same voltage level as the main circuit of the drive. For connection, see
ACS800 Firmware Manual.
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet)
WARNING! Protect against direct contact when installing, operating and servicing
the RMIO board wiring and optional modules attached to the board. The Protective
Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 are not fulfilled at
altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft).
Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease
electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output
voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are arranged at an
angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. Do not run extra cables through the drive.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the
grounding electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local
equalizing of potential.

58
A diagram of the cable routing is below.
Motor cable
Drive
min 300 mm (12 in.)
Power cable
Input power cable Motor cable
min 200 mm (8 in.) 90°

min 500 mm (20 in.)
Control cables
Control cable ducts
230 V 230 V
24 V (120 V) 24 V (120 V)
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Lead 24 V and 230 V (120 V) control
insulated for 230 V (120 V) or insulated cables in separate ducts inside the
with an insulation sleeving for cabinet.
230 V (120 V).

59

This chapter describes the electrical installation procedure of the drive.
WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified
electrician. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring
the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) during
installation. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after
disconnecting mains power.
Checking the insulation of the assembly
Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (e.g. hi-pot or
megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has
been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis (2500 V rms
50 Hz for 1 second) at the factory. Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the
drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.
Input cable
Check the insulation of the input cable according to local regulations before
connecting it to the drive.
Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is disconnected from the drive output terminals U2,
V2 and W2.
M 2. Measure the insulation resistances of the motor cable and the motor between
ohm each phase and the Protective Earth by using a measuring voltage of 1 kV DC.
PE
The insulation resistance must be higher than 1 Mohm.
60
IT (ungrounded) systems
Ensure that the drive is not equipped with optional EMC filter, i.e. type code does not
include selections +E200 or +E202.
However if EMC filters exist, disconnect the EMC filter capacitors of selections
+E202 and +E200 before connecting the drive to an ungrounded system. For
detailed instructions on how to do this, please contact your local ABB distributor.
WARNING! If a drive with EMC filter selection +E202 or +E200 is installed on an IT

system [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms)
power system], the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC
filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the unit.
61
Power cable connection
Power cable connection
Drive with brake chopper included

INPUT UDC+ UDC- OUTPUT
PE U1 V1 W1 R- R+ U2 V2 W2
1) 2)
(PE) PE (PE)
3)
V1 W1
U1
External brake
For alternatives, see
Planning the electrical
resistor (360
degrees grounding
3 ~
installation: Motor
required)
Disconnecting device
(means). L1 L2 L3
Connecting the power cables

• Connect the twisted shield of the cable to the drive grounding terminal. Note:
cable lugs are needed in frame sizes R2 and R3.
• Supply cable grounding: If shielded cable is used, and the conductivity of the
shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor, use a separate PE
cable (1) or a cable with a grounding conductor (2). With shielded cable 360°
grounding of the supply cables is recommended.
Motor cable grounding: Use a separate grounding cable (3) if the conductivity of
the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is
no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable (see Planning the
electrical installation: Selecting the power cables).
360 degrees grounding is required at the cabinet entry in first environment
installations. First environment EMC compliance is defined in chapter Technical
data.
Note: If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor
cable in addition to the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the
grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends.
Note: Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable. Connecting its
fourth conductor at the motor end increases bearing currents and causes extra
wear.
62
• Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals
and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals.
Strip the conductor ends as follows to fit them inside the power cable connection
terminals.
Note: Lead the unstripped cable as close to the terminals as possible. All
unstripped parts must be protected against contact.
Frame size Stripping length
mm in.
R2, R3 10 0.39
R4, R5 16 0.63
R6 28 1.10
• Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically.

• Ground the other end of the input cable shield or PE conductor at the distribution
board.
Grounding the motor cable shield at the motor end
For minimum radio frequency interference ground the cable shield 360 degrees at
the lead-through of the motor terminal box
360 degrees grounding
Conductive gaskets
or ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows: flattened width > 1/5 · length.
b > 1/5 · a
b
a
63
Frame sizes R2 to R4
U1 V1 W1 UDC+
R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2
PE
PE
Frame size R5
UDC+
PE U1 V1 W1 R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2 PE
64
Frame size R6: Cable lug installation [16 to 70 mm2 (6 to 2/0 AWG) cables]
U1 UDC+
U1
U1 V1 W1 R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2 Remove the screw terminals.
Fasten the cable lugs to the
remaining bolts with M10
nuts.
Isolate the ends of the cable

lugs with insulating tape or
shrink tube
PE
65
Frame size R6: Cable terminal installation [95 to 185 mm2 (3/0 to 350 AWG) cables]
U1 UDC+
U1
U1 V1 W1 R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2
PE a. Connect the cable to the terminal.

b. Connect the terminal to the drive.
WARNING! If the wire size is less than
95 mm2 (3/0 AWG), a cable lug must
be used. A cable of wire size less than
95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) connected to this
terminal will loosen and may damage
the drive.
Power cable protection

Frame size R5
Cover the power cable terminals as follows:
1. Cut holes for the installed cables into the clear plastic shroud.
2. Press the shroud onto the terminals.
1 2
66
Removal of the shroud with a screw driver:
Frame size R6
Cover the power cable terminals as follows:
1. Cut holes for the installed cables into the clear plastic shroud in cable lug
installations.
2. Press the shroud onto the terminals.
View of cable terminal

2 installation
Removal of the shroud by lifting up with a screw driver from the corner:
Warning sticker
There are warning stickers in different languages inside the packing box of the drive.
Attach a warning sticker in the language of your choice onto the plastic skeleton
above the power cable terminals.
67
Connecting the control cables

Connect the control cables as described below. Connect the conductors to the
appropriate detachable terminals of the RMIO board [see chapter Motor control and
I/O board (RMIO)]. Tighten the screws to secure the connection.
Terminals
Location of terminals vary depending on the drive frame size.
The control cable connection terminals are
exposed when the control panel mounting platform
is turned aside by pulling this knob. Be careful, do Detachable connection terminals (pull up)
not use excess force when pulling.
X39 for control panel cable
(control panel is an option)
Terminal for optional Optional module 1

Start
X41 Optional module 2
I/O cables: Ground the
control cable shields in the DDCS communication
holes with screws. See option module 3:
section 360 degrees RDCO
grounding.
Place the warning
sticker here
4
Relay outputs
3
2
1
68
Frame sizes R5 and R6
View of frame size R6
Control panel X41 for Prevention of

(optional) Unexpected Start (AGPS
board)
Optional module 1 Optional module 2
DDCS communication option module 3: RDCO

Control cable
grounding: see
section 360 Place the warning sticker here
degrees
grounding X41 Detachable connection terminals (pull up)
Terminal for optional

Start
69
360 degrees grounding
Insulation
4
3
2
1
Double-shielded cable Single-shielded cable
When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material
• Strip the cable carefully (do not cut the grounding wire and the shield)
• Turn the shield inside out to expose the conductive surface.
• Wrap the grounding wire around the conductive surface.
• Slide a conductive clamp onto the conductive part.
• Fasten the clamp to the grounding plate with a screw as close as possible to the
terminals where the wires are about to be connected.
Connecting the shield wires

Single shielded cables: Twist the grounding wires of the outer shield and connect
them through the shortest possible route to the nearest grounding hole with a cable
lug and a screw. Double shielded cables: Connect each pair cable shield (twisted
grounding wires) with other pair cable shields of the same cable to the nearest
grounding hole with a cable lug and a screw.
Do not connect shields of different cables to the same cable lug and grounding
screw.
Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few
nanofarads high-frequency capacitor (e.g. 3.3 nF / 630 V). The shield can also be
grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant
voltage drop between the end points.
Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible. Twisting the
wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling.
70
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules
Module
As short as possible
Shield
4
3
2
1
Note: The RDIO module does not

include a terminal for cable shield
grounding. Ground the pair cable
shields here.
Pulse encoder module cabling
As short as
possible
Note1: If the encoder is of
1
2 unisolated type, ground the encoder
3
4 cable at the drive end only. If the
encoder is galvanically isolated
from the motor shaft and the stator
frame, ground the encoder cable
Shield
shield at the drive and the encoder

RTAC end.
Note 2: Twist the pair cable wires.
Wrap copper tape around the

stripped part of the cable under the
clamp. Be careful. Do not cut the
grounding wire. Clamp as close to
the terminals as possible.
71
Installation of optional modules and PC

The optional module (such as fieldbus adapter, I/O extension module and the pulse
encoder interface) is inserted in the optional module slot of the RMIO board (see
section Connecting the control cables) and fixed with two screws. See the
appropriate optional module manual for cable connections.
Fibre optic link

A DDCS fibre optic link is provided via the RDCO optional module for PC tools,
master/follower link, NDIO, NTAC, NAIO and fieldbus adapter modules of type Nxxx.
See RDCO User’s Manual for connections. Observe colouring codes when installing
fibre optic cables. Blue connectors go to blue terminals, and grey connectors to grey
terminals.
When installing multiple modules on the same channel connect them in a ring.
External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board via terminal X34
This section describes how to connect an external +24 V power supply for the RMIO
board via terminal X34. For the current consumption of the RMIO board, see chapter
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Note: External power is easier to supply to the RMIO board via terminal X23, see
chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Parameter settings
In Standard Control Program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to
EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply.
Connecting +24 V external power supply

1. Break off the tab covering the +24 VDC power input connector with pliers.
2. Lift the connector upwards.
3. Disconnect the wires from the connector (keep the connector for later use).
4. Isolate the ends of the wires individually with insulating tape.
5. Cover the isolated ends of the wires with insulating tape.
6. Push the wires inside the skeleton.
7. Connect the wires of the +24 V external power supply to the disconnected
connector:
if a two-way connector, + wire to terminal 1 and - wire to terminal 2
if a three-way connector, + wire to terminal 2 and - wire to terminal 3.
8. Plug the connector in.
72
Frame sizes R2 to R4 Frame sizes R5 and R6
X34
4
4
73
5 6 7
RMIO board RMIO board

1 2 3 1 2 3
X34 X34
+ - + -
1 2 1 2 3
8
Connection of a two-way Connection of a three-way

connector connector
74
Prevention of Unexpected Start, AGPS board
WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present on the AGPS board even when the
115...230 V supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of
this manual and the instruction in this section when working on the AGPS board.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) and the
115...230 V source for the AGPS board is switched off during installation and
maintenance. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after
disconnecting mains power.
Connect the optional AGPS board as follows:

• Remove the enclosure cover by undoing the fixing screws (1).
• Ground the unit via the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:1 of the
AGPS board.
• Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal block X2 of the AGPS
board (2) and drive terminal block X41.
• Connect a cable between connector X1 of the AGPS board (3) and the
115...230 V source.
• Fasten the enclosure cover back with screws.
X2
X1
115...230 V
3
75
Note: Location of the X41 terminal block varies according to the drive frame size,
see page 67.
Note: Maximum cable length between AGPS terminal block X2 and drive terminal
block is restricted to 10 m.
For technical data see section AGPS-11C in chapter Technical data.
76
The following figure presents the circuit diagram of the Prevention of Unexpected
Start.
/U4
3AFE00374994
77

This chapter shows
• external control connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard Control
Program (Factory Macro)
• specifications of the inputs and outputs of the board.
This chapter applies to ACS800 units which employ RMIO-01 board from revision J
onwards and RMIO-02 board from revision H onwards.
Note on terminal labelling

Optional modules (Rxxx) may have identical terminal designations with the RMIO
board.
Note on external power supply

External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if
• the application requires a fast start after connecting the input power supply
• fieldbus communication is required when the input power supply is disconnected.
The RMIO board can be supplied from an external power source via terminal X23 or
X34 or via both X23 and X34. The internal power supply to terminal X34 can be left
connected when using terminal X23.
WARNING! If the RMIO board is supplied from an external power source via
terminal X34, the loose end of the cable removed from the RMIO board terminal
must be secured mechanically to a location where it cannot come into contact with
electrical parts. If the screw terminal plug of the cable is removed, the wire ends
must be individually insulated.
Parameter settings
In Standard Control Program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to
EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply.

78
External control connections (non-US)

External control cable connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard
Control Program (Factory Macro) are shown below. For external control connections
of other control macros and programs, see the appropriate Firmware Manual.
X20
Terminal block size: 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) 2 AGND 10 kohm
Tightening torque: X21
0.2 to 0.4 Nm (0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft) 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
2 AGND 10 kohm
3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin >
4 AI1- 200 kohm
5 AI2+ By default, not in use. 0(4) ... 20 mA, Rin =
6 AI2- 100 ohm
8 AI3- 100 ohm
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor nom.
10 AO1- speed, RL < 700 ohm
A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor
12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
1) Only
effective if par. 10.03 is set to 2 DI2 Forward/Reverse 1)
REQUEST by the user. 3 DI3 Not in use
4 DI4 Acceleration & deceleration select 2)
2)
0 = open, 1 = closed 5 DI5 Constant speed select 3)
DI4 Ramp times according to 6 DI6 Constant speed select 3)
0 parameters 22.02 and 22.03 7 +24VD +24 VDC max. 100 mA
1 parameters 22.04 and 22.05 8 +24VD
9 DGND1 Digital ground
3)
See par. group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. 10 DGND2 Digital ground
DI5 DI6 Operation 11 DIIL Start interlock (0 = stop) 4)
0 0 Set speed through AI1 X23
1 0 Constant speed 1 1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
0 1 Constant speed 2 2 GND isolated, 24 VDC 250 mA 5)
1 1 Constant speed 3 X25
1 RO1 Relay output 1: ready
4) 2 RO1
See parameter 21.09 START INTRL
FUNC. 3 RO1
5)
Total maximum current shared X26
between this output and optional 1 RO2 Relay output 2: running
modules installed on the board.
2 RO2
3 RO2
X27
1 RO3 Relay output 3: fault (-1)
Fault 2 RO3
3 RO3

79
External control connections (US)

External control cable connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard
Control Program (Factory Macro US version) are shown below. For external control
connections of other control macros and programs, see the appropriate Firmware
Manual.
X20
Terminal block size: 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
2
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm (22 to 12 AWG) 2 AGND 10 kohm
Tightening torque: X21
0.2 to 0.4 Nm (0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft) 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
2 AGND 10 kohm
3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin >
4 AI1- 200 kohm
6 AI2- 100 ohm
8 AI3- 100 ohm
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor nom.
A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor
X22
1 DI1 Start ( )
1)
Only effective if par. 10.03 is set to 2 DI2 Stop ( )
REQUEST by the user. 3 DI3 Forward/Reverse 1)
2)
0 = open, 1 = closed 5 DI5 Constant speed select 3)
DI4 Ramp times according to 6 DI6 Constant speed select 3)
0 parameters 22.02 and 22.03 7 +24VD +24 VDC max. 100 mA
1 parameters 22.04 and 22.05 8 +24VD
3) See par. group 12 CONSTANT 10 DGND2 Digital ground
SPEEDS. 11 DIIL Start interlock (0 = stop) 4)
DI5 DI6 Operation X23
0 0 Set speed through AI1 1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
1 0 Constant speed 1
2 GND isolated, 24 VDC 250 mA 5)
X25
1 RO1 Relay output 1: ready
4) 2 RO1
See parameter 21.09 START INTRL
3 RO1
FUNC.
5) Total maximum current shared X26
between this output and optional 1 RO2 Relay output 2: running
modules installed on the board. 2 RO2
3 RO2
X27
1 RO3 Relay output 3: fault (-1)
Fault 2 RO3
3 RO3

80
RMIO board specifications

Analogue inputs
With Standard Control Program two programmable differential current inputs (0 mA /
4 mA ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm) and one programmable differential voltage input (-
10 V / 0 V / 2 V ... +10 V, Rin > 200 kohm).
The analogue inputs are galvanically isolated as a group.
Insulation test voltage 500 VAC, 1 min
Max. common mode voltage ±15 VDC
between the channels
Common mode rejection ratio > 60 dB at 50 Hz
Resolution 0.025% (12 bit) for the -10 V ... +10 V input. 0.5% (11 bit) for the 0 ... +10 V and
0 ... 20 mA inputs.
Inaccuracy ±0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25°C (77°F). Temperature coefficient: ±100 ppm/°C
(±56 ppm/°F), max.
Constant voltage output

Voltage +10 VDC, 0, -10 VDC ±0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25°C (77°F). Temperature
coefficient: ±100 ppm/°C (±56 ppm/°F) max.
Maximum load 10 mA
Applicable potentiometer 1 kohm to 10 kohm
Auxiliary power output

Voltage 24 VDC ±10%, short-circuit proof
Maximum current 250 mA (without any optional modules inserted onto slots 1 and 2)
Analogue outputs
Two programmable current outputs: 0 (4) to 20 mA, RL < 700 ohm
Resolution 0.1% (10 bit)
Inaccuracy ±1% (Full Scale Range) at 25°C (77°F). Temperature coefficient: ±200 ppm/°C
(±111 ppm/°F) max.
Digital inputs
With Standard Control Program six programmable digital inputs (common ground: 24
VDC, -15% to +20%) and a start interlock input. Group isolated, can be divided in two
isolated groups (see Isolation and grounding diagram below).
Thermistor input: 5 mA, < 1.5 kohm “1” (normal temperature), > 4 kohm “0”
(high temperature), open circuit “0” (high temperature).
Internal supply for digital inputs (+24 VDC): short-circuit proof. An external 24 VDC
supply can be used instead of the internal supply.
Insulation test voltage 500 VAC, 1 min
Logical thresholds < 8 VDC “0”, > 12 VDC “1”
Input current DI1 to DI 5: 10 mA, DI6: 5 mA
Filtering time constant 1 ms

81
Relay outputs
Three programmable relay outputs
Switching capacity 8 A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC, 0.4 A at 120 VDC
Minimum continuous current 5 mA rms at 24 VDC
Maximum continuous current 2 A rms
Contact material Silver Cadmium Oxide (AgCdO)
Insulation test voltage 4 kVAC, 1 minute
DDCS fibre optic link

With optional communication adapter module RDCO. Protocol: DDCS (ABB
Distributed Drives Communication System)
24 VDC power input
Voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Typical current consumption 250 mA
(without optional modules)
Maximum current consumption 1200 mA (with optional modules inserted)
The terminals on the RMIO board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra
Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also
fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft). Above 2000 m (6562 ft), see page 57.

82
Isolation and grounding diagram
(Test voltage: 500 V AC)

X20
1 VREF-
2 AGND
X21
1 VREF+
2 AGND
3 AI1+
4 AI1- Common mode
5 AI2+ voltage between
6 AI2- channels ±15 V
7 AI3+
8 AI3-
9 AO1+
10 AO1-
11 AO2+
12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4 Jumper J1 settings:
9 DGND1
5 DI5 All digital inputs share a

J1
6 DI6 common ground. This is the
7 +24VD default setting.
8 +24VD
11 DIIL
10 DGND2
X23 Grounds of input
1 +24 V or groups DI1…DI4 and
2 GND DI5/DI6/DIIL are
X25 separate (insulation
voltage 50 V).
1 RO1
2 RO1
3 RO1
X26
1 RO2
2 RO2
3 RO2
X27
1 RO3
2 RO3
3 RO3
(Test voltage:
4 kV AC)
Ground

83
Checklist
Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go
through the checklist below together with another person. Read the Safety
instructions on the first pages of this manual before you work on the unit.
Check
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The ambient operating conditions are allowed. (See Mechanical installation, Technical data:
IEC data or NEMA data, Ambient conditions.)
The unit is fixed properly into the cabinet. (See Planning the cabinet assembly and
Mechanical installation.)
The cooling air will flow freely.
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical
installation: Motor selection and compatibility, Technical data: Motor connection.)
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation, Electrical installation.)
Drive does not include the EMC filter option (+E202, +E200) or the +E202 and +E200 EMC
filter capacitors are disconnected if the drive is connected to an IT (ungrounded) system.
The capacitors are reformed if stored over one year (refer to ACS600/800 Capacitor
Reforming Guide [3AFE64059629 (English)].
The drive is grounded properly.
The mains (input power) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The mains (input power) connections at U1, V1 and W1 and their tightening torques are OK.
Appropriate mains (input power) fuses and disconnector are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 and their tightening torques are OK.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
There are no power factor compensation capacitors in the motor cable.
The external control connections inside the drive are OK.
There are no tools, foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive.
Mains (input power) voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with bypass
connection).
Motor connection box and other covers are in place.
84
Check
Modules with prevention of unexpected start option only (AGPS board): The prevention of
unexpected start circuit is completed.
85
Maintenance

This chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Safety
WARNING! Read the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual before
performing any maintenance on the equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can
cause injury or death.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval Instruction
Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming.
Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of See Heatsink.

and cleaning the environment (every 6 to 12
months)
Change of additional cooling Every three years See Additional fan.

fan.
Cooling fan change Every six years See Fan.
Frame size R4 and up: Every ten years See Capacitors.

capacitor change
Heatsink
The heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The drive runs into
overtemperature warnings and faults if the heatsink is not clean. In a “normal”
environment (not dusty, not clean) the heatsink should be checked annually, in a
dusty environment more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove the cooling fan (see section Fan).
2. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously
use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. Note: If there is a risk of
the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
Maintenance
86
Fan
The cooling fan lifespan of the drive is about 50 000 operating hours. The actual
lifespan depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature. See the appropriate
ACS800 Firmware Manual for an actual signal which indicates the hours of usage of
the fan. For resetting the running time signal after a fan replacement, please contact
ABB.
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the
gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use
other than ABB specified spare parts.
Fan replacement (R2, R3)

To remove the fan, release the retaining clips. Disconnect the cable. Install the new
fan in reverse order.
Bottom view
Maintenance
87
Fan replacement (R4)

1. Loosen the screws that fasten the fan mounting plate to the frame.
2. Push the fan mounting plate to the left and pull it out.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable.
4. Undo the screws that fasten the fan to the fan mounting plate.
5. Install the new fan in reverse order.
1 1 Bottom view
2
3
View from above fan
plate pulled out
4 4
4 4
Maintenance
88

1. Undo the fastening screws of the swing-out frame.
2. Open the swing-out frame.
3. Disconnect the cable.
4. Undo the fastening screws of the fan.
5. Install the new fan in reverse order.
Bottom view
4 4 2
Maintenance
89

To remove the fan, undo the fixing screws. Disconnect the cable. Install the new fan
in reverse order.
Bottom view
Additional fan
In ACS800-04/U4 (R2...R6) units there is an additional fan in all types except in
-0001-2, -0002-2, -0003-2, -0003-3, -0004-3, -0005-3, -0004-5, -0005-5 and
-0006-5.
Replacement (R2, R3)

To remove the fan, release the retaining clip (1). Disconnect the cable (2, detachable
terminal). Install the new fan in reverse order.
Air flow upwards

1
2
Rotation direction
View from above
Maintenance
90
Replacement (R4, R5)

The fan is located on the lower right-hand side of the unit (R4) or on the right-hand
side of the control panel (R5). Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable. Install the fan
in reverse order.
Replacement (R6)
To remove the fan, release the retaining clips by pulling the back edge (1) of the fan
upwards. Disconnect the cable (2, detachable terminal). Install the new fan in
reverse order.
Air flow upwards
Rotation direction
2 View from above

1
Capacitors
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Their lifespan
is from 45 000 to 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient
temperature. Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a mains fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements for frame size R4 and up are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.
Reforming
Reform (re-age) spare part capacitors once a year according to ACS600/800
Capacitor Reforming Guide [3AFE64059629 (English)].
LEDs
This table describes LEDs of the drive.
Where LED When the LED is lit
RMIO board Red Drive in fault state

Green The power supply on the board is OK.
Maintenance
91
Technical data

This chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings, sizes
and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and
other markings and warranty policy.
IEC data
Ratings
The IEC ratings for the ACS800-04 with 50 Hz and 60 Hz supplies are given below.
The symbols are described below the table.
ACS800-04 size Nominal No-overload Light-overload Heavy-duty use Frame Air Heat
ratings use use size flow dissipation
Icont.max Imax Pcont.max I2N PN I2hd Phd
A kW
A A kW A kW m3/h W
Three-phase supply voltage 208 V, 220 V, 230 V or 240 V
-0001-2 5.1 6.5 1.1 4.7 0.75 3.4 0.55 R2 35 100
-0002-2 6.5 8.2 1.5 6.0 1.1 4.3 0.75 R2 35 100
-0003-2 8.5 10.8 1.5 7.7 1.5 5.7 1.1 R2 35 100
-0004-2 10.9 13.8 2.2 10.2 2.2 7.5 1.5 R2 35 120
-0005-2 13.9 17.6 3 12.7 3 9.3 2.2 R2 35 140
-0006-2 19 24 4 18 4 14 3 R3 69 160
-0009-2 25 32 5.5 24 5,5 19 4 R3 69 200
-0011-2 34 46 7.5 31 7.5 23 5.5 R3 69 250
-0016-2 44 62 11 42 11 32 7.5 R4 103 340
-0020-2 55 72 15 50 11 37 7.5 R4 103 440
-0025-2 72 86 18.5 69 18.5 49 11 R5 250 530
-0030-2 86 112 22 80 22 60 15 R5 250 610
-0040-2 103 138 30 94 22 69 18.5 R5 250 810
-0050-2 141 164 37 132 37 97 30 R6 405 1190
-0060-2 166 202 45 155 45 115 30 R6 405 1190
-0070-2 202 282 55 184 55 141 37 R6 405 1440
Technical data
92
A kW
A A kW A kW m3/h W
Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V or 415 V
-0003-3 5.1 6.5 1.5 4.7 1.5 3.4 1.1 R2 35 100
-0004-3 6.5 8.2 2.2 5.9 2.2 4.3 1.5 R2 35 120
-0005-3 8.5 10.8 3 7.7 3 5.7 2.2 R2 35 140
-0006-3 10.9 13.8 4 10.2 4 7.5 3 R2 35 160
-0009-3 13.9 17.6 5.5 12.7 5.5 9.3 4 R2 35 200
-0011-3 19 24 7.5 18 7.5 14 5.5 R3 69 250
-0016-3 25 32 11 24 11 19 7.5 R3 69 340
-0020-3 34 46 15 31 15 23 11 R3 69 440
-0023-3 40 46 22 39 18.5 28 15 R3 69 520
-0025-3 44 62 22 41 18.5 32 15 R4 103 530
-0030-3 55 72 30 50 22 37 18.5 R4 103 610
-0035-3 59 72 30 57 30 41 22 R4 103 660
-0040-3 72 86 37 69 30 49 22 R5 168 810
-0050-3 86 112 45 80 37 60 30 R5 168 990
-0060-3 103 138 55 100 55 69 37 R5 168 1190
-0075-3 145 170 75 141 75 100 45 R5 405 1440
-0070-3 141 164 75 132 55 97 45 R6 405 1440
-0100-3 166 202 90 155 75 115 55 R6 405 1940
-0120-3 202 282 110 184 90 141 75 R6 405 2310
-0135-3 225 326 110 220 110 163 90 R6 405 2810
-0165-3 260 326 132 254 132 215 110 R6 405 3260
Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V, 480 V or 500 V
-0004-5 4.9 6.5 2.2 4.5 2.2 3.4 1.5 R2 35 120
-0005-5 6.2 8.2 3 5.6 3 4.2 2.2 R2 35 140
-0006-5 8.1 10.8 4 7.7 4 5.6 3 R2 35 160
-0009-5 10.5 13.8 5.5 10 5.5 7.5 4 R2 35 200
-0011-5 13.2 17.6 7.5 12 7.5 9.2 5.5 R2 35 250
-0016-5 19 24 11 18 11 13 7.5 R3 69 340
-0020-5 25 32 15 23 15 18 11 R3 69 440
-0025-5 34 46 18.5 31 18.5 23 15 R3 69 530
-0028-5 38 46 22 37 22 27 18.5 R3 69 590
-0030-5 42 62 22 39 22 32 18.5 R4 103 610
-0040-5 48 72 30 44 30 36 22 R4 103 810
-0045-5 56 72 37 54 37 39 22 R4 103 950
-0050-5 65 86 37 61 37 50 30 R5 168 990
-0060-5 79 112 45 75 45 60 37 R5 168 1190
-0070-5 96 138 55 88 55 69 45 R5 168 1440
-0105-5 145 170 90 141 90 100 55 R5 405 2150
-0100-5 124 164 75 115 75 88 55 R6 405 1940
-0120-5 157 202 90 145 90 113 75 R6 405 2310
-0140-5 180 282 110 163 110 141 90 R6 405 2810
-0165-5 225 326 132 220 132 163 110 R6 405 3260
-0205-5 260 326 160 254 160 215 132 R6 405 3800
Technical data
93
A kW
A A kW A kW m3/h W
Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 550 V, 575 V, 600 V, 660 V or 690 V
-0011-7 13 14 11 11.5 7.5 8.5 5.5 R4 103 300
-0016-7 17 19 15 15 11 11 7.5 R4 103 340
-0020-7 22 28 18.5 20 15 15 11 R4 103 440
-0025-7 25 38 22 23 18.5 19 15 R4 103 530
-0030-7 33 44 30 30 22 22 18.5 R4 103 610
-0040-7 36 54 30 34 30 27 22 R4 103 690
-0050-7 51 68 45 46 37 34 30 R5 250 840
-0060-7 57 84 55 52 45 42 37 R5 250 1010
-0070-7 79 104 75 73 55 54 45 R6 405 1220
-0100-7 93 124 90 86 75 62 55 R6 405 1650
-0120-7 113 172 110 108 90 86 75 R6 405 1960
-0145-7 134 190 132 125 110 95 90 R6 405 2660
-0175-7 166 245 160 155 132 131 110 R6 405 3470
-0205-7 190 245 160 180 160 147 132 R6 405 4180
PDM code: 00096931-J
Symbols
Nominal ratings
Icont.max continuous rms output current. No overload capability at 40°C.
Imax maximum output current. Available for 10 s at start, otherwise as long as allowed by drive
temperature.
Typical ratings:
No-overload use
Pcont.max typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 motors at the nominal voltage,
230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Light-overload use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 motors at the nominal voltage,
230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability)
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 motors at the nominal voltage,
230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range. To achieve
the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to
the rated motor current.
Note 1: The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · Phd, 1.1 · PN or Pcont.max (whichever
value is greatest). If the limit is exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The
function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload. If the condition exists for 5 minutes, the
limit is set to Pcont.max.
Note 2: The ratings apply in ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F). In lower temperatures the ratings
are higher (except Imax).
Note 3: Use the DriveSize PC tool for a more accurate dimensioning if the ambient temperature is
below 40°C (104°F) or the drive is loaded cyclically.
Technical data
94
Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases if the installation site altitude exceeds 1000 metres
(3300 ft), or if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F).
Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40°C (+104°F) to +50°C (+122°F) the rated output current is decreased by
1% for every additional 1°C (1.8°F). The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in
the rating table by the derating factor.
Example If the ambient temperature is 50°C (+122°F), the derating factor is 100% - 1 % · 10°C =
90% or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I or 0.90 · I . °C
2N 2hd
Altitude derating
In altitudes from 1000 to 4000 m (3300 to 13123 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for every 100 m
(328 ft). For a more accurate derating, use the DriveSize PC tool. See Installation sites above 2000
metres (6562 feet) on page 57.
Cooling characteristics
ACS800-04 Minimum effective area of air inlet Minimum effective area of air outlet
frame size cm2 cm2
IP22 cabinet IP54 cabinet IP22 cabinet IP54 cabinet
R2 125 250 200 400
R3 250 500 400 800
R4 375 750 600 1200
R5 500 1000 800 1600
R6 1000 2000 1600 3200
Cooling requirements for flange mounting
ACS800-04 Air flow: drive front side Air flow: heat sink side
frame size m3/h m3/h
R2 18 35
R3 30 69
R4 30 103
R5 30 168
R6 30 405
Technical data
95
Fuses
gG and aR fuses for protection against short-circuit in the input power cable or drive
are listed below. Either fuse type may be used if it operates rapidly enough.
Check from the fuse time-current curve that the operating time of the fuse is
below 0.5 seconds. The operating time depends on the supply network impedance
and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply cable. The short-circuit current
can be calculated as shown below in section Frame sizes R5 and R6.
Note 1: See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection. For
UL recognized fuses, see NEMA data on page 103.
Note 2: In multicable installations, install only one fuse per phase (not one fuse per conductor).
Note 3: Larger fuses than the recommended ones must not be used.
Note 4: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of
the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.
ACS800-04 Input Fuse

size current A A2s * V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0001-2 4.4 10 483 500 ABB Control OFAF000H10 000
-0005-2 12 16 993 500 ABB Control OFAF000H16 000
Technical data
96
ACS800-04 Input Fuse

size current A A2s * V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0011-7 12 16 1100 690 ABB Control OFAA000GG16 000
PDM code:00096931-J
Frame sizes R5 and R6

Choose between gG and aR fuses according to the table under Quick guide for
selecting between gG and aR fuses on page 100, or verify the operating time by
checking that the short-circuit current of the installation is at least the value
given in the fuse table. The short-circuit current can be calculated as follows:
U
Ik2-ph =
2· Rc2 + (Zk + Xc)2
where
Ik2-ph = short-circuit current in symmetrical two-phase short-circuit (A)
U = network line-to-line voltage (V)
Rc = cable resistance (ohm)
Zk = = zk · UN2/SN = transformer impedance (ohm)
zk = transformer impedance (%)
UN = transformer rated voltage (V)
SN = nominal apparent power of the transformer (kVA)
Xc = cable reactance (ohm).
Technical data
97
Calculation example
Drive:
• ACS800-04-0075-3
• supply voltage U = 410 V
Transformer:
• rated power SN = 600 kVA
• rated voltage UN = 430 V
• transformer impedance zk = 7.2%.
Supply cable:
• length = 170 m
• resistance/length = 0.398 ohm/km
• reactance/length = 0.082 ohm/km.
UN2 (430 V)2

Zk = zk · = 0.072 · = 22.19 mohm
SN 600 kVA
ohm
Rc = 170 m · 0.398 km = 67.66 mohm
ohm
Xc = 170 m · 0.082 = 13.94 mohm
km
410 V
Ik2-ph = = 2.7 kA
2· (67.66 mohm)2 + (22.19 mohm + 13.94 mohm)2
The calculated short-circuit current 2.7 kA is higher than the minimum short-circuit current of the drive
gG fuse type OFAF00H160 (2400 A). -> The 500 V gG fuse (ABB Control OFAF00H160) can be used.
Technical data
98
gG fuses
ACS800-04 size Input Min. short- Fuse
current circuit
current 1)
A A A2s * V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0025-2 67 1050 80 34500 500 ABB Control OFAF000H80 000
-0050-7 52 740 63 28600 690 ABB Control OFAA0GG63 0
PDM code:00096931-J, 00556489
* maximum total I2t value for 550 V or 690 V

1)
minimum short-circuit current of the installation
Technical data
99
Ultrarapid (aR) fuses

ACS800-04 size Input Min. Fuse
current short-
circuit
current 1)
A A A2s V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0025-2 67 400 100 4 650 690 Bussmann 170M1567 DIN000
-0030-2 81 520 125 8 500 690 Bussmann 170M1568 DIN000
-0040-2 101 695 160 8 500 690 Bussmann 170M1569 DIN000
-0050-2 138 1630 315 80 500 690 Bussmann 170M1572 DIN000
-0060-2 163 1280 315 46 500 690 Bussmann 170M3817 DIN1*
-0070-2 202 1810 400 105 000 690 Bussmann 170M3819 DIN1*
-0040-3 69 400 100 4 650 690 Bussmann 170M1567 DIN000
-0050-3 83 520 125 8 500 690 Bussmann 170M1568 DIN000
-0060-3 100 695 160 8 500 690 Bussmann 170M1569 DIN000
-0075-3 142 1630 315 80 500 690 Bussmann 170M1572 DIN000
-0070-3 138 1630 315 80 500 690 Bussmann 170M1572 DIN000
-0100-3 163 1280 315 46 500 690 Bussmann 170M3817 DIN1*
-0120-3 198 1810 400 105 000 690 Bussmann 170M3819 DIN1*
-0135-3 221 2210 500 145 000 690 Bussmann 170M5810 DIN2*
-0165-3 254 2620 550 190 000 690 Bussmann 170M5811 DIN2*
-0050-5 64 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567 DIN000
-0060-5 78 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568 DIN000
-0070-5 95 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568 DIN000
-0105-5 142 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572 DIN000
-0100-5 121 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572 DIN000
-0120-5 155 1280 315 46500 690 Bussmann 170M3817 DIN1*
-0140-5 180 1810 400 105000 690 Bussmann 170M3819 DIN1*
-0165-5 222 2210 500 145 000 690 Bussmann 170M5810 DIN2*
-0205-5 256 2620 550 190 000 690 Bussmann 170M5811 DIN2*
-0050-7 52 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567 000
-0060-7 58 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567 000
-0070-7 79 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568 000
-0100-7 91 695 160 16000 690 Bussmann 170M1569 000
-0120-7 112 750 200 15 000 690 Bussmann 170M3815 1*
-0145-7 131 1520 350 68 500 690 Bussmann 170M3818 DIN1*
-0175-7 162 1520 350 68 500 690 Bussmann 170M3818 DIN1*
-0205-7 186 1610 400 74 000 690 Bussmann 170M5808 DIN2*
PDM code: 00096931-J, 00556489
1)
minimum short-circuit current of the installation
Technical data
100
Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses

The table below is a short cut in selecting between gG and aR fuses. The
combinations (cable size, cable length, transformer size and fuse type) in the table
fulfil the minimum requirements for the proper operation of the fuse.
ACS800-01 size Cable type Supply transformer minimum apparent power SN (kVA)
Copper Aluminium Maximum cable length with gG fuses Maximum cable length with aR fuses
10 m 50 m 100 m 10 m 100 m 200 m
-0025-2 3×25 Cu 3×35 Al 33 39 28 28
-0030-2 3×35 Cu 3×50 Al 46 56 34 34
-0040-2 3×50 Cu 3×70 Al 60 73 42 42
-0050-2 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 75 89 58 71
-0060-2 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 89 110 68 71
-0070-2 3×120 Cu 3×185 Al 110 120 84 84
-0040-3 3×25 Cu 3×35 Al 56 59 72 50 50 50
-0050-3 3×35 Cu 3×50 Al 79 85 110 60 60 60
-0060-3 3×50 Cu 3×70 Al 110 120 140 72 72 72
-0075-3 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 130 140 160 99 99 140
-0070-3 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 130 140 170 100 100 140
-0100-3 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 160 170 200 120 120 140
-0120-3 3×120 Cu 3×185 Al 180 190 220 150 150 150
-0135-3 3×150 Cu 3×240 Al 210 220 260 160 160 160
-0165-3 3×185 Cu 3×240 Al 250 270 320 190 190 200
-0050-5 3×25 Cu 3×35 Al 67 70 79 56 56 56
-0060-5 3×25 Cu 3×50 Al 95 110 130 68 68 68
-0070-5 3×35 Cu 3×70 Al 130 140 160 83 83 83
-0105-5 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 160 170 190 130 130 150
-0100-5 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 160 170 190 110 120 150
-0120-5 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 190 200 220 140 140 150
-0140-5 3×95 Cu 3×150 Al 190 200 220 160 160 160
-0165-5 3×150 Cu 3×240 Al 250 260 290 200 200 200
-0205-5 3×185 Cu 3×240 Al 290 320 360 230 230 230
-0050-7 3×16 Cu 3×25 Al 65 67 70 63 63 63
-0060-7 3×16 Cu 3×25 Al 70 70 70 70 70 70
-0070-7 3×25 Cu 3×50 Al 95 95 99 95 95 95
-0100-7 3×35 Cu 3×50 Al 130 140 150 110 110 110
-0120-7 3×50 Cu 3×70 Al 180 180 190 140 140 140
-0145-7 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 220 220 240 160 160 160
-0175-7 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 260 260 280 200 200 200
-0205-7 3×95 Cu 3×150 Al 340 360 390 230 230 230
PDM code: 00556489 A
Note 1: The supply transformer minimum power in kVA is calculated with a zk value of 6% and
frequency 50 Hz.
Note 2: The table is not intended for transformer selection - that must be done separately.
Technical data
101
The following parameters can effect on the correct operation of the protection:
• cable length, i.e. the longer the cable the weaker the fuse protection, as the long cable limits the
fault current
• cable size, i.e. the smaller the cable the weaker the fuse protection, as the small cable size limits the
fault current
• transformer size, i.e the smaller the transformer the weaker the fuse protection, as the small
transformer limits the fault current
• transformer impedance, i.e. the higher the zk the weaker the fuse protection as high impedance
limits the fault current.
The protection can be improved by installing a bigger supply transformer and/or bigger cables, and in
most cases by selecting aR fuses instead of gG fuses. Selection of smaller fuses improves the
protection, but may also affect the fuse life time and lead to unnecessary operation of the fuses.
In case of any uncertainty regarding the drive protection, please contact your local ABB.
Cable types
The table below gives copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents.
Cable sizing is based on max. 9 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side, ambient
temperature 30°C, PVC insulation, surface temperature 70°C (EN 60204-1 and
IEC 60364-5-52/2001). For other conditions, size the cables according to local
safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric Aluminium cables with concentric
copper shield copper shield
Max. load current Cable type Max. load current Cable type
A mm2 A mm2
13 3×1.5 61 3×25
18 3×2.5 69 3×35
24 3×4 83 3×50
30 3×6 107 3×70
42 3×10 130 3×95
56 3×16 151 3×120
71 3×25 174 3×150
88 3×35 199 3×185
107 3×50 235 3×240
137 3×70 274 3 × (3×50)
167 3×95 260 2 × (3×95)
193 3×120
223 3×150
255 3×185
3BFA 01051905 C
Technical data
102
Cable entries
Brake resistor, mains and motor cable terminal sizes (per phase) and tightening
torques are given below.
Frame U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, R+, R- Earthing PE
size Maximum wire size Tightening torque Maximum wire size Tightening torque
mm2 Nm mm2 Nm
R2 up to 16 * 1.2...1.5 up to 10 1.5
R3 up to 16 * 1.2...1.5 up to 10 1.5
R4 up to 25 2…4 up to 16 3.0
R5 6...70 15 6...70 15
R6 95...185 ** 20...40 95 8
* 16 mm2 rigid solid cable, 10 mm2 flexible stranded cable

** with cable lugs 16...70 mm2, tightening torque 20...40 Nm. Cable lugs are not included in the delivery.
See page 64.
Dimensions, weights and noise

Frame size Height Width Depth* Weight Noise
mm mm mm kg dB
R2 370 165 193...226 8 62
R3 420 173 231.5...265 13 62
R4 490 240 252.2...271.5 24 62
R5 602 265 275.5 32 65
R6 700 300 399 64 65
* Depth depends on the options included in the drive.
Technical data
103
NEMA data
Ratings
The NEMA ratings for the ACS800-U4 with 60 Hz supplies are given below. The
symbols are described below the table. For sizing, derating and 50 Hz supplies, see
section IEC data.
ACS800-U4 size Imax Normal use Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
size dissipation
I2N PN I2hd Phd
A A HP A HP ft3/min BTU/Hr
-0002-2 8.2 6.6 1.5 4.6 1 R2 21 350
-0003-2 10.8 8.1 2 6.6 1.5 R2 21 350
-0004-2 13.8 11 3 7.5 2 R2 21 410
-0006-2 24 21 5 13 3 R3 41 550
-0009-2 32 27 7.5 17 5 R3 41 680
-0011-2 46 34 10 25 7.5 R3 41 850
-0016-2 62 42 15 31 10 R4 61 1150
-0020-2 72 54 20 * 42 15 ** R4 61 1490
-0025-2 86 69 25 54 20 ** R5 147 1790
-0030-2 112 80 30 68 25 ** R5 147 2090
-0040-2 138 104 40 * 80 30 ** R5 147 2770
-0050-2 164 132 50 104 40 R6 238 3370
-0060-2 202 157 60 130 50 ** R6 238 4050
-0070-2 282 192 75 154 60 ** R6 238 4910
-0004-5 6.5 4.9 3 3.4 2 R2 21 410
-0005-5 8.2 6.2 3 4.2 2 R2 21 480
-0006-5 10.8 8.1 5 5.6 3 R2 21 550
-0009-5 13.8 11 7.5 8.1 5 R2 21 690
-0011-5 17.6 14 10 11 7.5 R2 21 860
-0016-5 24 21 15 15 10 R3 41 1150
-0020-5 32 27 20 21 15 R3 41 1490
-0025-5 46 34 25 27 20 R3 41 1790
-0030-5 62 42 30 34 25 R4 61 2090
-0045-5 72 54 40 39 30 R4 61 2770
-0050-5 86 65 50 52 40 R5 147 3370
-0060-5 112 79 60 65 50 R5 147 4050
-0070-5 138 96 75 77 60 R5 147 4910
-0105-5 170 141 100 100 75 R5 238 7340
-0100-5 164 124 100 96 75 R6 238 6610
-0120-5 202 157 125 124 100 R6 238 7890
-0140-5 282 180 150 156 125 R6 238 9600
-0205-5 326 254 200 215 150 R6 238 12980
Technical data
104
ACS800-U4 size Imax Normal use Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
size dissipation
I2N PN I2hd Phd
A A HP A HP ft3/min BTU/Hr
-0011-7 14 11.5 10 8.5 7.5 R4 61 1050
-0016-7 19 15 10 11 10 R4 61 1200
-0020-7 28 20 15/20*** 15 15** R4 61 1550
-0025-7 38 23 20 20 20** R4 61 1850
-0030-7 44 30 25/30*** 25 25** R4 61 2100
-0040-7 54 34 30 30 30** R4 61 2400
-0050-7 68 46 40 40 40** R5 147 2900
-0060-7 84 52 50 42 40 R5 147 3450
-0070-7 104 73 60 54 50 R6 238 4200
-0100-7 124 86 75 62 60 R6 238 5650
-0120-7 172 108 100 86 75 R6 238 6700
-0145-7 190 125 125 99 100 R6 238 9100
-0175-7 245 155 150 131 125 R6 238 11900
-0205-7 245 192 200 147 150 R6 238 14300
*
Overload may be limited to 5% at high speeds (> 90% speed) by the internal power limit of the drive.
The limitation also depends on motor characteristics and network voltage.
**
Overload may be limited to 40% at high speeds (> 90% speed) by the internal power limit of the
drive. The limitation also depends on motor characteristics and network voltage.
*** Higher rating is available with special 4-pole high-efficiency NEMA motor.
Symbols
Nominal ratings
Imax maximum output current. Available for 10 s at start, otherwise as long as allowed by drive
temperature.
Normal use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V,
460 V or 575 V).
Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability)
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V,
460 V or 575 V).
Note 1: The ratings apply in ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F). In lower temperatures the ratings
are higher (except Imax).
Sizing
See page 93.
Derating
See page 94.
Technical data
105
Fuses
UL class T fuses for branch circuit protection are listed below. Fast acting class T or
faster fuses are recommended in the USA.
Check from the fuse time-current curve that the operating time of the fuse is
below 0.5 seconds for units of frame sizes R2 to R4 and 0.1 seconds for units
of frame sizes R5 and R6. The operating time depends on the supply network
impedance and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply cable. The short-
circuit current can be calculated as shown in section Frame sizes R5 and R6 on
page 96.
Note 1: See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
ACS800-U4 Frame size Input Fuse

type current
A A V Manufacturer Type UL class
-0002-2 R2 5.2 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0003-2 R2 6.5 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0004-2 R2 9.2 15 600 Bussmann JJS-15 T
-0006-2 R3 18 25 600 Bussmann JJS-25 T
-0009-2 R3 24 30 600 Bussmann JJS-30 T
-0011-2 R3 31 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 T
-0016-2 R4 38 50 600 Bussmann JJS-50 T
-0020-2 R4 49 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0025-2 R5 64 90 600 Bussmann JJS-90 T
-0030-2 R5 75 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0040-2 R5 102 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
-0050-2 R6 126 175 600 Bussmann JJS-175 T
-0060-2 R6 153 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0070-2 R6 190 250 600 Bussmann JJS-250 T
-0004-5 R2 4.1 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0005-5 R2 5.4 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0006-5 R2 6.9 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0009-5 R2 9.8 15 600 Bussmann JJS-15 T
-0011-5 R2 13 20 600 Bussmann JJS-20 T
-0016-5 R3 18 25 600 Bussmann JJS-25 T
-0020-5 R3 24 35 600 Bussmann JJS-35 T
-0025-5 R3 31 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 T
-0030-5 R4 40 50 600 Bussmann JJS-50 T
-0045-5 R4 54 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0050-5 R5 63 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0060-5 R5 77 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0070-5 R5 94 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
-0105-5 R5 138 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0100-5 R6 121 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0120-5 R6 155 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0140-5 R6 179 225 600 Bussmann JJS-225 T
-0205-5 R6 243 350 600 Bussmann JJS-350 T
Technical data
106
ACS800-U4 Frame size Input Fuse

type current
A A V Manufacturer Type UL class
Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 575 V, 600 V
-0011-7 R4 10 20 600 Bussmann JJS-20 T
-0016-7 R4 13 20 600 Bussmann JJS-20 T
-0020-7 R4 19 30 600 Bussmann JJS-30 T
-0025-7 R4 21 30 600 Bussmann JJS-30 T
-0030-7 R4 29 45 600 Bussmann JJS-45 T
-0040-7 R4 32 45 600 Bussmann JJS-45 T
-0050-7 R5 45 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0060-7 R5 51 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0070-7 R6 70 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0100-7 R6 82 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
-0120-7 R6 103 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0145-7 R6 121 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0175-7 R6 150 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0205-7 R6 188 250 600 Bussmann JJS-250 T
Cable types
Cable sizing is based on NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires, 75°C (167°F) wire insulation at 40°C
(104°F) ambient temperature. Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway or cable or
earth (directly buried). For other conditions, dimension the cables according to local safety regulations,
appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric copper shield

Max. load current Cable type
A
AWG/kcmil
18 14
22 12
31 10
44 8
57 6
75 4
88 3
101 2
114 1
132 1/0
154 2/0
176 3/0
202 4/0
224 250 MCM or 2 x 1
251 300 MCM or 2 x 1/0
PDM code: 00096931
Technical data
107
Cable Entries
Brake resistor, input and motor cable (per phase) terminal sizes and tightening
torques are given below.
Frame U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, R+, R- Earthing PE
size Maximum wire size Tightening torque Maximum wire size Tightening torque
AWG lbf ft AWG lbf ft
R2 up to 6 * 0.9…1.1 up to 8 1.1
R3 up to 6 * 0.9...1.1 up to 8 1.1
R4 up to 4 1.5…3.0 up to 5 2.2
R5 10...2/0 11.1 10...2/0 11.1
R6 3/0...350 MCM ** 14.8...29.5 4/0 5.9
* 6 AWG rigid solid cable, 8 AWG flexible stranded cable

** with cable lugs 6...2/0 AWG, tightening torque 14.8...29.5 lbf ft. Cable lugs are not included in the
delivery. See page 64.
Dimensions, weights and noise

Frame size Height Width Depth* Weight Noise
in. in. in. lb dB
R2 14.57 6.5 7.6...8.9 18 62
R3 16.54 6.81 9.11...10.43 29 62
R4 19.29 9.45 9.93...10.69 53 62
R5 23.70 10.43 10.85...11.11 71 65
R6 27.56 11.81 15.71 141 65
* Depth depends on the options included in the drive.
Input power connection

Voltage (U1) 208/220/230/240 VAC 3-phase ±10% for 230 VAC units
380/400/415 VAC 3-phase ±10% for 400 VAC units
380/400/415/440/460/480/500 VAC 3-phase ±10% for 500 VAC units
525/550/575/600/660/690 VAC 3-phase ±10% for 690 VAC units
Rated conditional short- 65 kA when protected by fuses given in the IEC data fuse tables.
circuit current (IEC 60439-1)
Short-circuit current US and Canada: The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
protection (UL 508 C than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage when protected by
CSA C22.2 No. 14-05) fuses given in the NEMA data fuse table.
Frequency 48 to 63 Hz, maximum rate of change 17%/s
Imbalance Max. ±3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Fundamental power factor 0.98 (at nominal load)
(cos phi1)
Technical data
108
Motor connection
Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Frequency DTC mode: 0 to 3.2 · fFWP. Maximum frequency 300 Hz.
UNmains
fFWP = · fNmotor
UNmotor
fFWP: frequency at field weakening point; UNmains: mains (input power) voltage;
UNmotor: rated motor voltage; fNmotor: rated motor frequency
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section IEC data.
Power limit 1.5 · Phd, 1.1 · PN or Pcont.max (whichever value is greatest)
Field weakening point 8 to 300 Hz
Switching frequency 3 kHz (average). In 690 V units 2 kHz (average).
Maximum recommended Sizing method Max. motor cable length
motor cable length DTC control Scalar control
according to I2N and I2hd R2 to R3: 100 m (328 ft) R2: 150 m (492 ft)
according to Icont.max at R4 to R6: 300 m (984 ft) R3 to R6: 300 m (984 ft)
ambient temperatures below
30°C (86°F)
according to Icont.max at R2: 50 m (164 ft) Note: This applies to units with EMC filter
ambient temperatures above also.
30°C (86°F) R3 and R4: 100 m (328 ft)
R5 and R6: 150 m (492 ft)
Note: With cables longer than 100 m (328 ft), the EMC Directive requirements may not be
fulfilled. See section CE marking.
Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level
Cooling
Method Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top.
Free space around the unit See chapter Mechanical installation.
Degrees of protection
IP20 (UL open type). See chapter Planning the cabinet assembly.
Technical data
109
AGPS-11C
Nominal input voltage 115...230 VAC ±10%
Nominal input current 0.1 A (230 V) / 0.2 A (115 V)
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz
Max. external fuse 16 A
X1 terminal sizes 3 x 2.5 mm2
Output voltage 15 VDC ±0.5 V
Nominal output current 0.4 A
X2 terminal block type JST B4P-VH
Ambient temperature 0...50°C
Relative humidity Max. 90%, no condensation allowed
Dimensions (with enclosure) 167 x 128 x 52 mm (Height x Width x Depth)
Weight (with enclosure) 0.75 kg
Approvals C-UL, US listed
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated,
indoor, controlled environment.
Operation Storage Transportation
installed for stationary use in the protective package in the protective package
Installation site altitude 0 to 4000 m (13123 ft) above - -
sea level [above 1000 m
(3281 ft), see section
Derating]
Air temperature -15 to +50°C (5 to 122°F). No -40 to +70°C (-40 to +158°F) -40 to +70°C (-40 to +158°F)
frost allowed. See section
Derating.
Relative humidity 5 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%
No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60% in the presence of
corrosive gases.
Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed.
(IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3- Boards without coating: Boards without coating: Boards without coating:
2, IEC 60721-3-1) Chemical gases: Class 3C1 Chemical gases: Class 1C2 Chemical gases: Class 2C2
Solid particles: Class 3S2 Solid particles: Class 1S3 Solid particles: Class 2S2
Boards with coating: Boards with coating: Boards with coating:
Chemical gases: Class 3C2 Chemical gases: Class 1C2 Chemical gases: Class 2C2
Solid particles: Class 3S2 Solid particles: Class 1S3 Solid particles: Class 2S2
Atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa 70 to 106 kPa 60 to 106 kPa
0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.6 to 1.05 atmospheres
Vibration (IEC 60068-2)* Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
(5 to 13.2 Hz), (5 to 13.2 Hz), (2 to 9 Hz),
max. 7 m/s2 (23 ft/s2) max. 7 m/s2 (23 ft/s2) max. 15 m/s2 (49 ft/s2)
(13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal
Shock (IEC 60068-2-29) Not allowed Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2), Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2),
11 ms 11 ms
Free fall Not allowed 250 mm (10 in.) for weight 250 mm (10 in.) for weight
under 100 kg (220 lb) under 100 kg (220 lb)
100 mm (4 in.) for weight 100 mm (4 in.) for weight
over 100 kg (220 lb) over 100 kg (220 lb)
*Note: For frame sizes R2 to R4 with panel option maximum allowed vibration is 3 m/s2. For higher vibration use the
RPMP kit. See Control Panel Mounting Platform Kit (RPMP) Installation Guide [3AFE64677560 (English)].
Technical data
110
Materials
Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2.5 mm, colour NCS 1502-Y (RAL 90021 / PMS 420 C)
• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 to 2 mm, thickness of coating 100 micrometres
• cast aluminium AlSi (R2 and R3)
• extruded aluminium AlSi (R4 to R6)
Package Corrugated cardboard (frames R2 to R5 and option modules), plywood and wood (frame
size R6), expanded polystyrene. Plastic covering of the package: PE-LD, bands PP or
steel.
Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural
resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable. All
metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under
controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked
with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit
boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors (C1-1 to C1-x) contain electrolyte and the
printed circuit boards contain lead, both of which are classified as hazardous waste within
the EU. They must be removed and handled according to local regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions,
please contact your local ABB distributor.
Applicable standards
The drive complies with the following standards. The compliance with the European Low
Voltage Directive is verified according to standards EN 61800-5-1 and EN 60204-1.
• EN 60204-1 (2006) Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: General requirements.
Provisions for compliance: The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device
- the ACS800-04/U4 into a cabinet.
• EN 60529: 1991 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
(IEC 60529)
• IEC 60664-1 (2007) Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. Part 1: Principles,
requirements and tests.
• EN 61800-3 (2004) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific
test methods
• EN 61800-5-1 (2003) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 5-1: Safety requirements –
electrical, thermal and energy
• UL 508C (2002) UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, second edition
• NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
• CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 Industrial control equipment
(2005)
Technical data
111
CE marking
A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the unit follows the provisions of the European Low
Voltage and EMC Directives (Directive 73/23/EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC and Directive 89/336/
EEC, as amended by 2004/108EC).
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic equipment to
operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment. Likewise, the equipment must not
disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which supplies buildings
used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and
commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment. Note: A professional is
a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive
systems, including their EMC aspects.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in the second
environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated current equal to or above
400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.
Compliance with the EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used
within the European Union. The EMC product standard [EN 61800-3 (2004)] covers requirements
stated for drives.
Compliance with the EN 61800-3 (2004)

First environment (drive of category C2)
The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions:
1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual.
4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres.
WARNING! The drive may cause radio interference if used in a residential or domestic environment.
The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the requirements for CE
compliance listed above, if necessary.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive equipped with EMC filter +E202 on IT (unearthed) systems. The
supply network becomes connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may
cause danger or damage the unit.
Technical data
112
Second environment (drive of category C3)

1. Frame sizes R2…R5: The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200. The filter is suitable for TN
(earthed) systems only.
Frame size R6: The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E210. The filter is suitable for TN (earthed)
and IT (unearthed) systems.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which
supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such
a network.
If the provisions under Second environment (drive of category C3) cannot be met, e.g. the drive cannot
be equipped with EMC filter +E200 when installed to an IT (unearthed) network, the requirements of the
standard can be met as follows:
1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-voltage networks. In
some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply
transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings can be used.
Medium voltage network

Supply transformer
Neighbouring network
Static screen
Point of measurement
Low voltage Low voltage

Equipment
Drive
(victim)
Equipment Equipment
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A template is available
from the local ABB representative.
a network.
Machinery Directive
The drive complies with the European Union Machinery Directive (98/37/EC) requirements for an
equipment intended to be incorporated into machinery.
Technical data
113
“C-tick” marking
“C-tick” marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A “C-tick” mark is attached to each drive in
order to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3 (2004) – Adjustable speed electrical
power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods), mandated by the
Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme.
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic equipment to
operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment. Likewise, the equipment must not
disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced by the Australian
Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum Management Group (RSM) of the New
Zealand Ministry of Economic Development (NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to
protect the radiofrequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/
electronic products.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which supplies buildings
used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and
commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment. Note: A professional is
a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive
systems, including their EMC aspects.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in the second
environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated current equal to or above
400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.
Compliance with IEC 61800-3

First environment (drive of category C2)
The drive complies with the limits of IEC 61800-3 with the following provisions:
1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202.
3. The motor and control cables used are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual.
WARNING! The drive may cause radio interference if used in a residential or domestic environment.
The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the requirements for CE
compliance listed above, if necessary.
Note: The drive must not be equipped with EMC filter +E202 when installed to IT (unearthed) systems.
The mains becomes connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors. In IT systems this
may cause danger or damage the unit.
Technical data
114

1. Frame sizes R2…R5: The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200. The filter is suitable for TN
(earthed) systems only.
Frame size R6: The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E210. The filter is suitable for TN (earthed)
and IT (unearthed) systems.
a network.
If the provisions under Second environment (drive of category C3) cannot be met, e.g. the drive cannot
be equipped with EMC filter +E200 when installed to an IT (unearthed) network, the requirements of the
standard can be met as follows for restricted distribution:
1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-voltage networks. In
some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply
transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings can be used.
Medium voltage network

Supply transformer
Neighbouring network
Static screen
Point of measurement
Low voltage Low voltage

Equipment
Drive
(victim)
Equipment Equipment
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A template is available
from the local ABB representative.
a network.
Marine type approvals

ACS800-04+C132 are type approved by American Bureau of Shipping, Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
and Det Norske Veritas.
Marine type approvals are pending for the following types:
ACS800-04-0135-3+C132, ACS800-04-0165-3+C132, ACS800-04-0165-5+C132, ACS800-04-0205-
5+C132, ACS800-04-0145-7+C132, ACS800-04-0175-7+C132 and ACS800-04-0205-7+C132.
Technical data
115
UL/CSA markings
The ACS800-04 and ACS800-U4 are C-UL US listed and CSA marked.
UL
The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical
amperes at the drive nominal voltage (600 V maximum for 690 V units) when protected by fuses given
in the NEMA data fuse table. The ampere rating is based on tests done according to UL 508C.
The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code (US). See
ACS800 Firmware Manual for setting. Default setting is off, must be activated at start-up.
The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment. See section Ambient conditions
for specific limits.
Brake chopper - ABB has brake choppers that, when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors,
will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy (normally associated with quickly decelerating
a motor). Proper application of the brake chopper is defined in chapter Resistor braking.
Equipment warranty and liability

The manufacturer warrants the equipment supplied against defects in design, materials and
workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months after installation or twenty-four (24) months from date
of manufacturing, whichever first occurs. The local ABB office or distributor may grant a warranty period
different to the above and refer to local terms of liability as defined in the supply contract.
The manufacturer is not responsible for
• any costs resulting from a failure if the installation, commissioning, repair, alternation, or ambient
conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with
the unit and other relevant documentation.
• units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident
• units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special, indirect,
incidental or consequential damages, losses or penalties.
This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is
in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, express or implied, arising by operation of law or otherwise,
including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please contact the local distributor or ABB office.
The technical data, information and specifications are valid at the time of printing. The manufacturer
reserves the right to modifications without prior notice.
Technical data
116
Product protection in the US

This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents:
4,920,306 5,301,085 5,463,302 5,521,483 5,532,568 5,589,754
5,612,604 5,654,624 5,799,805 5,940,286 5,942,874 5,952,613
6,094,364 6,147,887 6,175,256 6,184,740 6,195,274 6,229,356
6,252,436 6,265,724 6,305,464 6,313,599 6,316,896 6,335,607
6,370,049 6,396,236 6,448,735 6,498,452 6,552,510 6,597,148
6,741,059 6,774,758 6,844,794 6,856,502 6,859,374 6,922,883
6,940,253 6,934,169 6,956,352 6,958,923 6,967,453 6,972,976
6,977,449 6,984,958 6,985,371 6,992,908 6,999,329 7,023,160
7,034,510 7,036,223 7,045,987 7,057,908 7,059,390 7,067,997
7,082,374 7,084,604 7,098,623 7,102,325 D503,931 D510,319
D510,320 D511,137 D511,150 D512,026 D512,696 D521,466.
Other patents are pending.
Technical data
117

Dimensional drawings of the ACS800-04/U4, flange mounting kits and AGPS board
are shown below. The dimensions are given in millimetres and [inches].
118
Frame size R2 (with optional control panel)
3AFE68347432
119
3AFE68360544
120
3AFE68364655
121
3AFE68365741
122
3AFE68365945
123
Flange mounting kits

Flange mounting kit dimensions:
Lifting lug
7 [0.276]
H
D
Frame size H W D
mm [in.] mm [in.] mm [in.]
R2 476.5 [18.76] 235.5 [9.27] 25 [0.984]
R3 530.5 [20.89] 245.5 [9.67] 25 [0.984]
R4 595.95 [23.46] 373.6 [14.71] 25 [0.984]
R5 700 [27.56] 398.8 [15.70] 25 [0.984]
R6 786 [30.94] 433.4 [17.06] 25 [0.984]
124
Flange mounting kit for frame size R2
[5.51]
[0.276]
[15.16]
22
[0.866] [7.54]
[5.51]
[2.17]
98.25
[3.87]
[0
.7
87
]
3AFE68361001
[6.69]
125
[7.09]
[0.394]
[6.30]
[17.32]
[0.276]
[6.30]
22
105.25
[2.36]
[4.14]
[0.866] [7.93]
3AFE68370418
126
86.8
[3.42]
142.95
[5.63]
[12.40]
21
[4.96]
[0.827]
[0.276]
[11.81]
[20.08]
[6.53]
[1.30]
[5.23]
[3.94]
[6.02]
]
153
87
3AFE68375371
.7
[0
127
[4.33] [13.39]
[14.33]
[8.66]
[0.276]
[24.57]
[8.66]
[0.866]
[4.33]
[3.15]
[5.12]
130
3AFE68371619
]
87
.7
119.4
[0
[4.70]
128
[8.66]
[0
.7
87
]
[0.709]
18
[4.84]
16.7
[15.75] [0.657]
[6.61]
[0.276]
[6.61]
[28.35]
[6.61]
[3.94]
[0.787]
[4.84]
3AFE68367280
]
100
87
116.7
.7
[4.59] [3.94]
[0
129
AGPS board
3AFE68293898
130
131
Resistor braking

This chapter describes how to select, protect and wire brake choppers and resistors.
The chapter also contains the technical data.
Availability of brake choppers and resistors

Frame R2 and R3 drives and 690 V units of frame size R4 have a built-in brake
chopper as standard equipment. For other units, brake choppers are optionally
available as built-in units, indicated in the type code by +D150.
Resistors are available as add-on kits.
How to select the correct drive/chopper/resistor combination

1. Calculate the maximum power (Pmax) generated by the motor during braking.
2. Select a suitable drive / brake chopper / brake resistor combination for the
application according to the following tables (take account of other factors in the
drive selection also). The following condition must be met:
Pbrcont > Pmax
3. Check the resistor selection. The energy generated by the motor during a 400
second period must not exceed the resistor heat dissipation capacity ER.
If the ER value is not sufficient, it is possible to use a four-resistor assembly in which two standard
resistors are connected in parallel, two in series. The ER value of the four-resistor assembly is four
times the value specified for the standard resistor.
Resistor braking
132
Note: A resistor other than the standard resistor can be used provided that:
• its resistance is not lower than the resistance of the standard resistor.
• the resistance does not restrict the braking capacity needed, i.e.
2
UDC
Pmax <
R
where
Pmax maximum power generated by the motor during braking
UDC voltage over the resistor during braking, e.g.
1.35 · 1.2 · 415 VDC (when supply voltage is 380 to 415 VAC),
1.35 · 1.2 · 500 VDC. (when supply voltage is 440 to 500 VAC) or
1.35 · 1.2 · 690 VDC (when supply voltage is 525 to 690 VAC).
R resistor resistance (ohm)
• the heat dissipation capacity (ER) is sufficient for the application (see step 3
above).
WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the value specified
for the particular drive / brake chopper / resistor combination. The drive and the
chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.
Optional brake chopper and resistor(s)

The nominal ratings for dimensioning the brake resistors are given below at an
ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F).
ACS800-04 type Braking power of the chopper and Brake resistor(s)
ACS800-U4 type the drive
Pbrcont Type R ER PRcont
(kW) (ohm) (kJ) (kW)
230 V units
-0001-2 0.55 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0002-2 0.8 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0003-2 1.1 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0004-2 1.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0005-2 2.2 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0006-2 3.0 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0009-2 4.0 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0011-2 5.5 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0016-2 11 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0020-2 17 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0025-2 23 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0030-2 28 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0040-2 33 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0050-2 45 2xSAFUR125F500 2 7200 18
-0060-2 56 2xSAFUR125F500 2 7200 18
-0070-2 68 2xSAFUR125F500 2 7200 18
Resistor braking
133

400 V units
-0003-3 1.1 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0004-3 1.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0005-3 2.2 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0006-3 3.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0009-3 4.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0011-3 5.5 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0016-3 7.5 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0020-3 11 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0023-3 11 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0025-3 23 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0030-3 28 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0035-3 28 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0040-3 33 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0050-3 45 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0060-3 56 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0075-3 70 SAFUR80F500 3 2400 6
-0070-3 68 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0100-3 83 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0120-3 113 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0135-3 132 SAFUR200F500 2.7 5400 13.5
-0165-3 132 SAFUR200F500 2.7 5400 13.5
500 V units
-0004-5 1.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0005-5 2.2 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0006-5 3.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0009-5 4.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0011-5 5.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0016-5 7.5 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0020-5 11 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0025-5 15 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0028-5 15 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0030-5 28 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0040-5 33 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0045-5 33 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0050-5 45 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0060-5 56 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0070-5 68 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0105-5 83 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0100-5 83 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0120-5 113 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0140-5 135 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0165-5 160 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0205-5 160 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
Resistor braking
134

690 V units
-0011-7 8.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0016-7 11 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0020-7 16 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0025-7 20 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0030-7 28 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0040-7 22 / 33 1) SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0050-7 45 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0060-7 56 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0070-7 68 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0100-7 83 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0120-7 113 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0145-7 160 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0175-7 160 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0205-7 160 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
PDM code 00096931-J
PbrcontThe drive and the chopper will withstand this continuous braking power. The braking is considered continuous if the
braking time exceeds 30 s.
Note: The braking energy transmitted to the specified resistor(s) in 400 seconds may not exceed ER.
R Resistance value for the listed resistor assembly. Note: This is also the minimum allowed resistance for the braking
resistor.
ER Short energy pulse that the resistor assembly withstands every 400 seconds. This energy will heat the resistor
element from 40°C (104°F) to the maximum allowable temperature.
PRcont Continuous power (heat) dissipation of the resistor when placed correctly. Energy ER dissipates in 400 seconds.
1)
22 kW with standard 22 ohm resistor and 33 kW with 32…37 ohm resistor
All braking resistors must be installed outside the converter module. The SACE braking resistors are built in an IP21 metal
housing. The SAFUR braking resistors are built in an IP00 metal frame. Note: The SACE and SAFUR resistors are not UL
listed.
Resistor installation and wiring

All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they will
cool.
WARNING! The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The
surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is of
hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact.
Use the cable type used for drive input cabling (see to chapter Technical data) to
ensure the input fuses will also protect the resistor cable. Alternatively, two-
conductor shielded cable with the same cross-sectional area can be used. The
maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft). For the connections, see the
power connection diagram of the drive.
Resistor braking
135
Protection of frame sizes R2 to R5

It is highly recommended to equip the drive with a main contactor for safety reasons.
Wire the contactor so that it opens in case the resistor overheats. This is essential
for safety since the drive will not otherwise be able to interrupt the main supply if the
chopper remains conductive in a fault situation.
Below is a simple example wiring diagram.
L1 L2 L3
1
OFF
Fuses 2
1 3 5 13 3
ON
2 4 6 14 4
ACS800
U1 V1 W1
Θ Thermal switch (stand-
ard in ABB resistors)
K1
Resistor braking
136
Protection of frame size R6

A main contactor is not required for protecting against resistor overheating when the
resistor is dimensioned according to the instructions and the internal brake chopper
is used. The drive will disable power flow through the input bridge if the chopper
remains conductive in a fault situation. Note: If an external brake chopper (outside
the drive module) is used, a main contactor is always required.
A thermal switch (standard in ABB resistors) is required for safety reasons. The
cable must be shielded and not longer than the resistor cable.
With Standard Control Program, wire the thermal switch as shown below. By default,
the drive will stop by coasting when the switch opens.
RMIO:X22 or X2: X22
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
5 DI5
6 DI6
7 +24V
Resistor thermal
8 +24V
switch (standard in
ABB resistors) 9 DGND
Θ
10 DGND
11 DIIL
For other control programs, the thermal switch may be wired to a different digital
input. Programming of the input to trip the drive by “EXTERNAL FAULT” may be
needed. See the appropriate Firmware Manual.
Brake circuit commissioning

For Standard Control Program:
• Enable the brake chopper function (parameter 27.01).
• Switch off the overvoltage control of the drive (parameter 20.05).
• Check the resistance value setting (parameter 27.03).
• Frame sizes R6: Check the setting of parameter 21.09. If stop by coasting is
required, select OFF2 STOP.
For the use of the brake resistor overload protection (parameters 27.02...27.05),
consult an ABB representative.
WARNING! If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper but the chopper is not
enabled by parameter setting, the brake resistor must be disconnected because the
protection against resistor overheating is then not in use.
For settings of other control programs, see the appropriate Firmware Manual.
Resistor braking
3AFE68372984 Rev D EN
ABB Oy ABB Inc. ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd.

AC Drives Automation Technologies No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu
P.O. Box 184 Drives & Motors Chaoyang District
FI-00381 HELSINKi 16250 West Glendale Drive Beijing, P.R. China, 100015
FINLAND New Berlin, WI 53151 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788
Telephone +358 10 22 211 USA Fax +86 10 5821 7618
Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Telephone 262 785-3200 Internet www.abb.com
Internet www.abb.com 800-HELP-365
Fax 262 780-5135
ACS 800
Firmware Manual
ACS 800 Standard Application Program 7.x
ACS 800 Standard Application Program 7.x
Firmware Manual
3AFE 64527592 REV D

EN
ã 2003 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

5
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction to the manual

Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Start-up; and control through the I/O

How to start-up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Control panel
Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
How to upload data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
How to download data from the panel to a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
How to set the contrast of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table of Contents
6
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Program features
Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
The default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Programmable analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Update cycles in the Standard Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DC Magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table of Contents
7
DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Flux Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Hexagonal motor flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Panel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Supervision of optional IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Preprogrammed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table of Contents
8
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sleep function for the process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motor temperature measurement through the analogue I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Master/Follower use of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Application macros
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table of Contents
9
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Connection example, 24 VDC / 4…20 mA two-wire sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Sequential Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Operation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Actual signals and parameters

Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
16 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
23 SPEED CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
24 TORQUE CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
27 BRAKE CHOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
34 PROCESS VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
35 MOT TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
40 PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
42 BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
50 ENCODER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
51 COMM MOD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table of Contents
10
92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

96 EXTERNAL AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fault tracing
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fieldbus control
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Communication set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Setting up an Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Optical component types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Communication Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fieldbus reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used . 202
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used 203
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used . 204
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used 205
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
ABB Drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Speed reference and actual speed scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Analogue Extension Module

Table of Contents
11
Speed control through the analogue extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Basic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Additional data: actual signals and parameters

Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Control block diagrams

Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and T CTRL macros (contin-
ued on the next page …) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next page …) . . . . . . . . . . 242
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page …) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Handling of Reset and On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Table of Contents
12
Table of Contents
13
Chapter overview
The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition it
contains information about the compatibility, safety, intended audience, and related
publications.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS 800 Standard Application Program 7.x.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use
the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the
Hardware Manual.
• Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the
default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are
given in this manual in the subsection describing the related user-adjustable
parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring
practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
• Start-up; and control through the I/O instructs in setting up the application
program, and how to start, stop and regulate the speed of the drive.
• Control panel gives instructions for using the panel.
• Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the
user settings and diagnostic signals.
• Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a
connection diagram.
• Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the
drive.
• Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and
remedies.

14
• Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication

links.
• Analogue Extension Module, describes the communication between the drive and
the analogue I/O extension (optional).
• Additional data: actual signals and parameters contains more information on the
actual signals and parameters.

15
Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to:
• do the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of rotation, and adjust the speed of the motor
through the I/O interface
• perform an Identification Run for the drive.
How to start-up the drive

There are two start-up methods between which the user can select: Run the Start-up
Assistant, or perform a limited start-up. The Assistant guides the user through all
essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the drive gives no guidance:
The user goes through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in
the manual.
• If you want to run the Assistant, follow the instructions given in the subsection
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings).
• If you want to perform the limited start-up, follow the instructions given in the
subsection How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings).
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings)

Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential only
in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
identification data … .......

16
… then the Identification Display of the drive … ACS800

ID NUMBER 1
… then the Actual Signal Display … 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
…after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection. 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Press FUNC to start
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on selecting the language.)
Language Selection
The drive is now ready for the start-up.
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE
Press the FUNC key. Language Selection 1/1
LANGUAGE ?
[ENGLISH]
ENTER:OK ACT:EXIT
Scroll to the desired language by the arrow keys ( or ) and 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
press ENTER to accept. *** INFORMATION ***
Press FUNC to start
(The drive loads the selected language into use, shifts back to the Actual Signal guided Motor Setup
Display and starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the
suggestion on starting the guided motor set-up.)
STARTING THE GUIDED MOTOR SET-UP

Press FUNC to start the guided motor set-up. Motor Setup 1/10
ENTER: Ok/Continue
(The display shows which general command keys to use when stepping through
ACT: Exit
the assistant.)
FUNC: More Info
Press ENTER to step forward. Motor Setup 2/10

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
Follow the instructions given on the display. AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info

17
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings)
Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data at your hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential
only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
identification data … .......
… then the Identification Display of the drive … ACS800

ID NUMBER 1
… then the Actual Signal Display … 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
…after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection. 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Press FUNC to start
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the Language Selection.)
Language Selection
Press ACT to remove the suggestion on starting the language 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
selection. FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
The drive is now ready for the limited start-up. POWER 0.00 %
MANUAL START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99)

Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
described below. 99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
The general parameter setting procedure: ENGLISH
- Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel.
- Press the double-arrow keys ( or ) to scroll the parameter groups.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
- Press the arrow keys ( or ) to scroll parameters within a group.
99 START-UP DATA
- Activate the setting of a new value by ENTER. 01 LANGUAGE
- Change the value by the arrow keys ( or ), fast change by the double- [ENGLISH]
arrow keys ( or ).
- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).

18
Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
procedure is given above. 99 START-UP DATA
02 APPLICATION MACRO
The default value FACTORY is suitable in most cases. [ ]
Select the motor control mode. The general parameter setting 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
procedure is given above. 99 START-UP DATA
04 MOTOR CTRL MODE
DTC is suitable in most cases. The SCALAR control mode is recommended [DTC]
- for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is
variable
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of
the inverter
- when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate: Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as
on the motor nameplate.
ABB Motors For example, if the motor
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4
nominal speed is 1440 rpm
IEC 200 M/L 55
No on the nameplate, setting
Ins.cl. F IP 55 the value of parameter
V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s 99.08 MOTOR NOM
690 Y 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83
400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83 SPEED to 1500 rpm
660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83 380 V results in the wrong
380 D 50 30 1470 59 0.83 mains operation of the drive.
415 D 50 30 1475 54 0.83
440 D 35 1770 59 0.83
voltage
60
Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3 6210/C3 180

IEC 34-1
- motor nominal voltage 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Allowed range: 1/2 · UN … 2 · UN of ACS800. (UN refers to the highest voltage in
05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500
[ ]
VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
- motor nominal current 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Allowed range: approx. 1/6 · I2hd … 2 · I2hd of ACS800 (0…2·I2hd if parameter
06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
99.04 = SCALAR))
[ ]
- motor nominal frequency 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Range: 8 … 300 Hz
07 MOTOR NOM FREQ
[ ]
- motor nominal speed 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Range: 1 …18000 rpm
08 MOTOR NOM SPEED
[ ]
-motor nominal power 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Range: 0 …9000 kW
09 MOTOR NOM POWER
[ ]

19
When the motor data has been entered, two displays (warning and 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
information) start to alternate. Move to next step without pressing ACS800
** WARNING **
any key.
ID MAGN REQ
1 L-> 0.0 rpm I

*** Information ***
Press green button
to start ID MAGN
Select the motor identification method.

The default value ID MAGN (ID Magnetisation) is suitable for most applications. It is applied
in this basic start-up procedure. If your selection is ID Magnetisation, move to next step
without pressing any key.
The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and
without any measured speed feedback is required.
If your selection is ID Run, continue by following the separate instructions given a few pages
ahead in subsection How to perform the ID Run.
IDENTIFICATION MAGNETISATION (with Motor ID Run selection ID MAGN)
Press the LOC/REM key to change to local control (L shown on the 1 L-> 0.0 rpm I
first row). ** WARNING **
ID MAGN
Press to start the Identification Magnetisation. The motor is
magnetised at zero speed for 20 to 60 s. Two warnings are 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
displayed: ** WARNING **
ID DONE
The upper warning is displayed while the magnetisation is on.
The lower warning is displayed after the magnetisation is
completed.
DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR
Check the direction of rotation of the motor. 1 L->[xxx] rpm I
FREQ xxx Hz
- Press ACT to get the status row visible. CURRENT xx A
- Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by POWER xx %
pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ).
- Press to start the motor.
- Check that the motor is running in the desired direction.
- Stop the motor by pressing .

20
To change the direction of rotation of the motor:

- Disconnect mains power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes for the forward
direction
intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the voltage
between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and earth with a
multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged.
reverse
- Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the direction
motor terminals or at the motor connection box.
- Verify your work by applying mains power and repeating the
check as described above.
SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES
Set the minimum speed. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
20 LIMITS
01 MINIMUM SPEED
[ ]
Set the maximum speed. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O

20 LIMITS
02 MAXIMUM SPEED
[ ]
Set the acceleration time 1. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O

22 ACCEL/DECEL
Note: Check also acceleration time 2, if two acceleration times will 02 ACCELER TIME 1
be used in the application. [ ]
Set the deceleration time 1. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O

22 ACCEL/DECEL
Note: Set also deceleration time 2, if two deceleration times will be 03 DECELER TIME 1
used in the application. [ ]
The drive is now ready for use.

21
How to control the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analogue
inputs, when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (factory) parameter settings are valid.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
Ensure the Factory macro is active. See parameter 99.02.
If you need to change the direction of rotation, change the setting of

parameter 10.03 to REQUEST.
Ensure the control connections are wired according to the connection See the chapter Application
diagram given for the Factory macro. macros.
Ensure the drive is in external control mode. Press the LOC/REM key to In External control, there is
change between external and local control. no L visible on the first row
of the panel display.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR

Start by switching digital input DI1 on. 1 -> 0.0 rpm I
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
Regulate the speed by adjusting the voltage of analogue input AI1. 1 -> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR

Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off. 1 -> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on. 1 <- 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
STOPPING THE MOTOR

Switch off digital input DI1. 1 -> 500.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %

22
How to perform the ID Run

The drive performs the ID Magnetisation automatically at the first start. In most
applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run. The ID Run (Standard or
Reduced) should be selected if:
• The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
The Reduced ID Run is to be performed instead of the Standard if it is not possible
to disengage the driven machine from the motor.
ID Run Procedure
Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check
that the new settings meet the following conditions:
• 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm
• 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed
• 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100% · Ihd
• 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50%
• Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row).
Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes.
• Change the ID Run selection to STANDARD or REDUCED.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
10 MOTOR ID RUN
[STANDARD]
• Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
ACS800
**WARNING**
ID RUN SEL
• To start the ID Run, press the key. The Run Enable signal must be active
(see parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE).
Warning when the ID Run is Warning during the ID Run Warning after a successfully
started completed ID Run
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

ACS800 ACS800 ACS800
**WARNING** **WARNING** **WARNING**
MOTOR STARTS ID RUN ID DONE

23
In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run.
However:
• The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop
key ( ).
• After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the
actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).

24

25
Control panel
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R.
The same control panel is used with all ACS 800 series drives, so the instructions
given apply to all ACS 800 types. The display examples shown are based on the
Standard Application Program; displays produced by other application programs
may differ slightly.
Overview of the panel
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.

The language is selected at start-up (parameter 99.01).
The control panel has four operation modes:
- Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
- Parameter Mode (PAR key)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz - Function Mode (FUNC key)
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 % - Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key)
The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys and
ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel.
ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE The drive control keys are:
No. Use
1 Start
ENTER
2 Stop
3 Activate reference setting

7 6 3 1
LOC RESET REF 4 Forward direction of rotation
REM
5 Reverse direction of rotation

I 0 6 Fault reset
4 5 2
7 Change between Local / Remote (external)
control
Control panel
26
Panel operation mode keys and displays

The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic
operations and displays in each mode.
Actual Signal Display Mode
Act. signal / Fault history Status row

ACT selection
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz Actual signal names
CURRENT 80.00 A and values
Act. signal / Fault message
scrolling POWER 75.00 %
Enter selection mode
ENTER Accept new signal
Parameter Mode
Group selection 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Status row

PAR Fast value change
10 START/STOP/DIR Parameter group
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR Parameter
Parameter selection
Slow value change DI1,2 Parameter value
Enter change mode

ENTER Accept new value
Function Mode
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Status row

FUNC Row selection
Motor Setup
Page selection
Application Macro List of functions
Speed Control EXT1
ENTER Function start
Drive Selection Mode
Drive selection ACS800 Device type

DRIVE ID number change
Enter change mode ASXR7050 xxxxxx SW loading package

ENTER Accept new value name and ID number
ID NUMBER 1
Status row
The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number Drive status

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
I = Running
Drive control status
O = Stopped
L = Local control Direction of rotation Drive reference “ “ = Run disabled
R = Remote control -> = Forward
“ “ = External control <- = Reverse
Control panel
27
Drive control with the panel

The user can control the drive with the panel as follows:
• start, stop, and change direction of the motor
• give the motor speed reference or torque reference
• give a process reference (when the process PID control is active)
• reset the fault and warning messages
• change between local and external drive control.
The panel can be used for control of the drive control always when the drive is under
local control and the status row is visible on the display.
How to start, stop and change direction

Step Action Press Key Display
1. To show the status row. 1 ->1242.0 rpm I

ACT PAR
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
FUNC
POWER 75.00 %
2. To switch to local control. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

LOC
(only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L FREQ 45.00 Hz
REM
on the first row of the display.) CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To stop 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
4. To start 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
5. To change the direction to reverse. 1 L <-1242.0 rpm I

0 FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
6. To change the direction to forward. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

I FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
28
How to set speed reference

1. To show the status row. 1 ->1242.0 rpm I

ACT PAR
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
FUNC
POWER 75.00 %
2. To switch to local control. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

LOC
(Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L FREQ 45.00 Hz
REM
on the first row of the display.) CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To enter the Reference Setting function. REF

1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
4. To change the reference. 1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I

(slow change) FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
(fast change)
5. To save the reference. 1 L -> 1325.0 rpm I

ENTER
(The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is FREQ 45.00 Hz
restored automatically after power switch-off.) CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
29
Actual signal display mode

In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can:
• show three actual signals on the display at a time
• select the actual signals to display
• view the fault history
• reset the fault history.
The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT
key, or if he does not press any key within one minute.
How to select actual signals to the display

Step Action Press key Display
1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

ACT FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
row). FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To enter the actual signal selection function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 CURRENT
80.00 A
4. To select an actual signal. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
05 TORQUE 70.00 %
To change the actual signal group.
5.a To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ENTER
Display Mode. FREQ 45.00 Hz
TORQUE 70.00 %
POWER 75.00 %
5.b To cancel the selection and keep the original selection. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ACT PAR
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
The selected keypad mode is entered.
FUNC DRIVE
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
30
How to display the full name of the actual signals

1. To display the full name of the three actual signals. Hold 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQUENCY
ACT CURRENT
POWER
2. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode. Release 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
ACT CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
How to view and reset the fault history
Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

ACT FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To enter the Fault History Display. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

1 LAST FAULT
+OVERCURRENT
6451 H 21 MIN 23 S
3. To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
(DOWN). 2 LAST FAULT
+OVERVOLTAGE
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
To clear the Fault History. RESET

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
H MIN S
4. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
31
How to display and reset an active fault
WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the
drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been
removed, the drive will trip again.
1. To display an active fault. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm

ACT ACS800
** FAULT **
ACS800 TEMP
2. To reset the fault. RESET 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
About the fault history

The fault history restores information on the latest events (faults, warnings and
resets) of the drive. The table below shows how the events are stored in the fault
history.
Event Information on display

Drive detects a fault and Sequential number of the event and
A Fault History View generates a fault message LAST FAULT text.
Sign Name and Name of the fault and a “+” sign in front
code of the name.
Sequential number Power- Total power-on time.

(1 is the most recent event) on time User resets the fault message. Sequential number of the event and
LAST FAULT text.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I -RESET FAULT text.
2 LAST FAULT Total power-on time.
+DC OVERVOLT (3210)
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S Drive generates a warning Sequential number of the event and
message. LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a “+” sign in
front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Drive deactivates the warning Sequential number of the event and
message. LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a “-” sign in
front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Control panel
32
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can:
• view the parameter values
• change the parameter settings.
The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key.
How to select a parameter and change the value

1. To enter the Parameter Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

PAR 10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
2. To select a group. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
01 KEYPAD REF SEL
REF1 (rpm)
3. To select a parameter within a group. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1
4. To enter the parameter setting function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI1]
5. To change the parameter value. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

- (slow change for numbers and text) 11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI2]
- (fast change for numbers only)
6a. To save the new value. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI2
6b. To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
press any of the mode selection keys. ACT PAR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
The selected mode is entered. 03 EXT REF1 SELECT
FUNC DRIVE
AI1
Control panel
33
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter

Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application
program. Source selection (pointer) parameters are exceptions: They point to the
value of another parameter. The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat from
that of the other parameters.
1. See the table above to 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O

- enter the Parameter Mode PAR 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
- select the correct parameter group and parameter
[±000.000.00]
- enter the parameter setting mode
ENTER
2. To scroll between the inversion, group, index and bit 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
fields.1) 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[±000.000.00]
3. To adjust the value of a field. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O

84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[±000.018.00]
4. To accept the value.

ENTER
1)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O Inversion field inverts the selected parameter

84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM value. Plus sign (+): no inversion, minus (-) sign:
06 INPUT1 inversion.
[±001.018.00] Bit field selects the bit number (relevant only if the
Inversion field parameter value is a packed boolean word).
Group field Index field selects the parameter index.
Index field
Group field selects the parameter group.
Bit field
Note: Instead of pointing to another parameter, it is also possible to define a

constant by the source selection parameter. Proceed as follows:
- Change the inversion field to C. The appearance of the row changes. The rest of
the line is now a constant setting field.
- Give the constant value to the constant setting field.
- Press Enter to accept.
Control panel
34
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can:
• start a guided procedure for adjusting the drive settings (assistants)
• upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel.
• download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive. 1)
• adjust the contrast of the display.
The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key.
1) The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default. The restriction
prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is, however, possible to download all. For more information,
please contact your local ABB representative.
Control panel
35
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit

The table below shows the operation of the basic keys which lead the user through
an assistant. The Motor Setup task of the Start-up Assistant is used as an example.
1. To enter the Function Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2. To select a task or function from the list (a flashing cursor 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
indicates the selection). Motor Setup
Double arrows: To change page to see more assistants/ Application Macro
functions. Speed Control EXT 1
3. To enter the task. ENTER Motor Setup 1/10

ENTER: Ok/Continue
ACT: Exit
FUNC: More Info
4. To accept and continue. ENTER Motor Setup 2/10

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info
5. To accept and continue. ENTER Motor Setup 3/10

MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[0 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
6. a. To adjust the requested drive parameter. Motor Setup 3/10

MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
b. To ask for information on the requested value. FUNC INFO P99.05

(To scroll the information displays Set as given on the
( )
motor nameplate.
and return to the task).
FUNC, ACT
7. a. To accept a value and step forward. ENTER Motor Setup 4/10

MOTOR NOM CURRENT?
[0.0 A]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
b. To cancel the setting and take one step back. RESET Motor Setup 3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
8. To cancel and exit. 2 x ACT 1 L -> 0.0 rpm O

Note: 1 x ACT returns to the first display of the task. FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
Control panel
36
How to upload data from a drive to the panel
Note:
• Upload before downloading.
• Ensure the program versions of the destination drive are the same as the
versions of the source drive, see parameters 33.01 and 33.02.
• Before removing the panel from a drive, ensure the panel is in remote operating
mode (change with the LOC/REM key).
• Stop the drive before downloading.
Before upload, repeat the following steps in each drive:

• Setup the motors.
• Activate the communication to the optional equipment. (See parameter group 98
OPTION MODULES.)
Before upload, do the following in the drive from which the copies are to be taken:
• Set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred.
• Proceed to the upload sequence (below).
1. Enter the Function Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2. Enter the page that contains the upload, download and 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
contrast functions. UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
3. Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
selected function). UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
4. Enter the upload function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

UPLOAD <=<=
5. Switch to external control. 1 -> 1242.0 rpm O

LOC
(No L on the first row of the display.) UPLOAD <=<=
REM
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
6. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into

which the data will be downloaded.
Control panel
37
How to download data from the panel to a drive

Consider the notes in section How to upload data from a drive to the panel above.
1. Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the

drive.
2. Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
LOC
of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to FREQ 45.00 Hz
REM
change to local control. CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %

FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
5. Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
the selected function). UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
6. Start the download. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

DOWNLOAD =>=>
Control panel
38
How to set the contrast of the display


FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
3. Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
function). UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
4. Enter the contrast setting function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

CONTRAST [4]
5. Adjust the contrast. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm

CONTRAST [6]
6.a Accept the selected value. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 6
6.b Cancel the new setting and retain the original value by 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
pressing any of the mode selection keys. ACT PAR FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
The selected mode is entered. FUNC DRIVE
Control panel
39
Drive selection mode

In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the
features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one
panel link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the
Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, Code: 3AFY 58919748 [English]).
In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can:
• Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link.
• Change the identification number of a drive connected to the panel link.
• View the status of the drives connected on the panel link.
The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key.
Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default,
the ID number of the drive is 1.
Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the
drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line.
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number

1. To enter the Drive Selection Mode. ACS800

DRIVE
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
2. To select the next drive/view. ACS800

The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing
ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
then adjusting the value with arrow buttons. The new value
ID NUMBER 1
is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be
switched off to validate its new ID number setting.
The status display of all devices connected to the Panel 1o

Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations
do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up
Status Display Symbols:
to view the rest of them.
o = Drive stopped, direction
forward
= Drive running, direction
reverse
F = Drive tripped on a fault
3. To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
mode, press one of the mode selection keys. ACT PAR FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
FUNC
POWER 75.00 %
The selected mode is entered.
Control panel
40
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display

Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has
a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the
control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format.
In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Bit 15 Bit 0
Boolean 0000 0000 0001 1010

Hex 0 0 1 A
Control panel
41
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Start-up Assistant
Introduction
The assistant guides the user through the start-up procedure, helping the user to
feed the requested data (parameter values) to the drive. The assistant also check
that the entered values are valid, i.e. within the allowed range. At the first start, the
drive suggests entering the first task of the assistant, Language Select,
automatically.
The Start-up Assistant is divided into tasks. The user may activate the tasks either
one after the other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The user
may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the
assistant at all.
See the chapter Control panel on how to start the assistant, browse and exit.
The default order of the tasks

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 99.02), the
Start-up Assistant decide which consequent tasks it suggests. The default tasks are
shown in the table below.
Application Default Tasks
Selection
FACTORY, SEQ Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT1, Start/Stop
CTRL Control, Protections, Output Signals
HAND/AUTO Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop
Control, Speed Control 1, Protections, Output Signals
T CTRL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Torque Control, Start/Stop Control,
Speed Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
PID CTRL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, PID Control, Start/Stop Control, Speed
Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
Program features
42
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters

Name Description Set Parameters
Language Select Selecting the language 99.01
Motor Set-up Setting the motor data 99.05, 99.06, 99.09, 99.07, 99.08,
99.04
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in 99.10 (20.8, 20.07)
the allowed range: Setting the limits).
Application Selecting the application macro 99.02, parameters associated to
the macro
Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 98, 35, 52
Speed Control Selecting the source for the speed reference 11.03
EXT1 (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Setting the reference limits 11.04, 11.05
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 20.02, 20.01, (20.08, 20.07)
Setting acceleration and deceleration times 22.02, 22.03
(Setting up the brake chopper if activated by parameter 27.01) (Group 27, 20.05, 14.01)
(If 99.02 is not SEQ CTRL: Setting constant speeds) (Group 12)
Speed Control Setting the source for the speed reference 11.06
EXT2 (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Torque Control Selecting the source for the torque reference 11.06
(If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 24.01, 24.02
PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference 11.06
(If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Setting the speed (reference) limits 20.02, 20.01 (20.08, 20.07)
Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 40.07, 40.09, 40.10
Start/Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 10.01, 10.02
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 11.02
Defining the direction control 10.03
Defining the start and stop modes 21.01, 21.02, 21.03
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 16.01, 21.07
Setting the ramp time for the Run Enable function 22.07
Protections Setting the torque and current limits 20.03, 20.04
Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through the relay outputs RO1, Group 14
RO2, RO3 and optional RO’s (if installed)
Selecting the signals indicated through the analogue output 15.01, 15.02, 15.03, 15.04, 15.05,
AO1, AO2 and optional AO’s (if installed). Setting the minimum, (Group 96)
maximum, scaling and inversion.
Program features
43
Contents of the assistant displays

There are two types of displays in the Start-up Assistant: The main displays and the
information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information or
answer a question. The assistant steps through the main displays. The information
displays contain help texts for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical
example of both and explanations of the contents.
Main Display Information Display

1 Motor Setup 3/10 INFO P99.05
2 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE? Set as given on the motor
3 [0 V] nameplate.
4 ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
1 Name of the assistant, step Text INFO, index of parameter to

number / total number of steps be set
2 Request/question Help text …
3 Feed-in field … help text continued
4 Commands: accept value and double arrow symbol (indicates
step forward or cancel and step that the text continues)
backwards
Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from
the control panel or through digital and analogue inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter
enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow can
also control the drive.
Local Control ACS800 External Control
Standard I/O
Control panel Fieldbus Slot 1

Adapter
Optional I/O Slot 1 or Slot 2

Module
RDCO CH0 (Advant fieldbus

Board (DDCS) connection only)
DriveWindow
CH3 AF 100 Interface

(DDCS)
Program features
44
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm I
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local mode.
External control
When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard
I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or
the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the
source for the external control.
External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those
special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control.
1 ->1242 rpm I 1 R ->1242 rpm I
External Control through the Input/ External Control by control panel

Output terminals, or through the
fieldbus interfaces
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time.
Settings
Panel key Additional information
LOC/REM Selection between local and external control
Parameter
11.02 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2
10.01 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1
11.03 Reference source for EXT1
10.02 Start, stop, direction source for EXT2
11.06 Reference source for EXT2
Group 98 OPTION Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication
MODULES
Diagnostics
Actual signals Additional information
01.11, 01.12 EXT1 reference, EXT2 reference
03.02 EXT1/EXT2 selection bit in a packed boolean word
Program features
45
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and
direction for external control location EXT1.
Select
DI1 / Std IO DI1
DI6 EXT1
DI6 / Std IO Start/stop/
DI7 to DI9 direction
DI1 / DIO ext 1 10.01
I/O Extensions
DI2 / DIO ext 1
See group 98
DI1 / DIO ext 2 OPTION
DI2 / DIO ext 2 MODULES.
Fb. selection
Fieldbus adapter slot 1 See the chapter COMM.
CH0 / RDCO board Fieldbus control.
CW
Standard Modbus Link
KEYPAD
Control panel
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the digital I/O extension module 1
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed
reference of external control location EXT1.
AI1 / Std IO AI1, AI2, AI3, DI3, DI4 Select

AI2 / Std IO
AI3 / Std IO EXT1
AI5, AI6
DI3 / Std IO Reference
DI4 / Std IO DI11, DI12
REF1 (rpm)
11.03
AI1 / AIO ext I/O Extensions
AI2 / AIO ext See parameter
group 98 OPTION
DI1 / DIO ext 3
MODULES.
DI2 / DIO ext 3
Fieldbus adapter slot 1 Fb. selection
See the chapter COMM.
CH0 / RDCO board REF
Fieldbus control.
Standard Modbus Link
Control panel KEYPAD
AI1 / Std IO = Analogue input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
AI1 / AIO ext = Analogue input AI1 on the analogue I/O extension module
Program features
46
Reference types and processing

The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analogue
input signal and control panel signals.
• The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input
increases the speed, the other decreases it.
• The drive accepts a bipolar analogue speed reference. This feature allows both
the speed and direction to be controlled with a single analogue input. The
minimum signal is full speed reversed and the maximum signal is full speed
forward.
• The drive can form a reference out of two analogue input signals by using
mathematical functions: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection,
and maximum selection.
• The drive can form a reference out of an analogue input signal and a signal
received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical
functions: addition and multiplication.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum
speed limits.
Settings
Parameter Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE External reference source, type and scaling
SELECT
Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps
Group 24 TORQUE CTRL Torque reference ramp times
Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision
Diagnostics
Actual signal Additional information
01.11, 01.12 Values of external references
Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS The reference values in different stages of the reference processing
chain.
Parameter
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Active reference / reference loss through a relay output
Group 15 ANALOGUE Reference value
OUTPUTS
Program features
47
Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external %-reference (External reference REF2) is
corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable.
The block diagram below illustrates the function.
Switch Select
max.freq
Select
DIRECT (3)
max.speed max.torque
%ref PROPOR. (2)
Select 99.04 (DTC) 40.18
1 OFF (1)
AI1 Add
AI2 40.14 %ref
... Mul. %ref’
40.16
PID Mul.
40.15 40.17
tref
40.01 k
Actual Values 40.02 ti
40.03 td
40.05 .
. i
. Filter 40.04 dFiltT
40.07 40.05 errVInv
AI1 40.13 rInt
AI2 PIDmax oh1
AI3 PIDmin ol1
AI5
AI6 40.19
IMOT
%ref= The drive reference before trimming

%ref’ = The drive reference after trimming
max. speed= Par. 20.02 (or 20.01 if the absolute value is greater)
max. freq = Par. 20.08 (or 20.07 if the absolute value is greater)
max. torq = Par. 20.14 (or 20.13 if the absolute value is greater)
Settings
40.14 … 40.18 Trimming function settings
40.01 … 40.13, 40.19 PID control block settings
Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits
Program features
48
Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed-controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user:
• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it
• tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Speed controlled conveyor line
Drive rollers (pull)

Tension measurement
Simplified block diagram

Add
Speed reference Trimmed
speed reference
PID
Tension
measurement
Tension
setpoint
Program features
49
Programmable analogue inputs

The drive has three programmable analogue inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V or
-10 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Two extra inputs are available if
an optional analogue I/O extension module is used. Each input can be inverted and
filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted.
Update cycles in the Standard Application Program

Input Cycle
AI / standard 6 ms
AI / extension 6 ms (100 ms 1))
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Group 11 REFERENCE AI as a reference source
SELECT
Group 13 ANALOGUE Processing of the standard inputs
INPUTS
30.01 Supervision of AI loss
Group 40 PID AI as a PID process control reference or actual values
CONTROL
35.01 AI in a motor temperature measurement
40.15 AI in a drive reference trimming
42.07 AI in a mechanical brake control function
98.06 Activation of optional analogue inputs
98.13 Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
98.14 Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
Diagnostics
Actual value Additional information
01.18, 01.19, 01.20 Values of standard inputs
01.38, 01.39 Value of optional inputs
Group 09 ACTUAL Scaled analogue input values (integer values for function block
SIGNALS programming)
Program features
50
Programmable analogue outputs

Two programmable current outputs (0/4 to 20 mA) are available as standard, and
two outputs can be added by using an optional analogue I/O extension module.
Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered.
The analogue output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed
(scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power,
etc.
It is possible to write a value to an analogue output through a serial communication
link.

Output Cycle
AO / standard 24 ms
AO / extension 24 ms (1000 ms 1) )
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Group 15 ANALOGUE AO value selection and processing (standard outputs)
OUTPUTS
30.20 Operation of an externally controlled AO in a communication break
30.22 Supervision of the use of optional AO
Group 35 MOT TEMP AO in motor temperature measurement
MEAS
Group 96 EXTERNAL Optional AO value selection and processing
AO
Group 98 OPTION Activation of optional I/O
MODULES
Diagnostics
01.22, 01.23 Values of the standard outputs
01.28, 01.29 Values of the optional outputs
Warning
IO CONFIG Improper use of optional I/O
Program features
51
Programmable digital inputs

The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard. Six extra inputs are
available if optional digital I/O extension modules are used.

Input Cycle
DI / standard 6 ms
DI / extension 12 ms
Settings
Group 10 START/STOP/ DI as start, stop, direction
DIR
Group 11 REFERENCE DI in reference selection, or reference source
SELECT
Group 12 CONSTANT DI in constant speed selection
SPEEDS
Group 16 SYSTEM CTRL DI as external Run Enable, fault reset or user macro change signal
INPUTS
22.01 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal
30.03 DI as external fault source
30.05 DI in motor overtemperature supervision function
30.22 Supervision of optional I/O use
40.20 DI as sleep function activation signal (in PID process control)
42.02 DI as mechanical brake acknowledgement signal
98.03 … 96.05 Activation of the optional digital I/O extension modules
98.09 … 98.11 Naming of the optional digital inputs in the application program
Diagnostics
01.17 Values of the standard digital inputs
01.40 Values of the optional digital inputs
Warning
IO CONFIG Improper use of optional I/O
Fault
I/O COMM ERR (7000) Communication loss to I/O
Program features
52
Programmable relay outputs

As standard there are three programmable relay outputs. Six outputs can be added
by using the optional digital I/O extension modules. By means of a parameter setting
it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready,
running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc.
It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link.

Output Cycle
RO / standard 100 ms
RO / extension 100 ms
Settings
Group 14 RELAY RO value selections and operation times
OUTPUTS
30.20 Operation of an externally controlled relay output on a communication break
Group 42 BRAKE RO in a mechanical brake control
CONTROL
Group 98 OPTION Activation of optional relay outputs
MODULES
Diagnostics
01.21 Standard relay output states
01.41 Optional relays output states
Program features
53
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
• Motor speed and torque
• Mains voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage
• Active control location (Local, EXT1 or EXT2)
• Reference values
• Drive temperature
• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
• Digital I/O and Analogue I/O status
• PID controller actual values (if the PID Control macro is selected)
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also
possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the
analogue outputs.
Settings
Group 15 ANALOGUE Selection of an actual signal to an analogue output
OUTPUTS
Group 92 D SET TR Selection of an actual signal to a dataset (serial communication)
ADDR
Diagnostics
Group 01 ACTUAL Lists of actual signals
SIGNALS … 09
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Program features
54
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model
determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetised at zero speed
for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification
method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification Run can be performed.
Settings
Parameter 99.10.
Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilising
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Umains
TM fout UDC
(Nm) (Hz) (V d.c.) UDC
160 80 520
120 60 390
fout
80 40 260
TM
40 20 130
t(s)
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
UDC= Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the
minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive
runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the
motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a “hold
circuit” that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.
Program features
55
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, the
starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay. E.g. the starting
of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy.
Settings
Parameter 21.01.
DC Magnetising
When DC Magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up
to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible
to synchronise the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic
Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.
DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to Motor
Speed
lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference DC Hold
and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold
speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC DC hold
speed
into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds t
the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes. Speed
Reference
Settings
DC hold
Parameters 21.04, 21.05, and 21.06. speed
t
Program features
56
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in
the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor
power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor TBr
Speed TN (%)
TBr = Braking Torque
No Flux Braking 60 TN = 100 Nm
40
Flux Braking
20
Flux Braking No Flux Braking
t (s) f (Hz)
50 HZ/60 Hz
Braking Torque (%)

120
1 No Flux Braking
80
Rated Motor Power

40
2
1 2.2 kW 4 3
2 15 kW 0 5
f (Hz)
3 37 kW 5 10 20 30 40 50
4 75 kW 120
5 250 kW
1 Flux Braking
80
2
40 3
4
5
0 f (Hz)
5 10 20 30 40 50
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking.
Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing
the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are:
• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
• The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases
during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
Settings
Parameter 26.02.
Program features
57
Flux Optimisation
Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when
the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive)
can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
Settings
Parameter 26.01.
Acceleration and deceleration ramps

Two user-selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available. It is possible
to adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and the ramp shape. Switching
between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input.
Motor
The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear speed
and S-curve.
Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow Linear
acceleration/deceleration. S-curve
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads,

or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing the speed.
Settings 2 t (s)
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
Critical speeds
A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e.g. mechanical resonance
problems.
Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS.
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine 15 constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with
digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.
Program features
58
Speed controller tuning

During the motor identification, the speed controller is automatically tuned. It is,
however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and
derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In
Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the
motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed
reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
n
nN
%
A B C D
A : Undercompensated t
B : Normally tuned (autotuning)
C : Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D : Overcompensated speed controller
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative
acceleration
compensation
Proportional,
integral + Torque
Speed + Error +
reference - value + reference
Derivative
Calculated actual speed
Settings
Parameter group 23 SPEED CTRL and 20 LIMITS.
Diagnostics
Actual signal 01.02.
Program features
59
Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct
Torque Control is used.
T (%)
TN
Speed Control No Pulse With Pulse Tload
100
Encoder Encoder
Static speed error, + 0.1 to 0.5 % + 0.01 %
% of nN (10% of nominal
slip) t (s)
Dynamic speed 0.4 %sec.* 0.1 %sec.* 0.1 - 0.4 %sec
nact-nref
error
nN
*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning. TN = rated motor torque
nN = rated motor speed
nact = actual speed
nref = speed reference
Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the
motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control,
when Direct Torque Control is used.
T (%)
TN
Torque Control No Pulse With Pulse Tref
Encoder Encoder 100
Tact
90
Linearity error + 4 %* +3%
Repeatability + 3 %* +1%
error
Torque rise time 1 to 5 ms 1 to 5 ms
*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be

greater.
10
< 5 ms t(s)
TN = rated motor torque
Tref = torque reference
Tact = actual torque
Scalar control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a
frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control
method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved in Scalar Control.
It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special
applications:
Program features
60
• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
the motor identification
• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
• If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes)
• The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer.
In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available.
Settings
Parameter 99.04.
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR Compensation is active only when the motor Motor Voltage
control mode is Scalar (see the section Scalar
control above). When IR Compensation is IR Compensation
activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost
to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is
useful in applications that require high breakaway
torque. In Direct Torque Control, no IR No compensation
Compensation is possible/needed. f (Hz)
Settings
Parameter 26.03.
Hexagonal motor flux

Typically the drive controls the motor flux in such a way that the rotating flux vector
follows a circular pattern. This is ideal in most applications. When operated above
the field weakening point (FWP, typically 50 or 60 Hz), it is, however, not possible to
reach 100% of the output voltage. The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than
with the full voltage.
If hexagonal flux control is selected, the motor flux is controlled along a circular
pattern below the field weakening point, and along a hexagonal pattern in the field
weakening range. The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency
increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the hexagonal flux pattern, the
maximum output voltage can be reached; The peak load capacity is higher than with
the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency
range of FWP to 1.6 · FWP, due to increased losses.
Settings
Parameter 26.05.
Program features
61
Programmable protection functions
AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analogue input signal falls below the
preset minimum limit.
Settings
Parameter 30.01.
Panel Loss
Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as
control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter 30.02.
External Fault
External Faults can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an
external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameter 30.03.
Motor Thermal Protection

The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal
Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes
available.
The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature
thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor.
Motor temperature thermal model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1) The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 °C when power is applied to the
drive.
2) Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically
calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The
load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C.
Program features
62
Motor Motor Break point

Load Current 150
100% (%) Motor load curve
100
50
Temp. t Zero speed load
Rise
Speed
100%
63%
t
Motor thermal time
Use of the motor thermistor

It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor
(PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input
DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less
than 1.5 kohm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication
if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kohm. The installation must meet the
regulations for protecting against contact.
Settings
Parameters 30.04 to 30.09.
Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See
the subsection Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O.
Stall Protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition
(warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Underload Protection
Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an
underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault
condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen
as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning
indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Program features
63
Motor Phase Loss

The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The
function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive detects if any of the
motor phases is not connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also
supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
Settings
Parameter 30.16.
Earth Fault Protection

The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable.
The Earth Fault protection is based on earth leakage current measurement with a
summation current transformer at the output of the converter.
• An earth fault in the mains does not activate the protection.
• In an earthed (grounded) supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds.
• In floating mains, the mains capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more.
• The capacitive currents due to screened copper motor cables up to 300 metres
do not activate the protection.
Settings
Parameter 30.17.
Communication Fault
The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive
and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module).
Settings
Supervision of optional IO
The function supervises the use of the optional analogue and digital inputs and
outputs in the application program, and warns if the communication to the input/
output is not operational.
Settings
Parameter 30.22.
Program features
64
Preprogrammed faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1.65 to 2.17 · Imax depending on the drive
type.
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 ·U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the
mains voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. For 500 V units, U1max is 500
V. For 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit
corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units, 877 VDC
for 500 V units, and 1210 VDC for 690 V units.
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 · U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of
the mains voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V. For 690 V units,
U1min is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the
mains voltage trip level is 334 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 461 VDC for 690
V units.
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. There are two supervision
limits: warning limit and fault trip limit.
Short circuit
There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the
inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault
indication is given.
Input phase loss

Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the mains cable connection status by
detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive
is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%.
Ambient temperature
The drive will not start if the ambient temperature is above 73 to 82 °C (the exact
limits vary within the given range depending on drive type).
Overfrequency
If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a
fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute
maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active).
Program features
65
Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is
given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and
DC voltage.
Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS.
Power limit
The maximum allowed motor power is 1.5 · Phd or Pcont whichever value is greater
(varies depending on the drive type). If the limit is exceeded, the motor torque is
automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge of the drive against
overload.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage
and “analogue input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic Resets must be
activated by the user.
Settings
Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
Program features
66
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user-
defined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc.
Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
Diagnostics
Actual Signals Additional information
03.02 Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word
Group 14 RELAY Supervision limit indication through a relay output
OUTPUTS
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
Settings
Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.
Process PID control

There is a built-in PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control
process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.
When the process PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is
connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process
feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the
drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the
desired level (reference).
Block diagrams
The block diagram below right illustrates the process PID control.
The figure on the left shows an application example: The controller adjusts the
speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set
pressure reference.
Program features
67
Example: PID Control Block Diagram

Pressure boost pump PID
%ref ref
A C S 6 0 0
40.01 k
ACS800 40.02 ti Switch
Actual Values Frequency
A C T P A R F U N C D R IV E
40.03 td
40.06 .
E N T E R
reference
L O C R E S E T R E F
i
R E M
..
3 Filter 40.04 dFiltT
40.12
AI1
40.05 errVInv Speed
40.13 rInt
2 0 ...1 0 b a r AI2 PIDmax
reference
4 ...2 0 m A oh1
AI3 PIDmin ol1 99.04 = 0
AI5
(DTC)
AI6 40.19
3
IMOT
%ref = external reference EXT REF2 (see

parameter 11.06)
Settings
Parameter Purpose
99.02 Process PID control activation
40.01 - 40.13, 40.19, The settings of the process PID controller
40.25 - 40.27
32.13 to 32.18 The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables
ACT1 and ACT2
Diagnostics
Actual Signals Purpose
01.12, 01.24, 01.25, PID process controller reference, actual values and error value
01.26 and 01.34
Group 14 RELAY Supervision limit exceeded indication through a relay output
OUTPUTS
Group 15 ANALOGUE PID process controller values through standard analogue outputs
OUTPUTS
Group 96 EXTERNAL PID process controller values through optional analogue outputs
AO
Program features
68
Sleep function for the process PID control

The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The
sleep function can be put into use only when the process PID control is active.
Compare
Mot.speed 1 Select
0
Delay
And
1<2 INTERNAL Set/Reset
DI1 t S
40.21 2 ..
.
%refActive
PIDCtrlActive & 1)
40.20 modulating
40.22
S/R
R
Or
03.02 (B1)
1)
<1 Or 1 = Activate
03.02 (B2)
sleeping
Compare
StartRq
<1 0 = Deactivate
01.34
sleeping
1 Select Delay
0
1<2 INTERNAL t
DI1
40.23 2 ..
.
40.20 40.24
Mot.speed: Actual speed of the motor

%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See Parameter 11.02.
PIDCtrlActive: 99.02 is PID CTRL
modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating
Example
The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function.
Motor Speed
td = Sleep delay, parameter 40.22

t<td td
Sleep level
Par. 40.21 Text on display
SLEEP MODE
Time
Actual Value STOP START
twd
Wake-up level
Parameter 42.23
Time
twd = Wake-up delay, parameter 40.24
Program features
69
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump: The water consumption
falls at night. As a consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor
speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the
centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The
sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after
the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the
pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum
level and the wake-up delay has passed.
Settings
99.02 Process PID control activation
40.20 - 40.24 Sleep function settings
Diagnostics
Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display.
Program features
70
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

This subsection describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the
drive control board RMIO is used as the connection interface.
RMIO board
One sensor
AI1+
Motor
AI1-
T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
Three sensors RMIO board
AI1+
Motor AI1-
T T T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RMIO board, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts
and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of
8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement:
• The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
• The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals.
Program features
71
Settings
15.01 Analogue output in a motor 1 temperature measurement. Set to M1 TEMP
MEAS.
35.01 … 35.03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
Other
Parameters 13.01 to 13.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.02 to 15.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Diagnostics
Actual values Additional information
01.35 Temperature value
03.08 Warning bit state
03.15 Fault bit states
03.16 Warning bit states
Warnings
MOTOR 1 TEMP Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 03.16
(4312)
T MEAS ALM Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 03.08
Faults
(4312)
Program features
72
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension

This subsection describes the motor temperature measurement of one motor when
an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used as the connection
interface.
RAIO module
One sensor
AI1+
Motor
AI1-
T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
Three sensors RAIO module
AI1+
Motor AI1-
T T T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RAIO module, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live
parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage
distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the
requirement:
• The RAIO module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
• The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RAIO module terminals.
Program features
73
Settings
35.01 … 35.03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
98.12 Activation of optional analogue I/O for motor temperature measurement
Other
Parameters 13.16 to 13.20 (AI1 processing) and 96.01 to 96.05 (AO1 signal selection and processing)
are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Diagnostics
Actual values Additional information
01.35 Temperature value
03.08 Fault bit in a packed boolean word
03.15 Warning bit in a packed boolean word
03.16 Fault bit in a packed boolean word
Warnings
(4312)
T MEAS ALM Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 03.08
Faults
(4312)
Program features
74
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each
parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the
programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customise the
operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible
without the need of a special programming tool or language:
• The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive application
program.
• The control panel is the programming tool.
• The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template
sheets.
The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may
consist of several separate functions.
For more information, see Application Guide for Adaptive Program (code: 3AFE
64527274 [English]).
Program features
75
Control of a mechanical brake

The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered.
Example
The figure below shows a brake control application example.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control
function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that the frequency
converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC
61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European
Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus, the personnel safety
of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter
feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined
in the application specific regulations.
Brake control logic is integrated in Brake control RMIO board

the drive application program. The hardware X25
brake control hardware and wirings
230 VAC
needs to be done by the user. 1 RO1
- Brake on/off control through relay 2 RO1
output RO1. 3 RO1
- Brake supervision through digital
input DI5 (optional). Emergency
- Emergency brake switch in the brake X22
brake control circuit.
5 DI5
7 +24 V
Motor Mechanical brake
Program features
76
Operation time scheme

The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See
also the state machine on the following page.
1 5
Start command
External speed
reference
Inverter modulating 7
2
Motor magnetised tmd
tcd
Open brake
command
4
Internal speed
reference (actual tod 3 6
motor speed) ncs
Torque reference
Ts
time
Ts Start torque at brake release (Parameter 42.07 and 42.08)

tmd Motor magnetising delay
tod Brake open delay (Parameter 42.03)
ncs Brake close speed (Parameter 42.05)
tcd Brake close delay (Parameter 42.04)
Program features
77
State shifts
From any state
1) (rising edge)
NO
MODULATION 0/0/1
2)
OPEN
BRAKE 1/1/1
3)
A
5)
RELEASE RFG
INPUT 1/1/0
4)
RFG INPUT
TO ZERO 1/1/1
7)
10)
6)
11) CLOSE
BRAKE 0/1/1
RFG = Ramp Function 12)
A
Generator in the speed 13)
control loop (reference 8) 9)
handling).
BRAKE
ACK FAULT 0/0/1
State (Symbol NN
X/Y/Z )
- NN: State name
- X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations
X = 1 Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energises.
Y = 1 Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the
status of the external Start signal.
Z=1 Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference (internal) to zero along a ramp.
State change conditions (Symbol )

1) Brake control active 0 -> 1 OR Inverter is modulating = 0
2) Motor magnetised = 1 AND Drive running = 1
3) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = 1
4) Start = 0
5) Start = 0
6) Start = 1
7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = 0
8) Start = 1
9) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake close delay passed = 1 AND Start = 0
Only if parameter 42.02 = OFF:
10) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake open delay passed =1
11) Brake acknowledgement = 0
12) Brake acknowledgement = 0
13) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake close delay passed = 1
Program features
78
Settings
14.01 Relay output for the brake control (set to BRAKE CTRL)
Group 42 BRAKE Brake function settings
CONTROL
Diagnostics
03.01 Ramp in zero bit
03.13 The state of bit “brake open/close command”
03.15 Fault bit state
03.16 Warning bit state
Warnings
BRAKE ACKN (ff74) Chapter Fault tracing, and actual signal 03.16
Faults
BRAKE ACKN (ff74) Chapter Fault tracing, and actual signal 03.15
Program features
79
Master/Follower use of several drives

In a Master/Follower application, the system is run by several drives, the motor
shafts of which are coupled to each other. The master and follower drives
communicate via a fibre optic link. The figures below illustrate two basic application
types.
M/F Application, Overview

Solidly coupled motor shafts: Flexibly coupled motor shafts:
- Speed-controlled Master - Speed-controlled Master
- Follower follows the torque reference - Follower follows the speed reference
of the Master of the Master
External control
External control
signals
signals
n 3 n 3
Supply Supply
3 3
Master/
Follower fault 2 2 Follower Link Follower fault 2 2 Master/Follower
supervision supervision Link
3 3
Supply Supply
3 3
Settings and diagnostics

Group 60 MASTER/ Master/Follower parameters
FOLLOWER
Other
Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430 [English]) explains the functionality in further
detail.
Program features
80
Jogging
The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine
section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on,
the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the
drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate.
The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent
how the drive shifts to normal operation ( = jogging inactive) when the drive start
command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of
the drive start command.
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Time
Phase Jog Start Description

cmd cmd
1-2 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
2-3 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed.
3-4 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
4-5 0 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
7-8 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
8-9 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed reference.
9-10 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp.
10-11 0 0 Drive is stopped.
11-12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
12-13 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows he speed reference.
13-14 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
15-16 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
x = State can be either 1 or 0.
Program features
81
Note: The jogging is not operational when:

• the drive start command is on, or
• the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display).
Note: The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds.
Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging.
Settings
10.06 Input for the on/off control of the jogging.
12.15 Jogging speed.
21.10 Switch off delay for the inverter IGBT control. A delay keeps the inverter
modulation live over a short standstill period enabling a smooth restart.
22.04, 22.05 Acceleration and deceleration times used during the jogging.
22.06 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to zero during the
jogging.
Program features
82
Program features
83
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control
connections of the standard application macros. It also describes how to save a user
macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited to his needs
- by parameter 99.02, makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user
macro.
There are five standard macros and two user macros. The table below contains a
summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Suitable Applications
Factory Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used:
- Conveyors
- Speed-controlled pumps and fans
- Test benches with predefined constant speeds
Hand/Auto Speed control applications. Switching between two external control devices is
possible.
PID Control Process control applications e.g. different closed loop control systems such as
pressure control, level control, and flow control. For example:
- pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems
- level controlling pumps of water reservoirs
- pressure boost pumps of district heating systems
- material flow control on a conveyor line.
It is also possible to switch between process and speed control.
Torque Torque control applications. Switching between torque and speed control is
Control possible.
Sequential Speed control applications in which speed reference, seven constant speeds and
Control two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used.
User The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings
including group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent
memory, and recall the data at a later time. Two user macros are essential when
switching between two different motors is required
Application macros
84
Factory macro
All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the control panel or
from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the
LOC/REM key of the panel. The drive is speed-controlled.
In external control, the control location is EXT1. The reference signal is connected to
analogue input AI1 and Start/Stop and Direction signals are connected to digital
inputs DI1 and DI2. By default, the direction is fixed to FORWARD (parameter
10.03). DI2 does not control the direction of rotation unless parameter 10.03 is
changed to REQUEST.
Three constant speeds are selected by digital inputs DI5 and DI6. Two acceleration/
deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are used
according to the state of digital input DI4.
Two analogue signals (speed and current) and three relay output signals (ready,
running and inverted fault) are available.
The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT
and POWER.
Application macros
85
Default control connections

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Factory macro. The
markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Effective only if parameter 10.03 is X20
switched to REQUEST by the user. 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
2)
The US default settings differ as X21
follows: 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
DI1 Start (Pulse: 0->1)
3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) … 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm
DI2 Stop (Pulse: 1->0) 4 AI1-
DI3 Forward/Reverse 5 AI2+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
6 AI2- 100 ohm
3) 7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
0 = ramp times according to par.
8 AI3- 100 ohm
22.02 and 22.03. 1 = ramp times
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor
4)
See parameter group 12 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
CONSTANT SPEEDS:
X22
DI5 DI6 Operation 1 DI1 Stop/Start 2)
0 0 Set speed through AI1 2 DI2 Forward/reverse 1, 2)
1 0 Speed 1 3 DI3 By default, not in use. 2)
0 1 Speed 2 4 DI4 Acceleration & deceleration select 3)
5 DI5 Constant speed select 4)
1 1 Speed 3
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
5)
See parameter 21.09. 8 +24 V
11 DI IL Start interlock (0 = stop) 5)
X23
1 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
2 GND 24 VDC, 250 mA
X25
1 RO11 Relay output 1
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
1 R031 Relay output 3
Fault 2 R032 Inverted fault
3 R033
Application macros
86
Hand/Auto macro
Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of
two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital inputs DI5 and DI6, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1
and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI3. The drive is speed
controlled. Speed reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given
from the control panel keypad also. One constant speed can be selected through
digital input DI4.
Speed reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum
speed of the drive.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The
default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and
CTRL LOC.
Application macros
87

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Hand/Auto macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Selection between two external X20
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2. 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2)
See parameter 21.09. X21
1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC, kohm < RL <
2 GND 10 kohm
3 AI1+ Speed reference (Hand control). 0(2) … 10 V,
4 AI1- Rin > 200 kohm
5 AI2+ Speed reference (Auto control). 0(4) …
6 AI2- 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA,
8 AI3- Rin = 100 ohm.
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start (Hand control)
2 DI2 Forward/Reverse (Hand control)
3 DI3 Hand/Auto control select 1)
4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05
5 DI5 Forward/Reverse (Auto control)
6 DI6 Stop/Start (Auto control)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
88
PID Control macro

The PID Control macro is used for controlling a process variable – such as pressure
or flow – by controlling the speed of the driven motor.
Process reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and process feedback
signal to analogue input AI2.
Alternatively, a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through analogue
input AI1. Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the
process variable. Selection between the direct speed control and the process
variable control is done with digital input DI3.
default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, ACTUAL VALUE1 and
CONTROL DEVIATION.
Connection example, 24 VDC / 4…20 mA two-wire sensor
X21 / RMIO board

4…20 mA 5 AI2+ Process actual value measurement. 0(4) …
P
I 6 AI2- 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
…
X23 / RMIO board
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus the output signal must
be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA.
Application macros
89

The figure below shows the external control connections for the PID Control macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Selection between two external X20
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2)
In use only when the speed control X21
is active (DI3 = 0) 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
3) 3 AI1+ Speed ref. (speed cntrl) or process ref.
Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not
4 AI1- (process cntrl). 0(2) … 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm
start or stops. On = Run Enable on.
Normal operation. PT
5 AI2+ Process actual value measurement. 0(4) …
6 AI2- 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
5)
4)
7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
See parameter 21.09. 8 AI3- 100 ohm.
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA =
5) 10 AO1- 0 … motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm
The sensor needs to be powered.
See the manufacturer’s instructions. A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) … 20 mA =
A connection example of a two-wire 12 AO2- 0 … motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
24 VDC / 4…20 mA sensor is shown X22
above. 1 DI1 Stop/Start (speed control)
2 DI2 By default, not in use.
3 DI3 Speed / process control select 1)
4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2)
5 DI5 Run Enable. 3)
6 DI6 Stop/Start (process control)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
90
Torque Control macro

Torque Control macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is
required. Torque reference is given through analogue input AI2 as a current signal.
By default, 0 mA corresponds to 0 %, and 20 mA to 100 % of the rated motor torque.
The Start/Stop/Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
The Run Enable signal is connected to DI6.
Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque
control. It is also possible to change the external control location to local (i.e. to
control panel) by pressing the LOC/REM key. The panel controls the speed by
default. If torque control with panel is required, the value of parameter 11.01 should
be changed to REF2 (%).
default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CTRL
LOC.
Application macros
91

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Torque Control
macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)Selection between external control X20

locations EXT1 and EXT2 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2) In use only when the speed control X21
is active (DI3 = 0) 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
3) 3 AI1+ Speed reference. 0(2) … 10 V, Rin >
Off = Ramp times according to par.
4 AI1- 200 kohm
22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. 5 AI2+ Torque reference. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin = 100
6 AI2- ohm
4)
Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not 8 AI3- 100 ohm
start or stops. On = Run Enable on.
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
Normal operation.
5)
See parameter 21.09. 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
2 DI2 Forward/Reverse
3 DI3 Speed / torque control select 1)
4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2)
6 DI6 Run Enable 4)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
92
Sequential Control macro

This macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital
inputs DI4 to DI6. Two acceleration/deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration
and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI3. The
Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
External speed reference can be given through analogue input AI1. The reference is
active only when all of the digital inputs DI4 to DI6 are 0 VDC. Giving operational
commands and setting reference is possible also from the control panel.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks.
Default stop mode is ramp. The default signals on the display of the control panel are
FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER.
Operation diagram
The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro.
Speed
Speed 3
Stop with
Speed 2 deceleration
ramp
Speed 1
Time
Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2
Start/Stop
Accel1/Decel1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Accel2/Decel2
Speed 3
Application macros
93

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Sequential Control
macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)Off = Ramp times according to par. X20

22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. 2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
X21
2)
See parameter group 12 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
CONSTANT SPEEDS: 2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
3 AI1+ External speed reference 0(2) … 10 V, Rin >
DI4 DI5 DI6 Operation
4 AI1- 200 kohm
0 0 0 Set speed through AI1
1 0 0 Speed 1 6 AI2- 100 ohm
0 1 0 Speed 2 7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
1 1 0 Speed 3 8 AI3- 100 ohm
0 0 1 Speed 4 rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
1 0 1 Speed 5 10 AO1- speed, RL < 700 ohm
0 1 1 Speed 6 A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor
1 1 1 Speed 7 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
3)
See parameter 21.09. 2 DI2 Forward/Reverse
3 DI3 Acceleration & deceleration selection 1)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
94
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including
Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and
recall the data at a later time. The panel reference and the control location setting
(Local or Remote) are also saved.
To create User Macro 1:
• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet.
• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by
changing parameter 99.02 to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes
20 s to 1 min.
To recall the user macro:
• Change parameter 99.02 to USER 1 LOAD.
• Press ENTER to load.
The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see parameter 16.05).
Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP
DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond
to the motor used.
Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to
adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the
motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros.
When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded,
and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
95
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus
equivalent values for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter Additional
data: actual signals and parameters.

Term Definition
Absolute Maximum Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is
Frequency greater than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the minimum
Speed limit is higher than the maximum limit.
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the
user. No user setting possible.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.

96
No. Name/Value Description FbEq

01 ACTUAL SIGNALS Basic signals for monitoring of the drive.
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE Process variable based on settings in parameter group 34 PROCESS 1=1
VARIABLE.
01.02 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm. Filter time setting by parameter 34.04. -20000 =
-100% 20000
= 100% of
motor abs.
max. speed
01.03 FREQUENCY Calculated drive output frequency. -100 = -1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
01.04 CURRENT Measured motor current. 10 = 1 A
01.05 TORQUE Calculated motor torque. 100 is the motor nominal torque. Filter time -10000 =
setting by parameter 34.05. -100% 10000
= 100% of
motor nom.
torque
01.06 POWER Motor power. 100 is the nominal power. -1000 =
-100% 1000 =
100% of motor
nom. power
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V Measured intermediate circuit voltage. 1=1V
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE Calculated supply voltage. 1=1V
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Calculated motor voltage. 1=1V
01.10 ACS800 TEMP Temperature of the heatsink. 1 = 1 °C
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is 1 = 1 rpm
SCALAR.)
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2. Depending on the use, 100% is the motor 0 = 0% 10000
maximum speed, motor nominal torque, or maximum process = 100% 1)
reference.
01.13 CTRL LOCATION Active control location. (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2. See the See Descr.
chapter Program features.
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered. 1=1h
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS kWh counter. 1 = 100 kWh
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT Application block output signal. E.g. the process PID controller output 0 = 0% 10000
when the PID Control macro is active. = 100%
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS Status of digital inputs. Example: 0000001 = DI1 is on, DI2 to DI6 are
off.
01.18 AI1 [V] Value of analogue input AI1. 1 = 0.001 V
01.19 AI2 [mA] Value of analogue input AI2. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.20 AI3 [mA] Value of analogue input AI3. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS Status of relay outputs. Example: 001 = RO1 is energised, RO2 and
RO3 are de-energised.
01.22 AO1 [mA] Value of analogue output AO1. 1 =0.001 mA

97

01.23 AO2 [mA] Value of analogue output AO2. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when 0 = 0% 10000
parameter 99.02 = PD CTRL = 100%
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when 0 = 0% 10000
parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. = 100%
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION Deviation of the process PID controller, i.e. the difference between the -10000 =
reference value and the actual value. Updated only when parameter -100% 10000
99.02 = PID CTRL. = 100%
01.27 APPLICATION MACRO Active application macro (value of parameter 99.02). See 99.02
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] Value of output 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). 1 = 0.001 mA
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA] Value of output 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). 1 = 0.001 mA
01.30 PP 1 TEMP IGBT maximum temperature in inverter no. 1 (used only in high power 1 = 1 °C
units with parallel inverters).
01.34 ACTUAL VALUE Process PID controller actual value. See parameter 40.06. 0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 1. See parameter 35.01. 1 = 1 °C
01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 2. See parameter 35.04. 1 = 1 °C
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST Estimated motor temperature. 1 = 1 °C
01.38 AI5 [mA] Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the analogue I/O 1 = 0.001 mA
extension module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA
(instead of V).
01.39 AI6 [mA] Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of the analogue I/O 1 = 0.001 mA
extension module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA
(instead of V).
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the digital I/O extension 1=1
modules (optional). E.g. value 000001: DI7 is on, DI8 to DI12 are off.
01.41 EXT RO STATUS Status of the relay outputs on the digital I/O extension modules 1=1
(optional). E.g. value 0000001: RO1 of module 1 is energised. Other
relay outputs are de-energised.
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL Motor actual speed in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed. If 1=1
parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, the value is the relative actual output
frequency.
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. 1 = 10 h
Can be reset by parameter 34.06.
01.44 FAN ON-TIME Running time of the drive cooling fan.
Note: The counter can be reset by the DriveWindow PC tool. Resetting
is recommended when the fan is replaced.
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP Control board temperature.

98

02 ACTUAL SIGNALS Speed and torque reference monitoring signals.
02.01 SPEED REF 2 Limited speed reference. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum 0 = 0% 20000
Speed of the motor. = 100% of
motor
absolute max.
speed
02.02 SPEED REF 3 Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100% corresponds to the 20000 = 100%
Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
02.09 TORQUE REF 2 Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal 0 = 0% 10000
torque. = 100% of
motor nominal
torque
02.10 TORQUE REF 3 Torque reference. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 10000 = 100%
02.13 TORQ USED REF Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100% 10000 = 100%
corresponds to the motor nominal torque.
02.14 FLUX REF Flux reference in percent. 10000 = 100%
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED Estimated motor speed. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum 20000 = 100%
Speed of the motor.
02.18 SPEED MEASURED Measured motor actual speed (zero when no encoder is used). 100% 20000 = 100%
corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS Data words for monitoring of fieldbus communication (each signal is a 2)
16-bit data word).
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.11 FOLLOWER MCW A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.12 INT FAULT INFO A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.19 INT INIT FAULT A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
3.20 LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the
codes.
3.21 2.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault.
3.22 3.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault.
3.23 4.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault.

99

3.24 5.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault.
3.25 LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the latest warning.
3.26 2.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning.
3.27 3.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning.
3.28 4.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning.
3.29 5.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning.
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Signals for the Adaptive Program
09.01 AI1 SCALED Value of analogue input AI1 scaled to an integer value. 20000 = 10 V
09.02 AI2 SCALED Value of analogue input AI2 scaled to an integer value. 20000 = 20
mA
mA
mA
mA
09.06 DS MCW Control Word (CW) of the Main Reference Dataset received from the 0 ... 65535
master station through the fieldbus interface (Decimal)
09.07 MASTER REF1 Reference 1 (REF1) of the Main Reference Dataset received from the -32768 …
master station through the fieldbus interface 32767
09.08 MASTER REF2 Reference 2 (REF2) of the Main Reference Dataset received from the -32768 …
master station through the fieldbus interface 32767
09.09 AUX DS VAL1 Reference 3 (REF3) of the Auxiliary Reference Dataset received from -32768 …
the master station through the fieldbus interface 32767
1) Percent of motor maximum speed / nominal torque / maximum process reference (depending on the
ACS800 macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in the chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of
Actual Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430 [English]).

100
Index Name/Selection Description FbEq

10 START/STOP/DIR The sources for external start, stop and direction control
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source. 1
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. Direction is fixed 2
according to parameter 10.3 DIRECTION.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. Direction through 3
digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital 4
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter
10.03 DIRECTION.
DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital 5
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 =
reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start forward. Pulse start 6
reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: Start reverse. Pulse stop through
digital input DI3. 1 -> ”0”: stop. To control the direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
DI6 See selection DI1. 7
DI6,5 See selection DI1,2. DI6: Start/stop, DI5: direction. 8
KEYPAD Control panel. To control the direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be 9
REQUEST.
COMM.CW Fieldbus Control Word. 10
DI7,8 See selection DI1,2. 12
DI7P,8P See selection DI1P,2P. 13
DI7P,8P,9 See selection DI1P,2P,3. 14
DI7P,8P,9P See selection DI1P,2P,3P. 15
PARAM 10.04 Source selected by 10.04. 16
DI1 F, DI2 R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. 17
DI1 DI2 Operation

0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop
Note: Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST.

10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).

101

NOT SEL See parameter 10.01. 1
DI1 See parameter 10.01. 2
DI1,2 See parameter 10.01. 3
DI1P,2P See parameter 10.01. 4
DI1P,2P,3 See parameter 10.01. 5
DI1P,2P,3P See parameter 10.01. 6
KEYPAD See parameter 10.01. 9
COMM.CW See parameter 10.01. 10
DI7P,8P See parameter 10.01. 13
DI7P,8P,9 See parameter 10.01. 14
DI7P,8P,9P See parameter 10.01. 15
DI1 F, DI2 R See parameter 10.01. 17
10.03 REF DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes the direction.
FORWARD Fixed to forward 1
REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2
REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 3
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.04 of parameter 10.01.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value: -
+255.255.31 / C.- - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
32768 … C.32767 effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.05 of parameter 10.02.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on -
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference.
32768 … C.32767
10.06 JOG SPEED SELECT Defines the signal that activates jogging function. The operation of the jogging
is explained in the chapter Program features.
NOT SEL Not selected.
DI3 Digital input DI3. 0 = Jogging is inactive. 1 = Jogging is active.
DI4 See DI3.
DI5 See DI3.
DI6 See DI3.
DI7 See DI3.
DI8 See DI3.
DI9 See DI3.
DI10 See DI3.
DI11 See DI3.

102

DI12 See DI3.
10.07 NET CONTROL When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 10.01. Fieldbus
Control Word (except bit 11) is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active
control location.
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
0 Inactive
1 Active
10.08 NET REFERENCE When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 11.03. Fieldbus
reference REF1 is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
0 Inactive
1 Active
11 REFERENCE Panel reference type, external control location selection and external reference
SELECT sources and limits
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the type of the reference given from panel.
REF1 (rpm) Speed reference in rpm. (Frequency reference (Hz) if parameter 99.04 is 1
SCALAR.)
REF2 (%) %-reference. The use of REF2 vary depending on the application macro. For 2
example, if the Torque Control macro is selected, REF2 is the torque
reference.
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between
the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1
EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.01 and 7
11.03.
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.02 and 8
11.06.
COMM.CW Fieldbus Control Word, bit 11. 9

103

PARAM 11.09 Source selected by parameter 11.09. 16
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1
KEYPAD Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value. 1
AI1 Analogue input AI1. 2
Note: If the signal is bipolar (±10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. (The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.)
AI1/JOYST Unipolar analogue input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs the 5
motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction, the maximum input at
the maximum reference in the forward direction.
Note: Parameter 10.03 must have the value REQUEST.
WARNING! Minimum reference for joystick must be higher than 0.5 V.
Set parameter 13.01 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0.5 V and
analogue signal loss detection parameter 30.01 to FAULT. The drive
will stop in case the control signal is lost.
Speed Reference (REF1)
11.05
11.04
0
AI1
-11.04
-11.05
2 6 10
Par. 13.01 = 2 V, Par 13.02 = 10 V
Note: If the signal is bipolar (±10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1/JOYST ignores the negative signal range.
AI2/JOYST See AI1/JOYST. 6
AI1+AI3 Summation of analogue input AI1 and AI3 7
AI2+AI3 Summation of analogue input AI2 and AI3 8
AI1-AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI1 and AI3 9
AI2-AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI2 and AI3 10
AI1*AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI1 and AI3 11
AI2*AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI2 and AI3 12
MIN(AI1,AI3) Minimum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 13
MIN(AI2,AI3) Minimum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 14
MAX(AI1,AI3) Maximum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 15
MAX(AI2,AI3) Maximum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 16

104

DI3U,4D(R) Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. 17
Stop command or power switch off resets the reference to zero. Parameter
22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
DI3U,4D Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. The 18
program stores the active speed reference (not reset by a stop command or
power switch-off). Parameter 22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
DI5U,6D See DI3U,4D. 19
COMM. REF Fieldbus reference REF1 20
COM.REF1+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 21
COM.REF1*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 22
FAST COMM As with the selection COMM. REF, except the following differences: 23
- shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core
motor control program (6 ms -> 2 ms)
- the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined by parameters
10.01 or 10.02, nor with the control panel
- parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS is not effective
Note: If any of the following selections is true, the selection is not effective.
Instead, the operation is according to COMM. REF.
- parameter 99.02 is PID
- parameter 99.04 is SCALAR
- parameter 40.14 has value PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT
COM.REF1+AI5 See selection COM.REF1+AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). 24
COM.REF1*AI5 See selection COM.REF1*AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). 25
AI5 Analogue input AI5 26
AI5+AI6 Summation of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 30
AI5-AI6 Subtraction of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 31
AI5*AI6 Multiplication of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 32
MIN(AI5,AI6) Lower of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 33
MAX(AI5,AI6) Higher of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 34
DI11U,12D(R) See DI3U,4D(R). 35
DI11U,12D See DI3U,4D. 36

105

AI1 BIPOLAR Bipolar analogue input AI1 (-10 … 10 V). The figure below illustrates the use of 38
the input as the speed reference.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST
-scaled
maxREF1
-maxAI1 -minAI1 minAI1 maxAI1
Analogue Input Signal
minAI1 = 13.01 MINIMUM AI1

maxAI1 = 13.02 MAXIMUM AI1
scaled maxREF1 = 13.03 SCALE AI1 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM
minREF1 = 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 18000 rpm Setting range in rpm. (Hz if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) 1 … 18000
Example: Analogue input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of
parameter 11.03 is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond
the AI minimum and maximum settings as follows:
EXT REF1 Range
2’
1 parameter 13.01
2 parameter 13.02
1’ parameter 11.04
2’ parameter 11.05
1’
AI1 Range
1 2
Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of
an analogue signal. See the chapter Fieldbus control for more information.
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal.

106

0 … 18000 rpm Setting range. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) 1 … 18000
See parameter 11.04.
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. REF2 is a
- speed reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed if parameter
99.02 = FACTORY, HAND/AUTO or SEQ CTRL.
- torque reference in percent of the motor nominal torque if parameter 99.02 =
TORQUE.
- process reference in percent of the maximum process quantity if parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
- frequency reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Frequency if
parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
KEYPAD See parameter 11.03. 1
AI1 See parameter 11.03. 2
Note: If the signal is bipolar (±10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.
AI1/JOYST See parameter 11.03. 5
AI1+AI3 See parameter 11.03. 7
AI1-AI3 See parameter 11.03. 9
AI1*AI3 See parameter 11.03. 11
MIN(AI1,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 13
MAX(AI1,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 15
DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 11.03. 17
DI3U,4D See parameter 11.03. 18
COMM. REF See parameter 11.03. 20
COM.REF2+AI1 See parameter 11.03. 21
COM.REF2*AI1 See parameter 11.03. 22
FAST COMM See parameter 11.03. 23
COM.REF2+AI5 See parameter 11.03. 24
COM.REF2*AI5 See parameter 11.03. 25

107

DI11U,12D(R) See parameter 11.03. 35
AI1 BIPOLAR See parameter 11.03. 38
11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 100% Setting range in percent. Correspondence to the source signal limits: 0 … 10000
- Source is an analogue input: See example for parameter 11.04.
- Source is a serial link: See the chapter Fieldbus control.
11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 600% Setting range. Correspondence to the source signal limits: 0 … 6000
- Source is an analogue input: See parameter 11.04.
- Source is a serial link: See the chapter Fieldbus control.
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.09 of parameter 11.02.
32768 … C.32767
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.10 of parameter 11.03.
32768 … C.32767
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.11 of parameter 11.06.
32768 … C.32767
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the
drive speed reference.
Note: If parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, only speeds 1 to 5 and speed 15 are in
use.
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal.
NOT SEL No constant speeds in use 1
DI1(SPEED1) Speed defined by parameter 12.02 is activated through digital input DI1. 2
1 = active, 0 = inactive.

108

DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital input DI1 and DI2. 8
DI1 DI2 Constant speed in use

0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02

DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital input DI1, DI2 and DI3. 11
DI1 DI2 DI3 Constant speed in use

0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02
DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 12

DI4,5,6 See selection DI1,2,3. 13
DI3,4,5,6 Constant speed selection through digital input DI3, 4, 5 and 6 14
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 Constant speed in use

0 0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02

109

DI12 (SPEED6) Speed defined by parameter 12.07 is activated through digital input DI12. 20
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 Defines speed 1. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 … 18000 rpm Setting range 0 … 18000
12.11 CONST SPEED 10 Defines speed 10. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
information.
information.
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 1 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
-18000 … 18000 rpm Setting range. -18000 …
18000
information.
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 2 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
-18000 … 18000 rpm Setting range -18000 …
18000

110

information.
Note: If the jogging function is in use, the parameter defines the jogging speed.
The sign is not taken into account. See the chapter Program features.
12.16 CONST SPEED 15 Defines speed 15 or Fault speed. The program considers the sign when used
as a fault speed by parameter 30.01 and 30.02.
-18000 … 18000 rpm Setting range -18000 …
18000
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS The analogue input signal processing
13.01 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04.
0V Zero volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal. 1
2V Two volts 2
TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. 3
TUNE The value measurement triggering. Procedure: 4
- Connect the minimum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 … 10 V.
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.05.
10 V Ten volts (DC). 1
TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. 2
TUNE Triggering of the tuning function. Procedure: 3
- Connect the maximum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 … 10 V.

111

13.03 SCALE AI1 Scales analogue input AI1.
Example: The effect on speed reference REF1 when:
- REF1 source selection (Parameter 11.03) = AI1+AI3
- REF1 maximum value setting (Parameter 11.05) = 1500 rpm
- Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value)
- Actual AI3 value = 12 mA (60% of the full scale value)
- AI1 scaling = 100%, AI3 scaling = 10%
AI1 AI3 AI1 + AI3
10 V 1500 rpm 20 mA 150 rpm 1500 rpm
60% 90 rpm
690 rpm
40% 600 rpm
0V 0 mA 0 rpm
0 … 1000% Scaling range 0 … 32767

13.04 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1.
%
Unfiltered Signal O = I · (1 - e-t/T)
100
I = filter input (step)
63 O = filter output
Filtered Signal
t = time
T = filter time constant
t
T
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms
time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant 0 … 1000
13.05 INVERT AI1 Activates/deactivates the inversion of analogue input AI1.
NO No inversion 0
YES Inversion active. The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds 65535
to the minimum reference and vice versa.
13.06 MINIMUM AI2 See parameter 13.01.
0 mA See parameter 13.01. 1
TUNED VALUE See parameter 13.01. 3
TUNE See parameter 13.01. 4
13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 See parameter 13.02.

112

13.08 SCALE AI2 See parameter 13.03.
0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
13.09 FILTER AI2 See parameter 13.04.
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000
13.10 INVERT AI2 See parameter 13.05.
NO See parameter 13.05. 0
YES See parameter 13.05. 65535
0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000

0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000

113

0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through the relay outputs, and the relay operating
delays
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1. The relay energises
when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED Not used. 1
READY Ready to function: Run Enable signal on, no fault. 2
RUNNING Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active fault. 3
FAULT Fault 4
FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energised on a fault trip. 5
FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See parameter group 31 6
AUTOMATIC RESET.
STALL WARN Warning by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. 7
STALL FLT Fault trip by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. 8
MOT TEMP WRN Warning trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 9
30.04.
MOT TEMP FLT Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04. 10
ACS TEMP WRN Warning by the drive temperature supervision function: 115 °C (239 °F). 11
ACS TEMP FLT Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function: 125 °C (257 °F). 12
FAULT/WARN Fault or warning active 13
WARNING Warning active 14
REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 15
EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 16
REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 17
CONST SPEED A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. 18
DC OVERVOLT The intermediate circuit DC voltage has exceeded the overvoltage limit. 19
DC UNDERVOLT The intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit. 20
SPEED 1 LIM Motor speed at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.01 and 32.02. 21

114

SPEED 2 LIM Motor speed at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.03 and 32.04. 22
CURRENT LIM Motor current at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.05 and 32.06. 23
REF 1 LIM External reference REF1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.11 and 24
32.12.
REF 2 LIM External reference REF2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.13 and 25
32.14.
TORQUE 1 LIM Motor torque at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.07 and 32.08. 26
TORQUE 2 LIM Motor torque at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.09 and 32.10. 27
STARTED The drive has received the start command. 28
LOSS OF REF The drive has no reference. 29
AT SPEED The actual value has reached the reference value. In speed control, the speed 30
error is less or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed.
ACT 1 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 31
32.15 and 32.16.
ACT 2 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32
32.17 and 32.18.
COMM.REF3(13) The relay is controlled by fieldbus reference REF3. See the chapter Fieldbus 33
control.
BRAKE CTRL On/Off control of a mechanical brake. See parameter group 42 BRAKE 35
CONTROL.
BC SHORT CIR Drive tripps on a brake chopper fault. See the chapter Fault tracing. 36
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO2. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED See parameter 14.01. 1
READY See parameter 14.01. 2
RUNNING See parameter 14.01. 3
FAULT See parameter 14.01. 4
FAULT(-1) See parameter 14.01. 5
FAULT(RST) See parameter 14.01. 6
STALL WARN See parameter 14.01. 7
STALL FLT See parameter 14.01. 8
MOT TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 9
MOT TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 10
ACS TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 11
ACS TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 12
FAULT/WARN See parameter 14.01. 13
WARNING See parameter 14.01. 14
REVERSED See parameter 14.01. 15
EXT CTRL See parameter 14.01. 16
REF 2 SEL See parameter 14.01. 17
CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. 18
DC OVERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 19
DC UNDERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 20

115

SPEED 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 21
CURRENT LIM See parameter 14.01. 23
REF 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 24
TORQUE 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 26
STARTED See parameter 14.01. 28
LOSS OF REF See parameter 14.01. 29
AT SPEED See parameter 14.01. 30
ACT 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 31
ACT 2 LIM See parameter 14.01. 32
COMM. REF3(14) See parameter 14.01. 33
BRAKE CTRL See parameter 14.01. 35
BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14.01. 36
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO3. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
FAULT(-1) See parameter 14.01. 5
FAULT(RST) See parameter 14.01. 6
STALL WARN See parameter 14.01. 7
STALL FLT See parameter 14.01. 8
MOT TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 9
MOT TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 10
ACS TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 11
ACS TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 12
FAULT/WARN See parameter 14.01. 13
REVERSED See parameter 14.01. 15
EXT CTRL See parameter 14.01. 16
CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. 18
DC OVERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 19
DC UNDERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 20
CURRENT LIM See parameter 14.01. 23

116

STARTED See parameter 14.01. 28
LOSS OF REF See parameter 14.01. 29
MAGN READY The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque (nominal 31
magnetising of the motor has been reached).
USER 2 SEL User Macro 2 is in use. 32
COMM. REF3(15) See parameter 14.01. 33
BRAKE CTRL See parameter 14.01. 35
BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14.01. 36
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for the relay RO1.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Setting range. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) and release (off) 0 … 36000
delays for relay output RO1.
1
Drive status
0
1
RO1 status
0
time
tOn tOff tOn tOff
tOn 14.04
tOff 14.05
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO1.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.06 RO2 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.08 RO3 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO3.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay of relay output RO3.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O
extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).

117

extension module no. 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05).

118

14.16 RO PTR1 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.16 of parameter 14.01.
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
15 ANALOGUE Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs.
OUTPUTS Output signal processing.
15.01 ANALOGUE Connects a drive signal to analogue output AO1.

OUTPUT1
NOT USED Not in use 1

119

P SPEED Value of a user-defined process quantity derived from the motor speed. See 2
parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE for scaling and unit selection (%;
m/s; rpm). The updating interval is 100 ms.
SPEED Motor speed. 20 mA = motor nominal speed. The updating interval is 24 ms. 3
FREQUENCY Output frequency. 20 mA = motor nominal frequency. The updating interval is 4
24 ms.
CURRENT Output current. 20 mA = motor nominal current. The updating interval is 24 ms. 5
TORQUE Motor torque. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 6
24 ms.
POWER Motor power. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 7
100 ms.
DC BUS VOLT DC bus voltage. 20 mA = 100% of the reference value. The reference value is 8
540 VDC. ( = 1.35 · 400 V) for 380 ... 415 VAC supply voltage rating and
675 VDC ( = 1.35 · 500 V) for 380 ... 500 VAC supply. The updating interval is
24 ms.
OUTPUT VOLT Motor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms. 9
APPL OUTPUT The reference which is given as an output from the application. For example, if 10
the PID Control macro is in use, this is the output of the process PID controller.
The updating interval is 24 ms.
REFERENCE Active reference that the drive is currently following. 20 mA = 100 % of the 11
active reference. The updating interval is 24 ms.
CONTROL DEV The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PID 12
controller. 0/4 mA = -100%, 10/12 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%. The updating
interval is 24 ms.
ACTUAL 1 Value of variable ACT1 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of 13
parameter 40.10. The updating interval is 24 ms.
ACTUAL 2 Value of variable ACT2 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of 14
parameter 40.12. The updating interval is 24 ms.
COMM.REF4 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See Fieldbus control. 15
M1 TEMP MEAS Analogue output is a current source in a motor temperature measuring circuit. 16
Depending on the sensor type, the output is 9.1 mA (Pt 100) or 1.6 mA (PTC).
For more information, see parameter 35.01.
Note: The settings of parameters 15.02 to 15.05 are not effective.
PARAM 15.11 Source selected by 15.11 17
15.02 INVERT AO1 Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal. The analogue signal is at the minimum
level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa.
NO Inversion off 0
YES Inversion on 65535
15.03 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value of the analogue output signal AO1.
0 mA Zero mA 1
4 mA Four mA 2
15.04 FILTER AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1.

120

0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant 0 … 1000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered
with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot
be changed by any parameters.
15.05 SCALE AO1 Scales the analogue output AO1 signal.
10 … 1000% Scaling factor. If the value is 100%, the reference value of the drive signal 100 …
corresponds to 20 mA. 10000
Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum
current at maximum load 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A needs to be read as 0
to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1. The required settings are:
1. AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15.01.
2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA by parameter 15.03.
3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA
analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor (k) to 150%. The value is
defined as follows: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the
motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see parameter 15.01). To make the measured
maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equal to the
reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal. Equation:
k · 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150%
15.06 ANALOGUE See parameter 15.01.
OUTPUT2
P SPEED See parameter 15.01. 2
SPEED See parameter 15.01. 3
FREQUENCY See parameter 15.01. 4
CURRENT See parameter 15.01. 5
TORQUE See parameter 15.01. 6
POWER See parameter 15.01. 7
DC BUS VOLT See parameter 15.01. 8
OUTPUT VOLT See parameter 15.01. 9
APPL OUTPUT See parameter 15.01. 10
REFERENCE See parameter 15.01. 11
CONTROL DEV See parameter 15.01. 12
ACTUAL 1 See parameter 15.01. 13
COMM.REF5 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF5. See Fieldbus control. 15
PARAM 15.12 Source selected by 15.12 16
15.07 INVERT AO2 See parameter 15.02.

121

15.08 MINIMUM AO2 See parameter 15.03.
15.09 FILTER AO2 See parameter 15.04.
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 15.04. 0 … 1000
15.10 SCALE AO2 See parameter 15.05.
10 … 1000% See parameter 15.05. 100 …
10000
15.11 AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.11 of parameter 15.01. 1000=1 mA
32768 … C.32767
15.12 AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.12 of parameter 15.06. 1000 =
1 mA
32768 … C.32767
16 SYSTEM CTRL Run Enable, parameter lock etc.
INPUTS
16.01 RUN ENABLE Sets the Run Enable signal on, or selects a source for the external Run Enable
signal. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start or stops if it is
running. The stop mode is set by parameter 21.07.
YES Run Enable signal is on. 1
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run Enable. 2
COMM.CW External signal required through the Fieldbus Control Word (bit 3). 8
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing.
OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 0
LOCKED Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock 65535
can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 16.03.
16.03 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).

122

0 … 30000 Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically. 0 … 30000
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a
fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
NOT SEL Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key). 1
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 or by control panel: 2
- If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI1.
- If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control
panel.
COMM.CW Reset through the fieldbus Control Word (bit 7), or by the RESET key of the 8
control panel.
ON STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input, or by the 9
RESET key of the control panel.
16.05 USER MACRO IO Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See parameter
CHG 99.02. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the
change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Macro by parameter 99.02 after changing any
parameter settings, or reperforming the motor identification. The last settings
saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting
once made remains despite the User Macro change.
Note: Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3. See
parameter 14.03 for more information.
NOT SEL User macro change is not possible through a digital input. 1
DI1 Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge 2
of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use.

123

16.06 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel).
WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not
needed for stopping the drive!
OFF Local control allowed. 0

ON Local control disabled. 65535
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically
when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus
connection.
DONE Saving completed 0
SAVE.. Saving in progress 1
16.08 RUN ENA PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 16.08 of parameter 16.01
32768 … C.32767
16.09 CTRL BOARD Defines the source of the control board power supply.
SUPPLY Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL,
the drive trips to a fault at power switch off.
INTERNAL 24V Internal (default).
EXTERNAL 24V External. The control board is powered from an external supply.
20 LIMITS Drive operation limits.
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed minimum speed. The limit cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
-18000 / (no. of pole Minimum speed limit. 1 = 1 rpm
pairs) … Par. 20.02 Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction.
rpm
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed maximum speed. The value cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
Par. 20.01 … 18000 / Maximum speed limit 1 = 1 rpm
(no. of pole pairs) rpm
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT Defines the allowed maximum motor current.

0.0 … x.x A Current limit 0 … 100·x.x
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1 Defines the maximum torque limit 1 for the drive.
0.0 … 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. 0 … 60000

124

20.05 OVERVOLTAGE Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
CTRL Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage
control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the
overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller
must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation.
OFF Overvoltage control deactivated. 0
ON Overvoltage control activated. 65535
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
CTRL If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller
will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above
the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause
regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing
an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss
ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or
a fan.
OFF Undervoltage control deactivated. 0
ON Undervoltage control activated. 65535
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
-300.00 … 50 Hz Minimum frequency limit. -30000 …
Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction. 5000
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR
-50 … 300.00 Hz Maximum frequency limit -5000 …
30000
20.11 P MOTORING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.
0 … 600% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power 0 … 60000
20.12 P GENERATING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter.
-600 … 0% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power -60000 … 0
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive.
MIN LIM1 Value of parameter 20.15. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.15. 1: Value of parameter 20.16. 2

125

AI1 Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a 14
torque limit.
AI2 See selection AI1. 15
PARAM 20.18 Limit given by 20.18 19
NEG MAX TORQ Inverted maximum torque limit defined by parameter 20.14 20
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive.
MAX LIM1 Value of parameter 20.04. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.04. 1: Value of parameter 20.17. 2
AI1 Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a 14
torque limit.
PARAM 20.19 Limit given by 20.19 19
20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 Defines the minimum torque limit 1 for the drive.
-600.0 … 0.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque -60000 … 0
20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 Defines the minimum torque limit 2 for the drive.
-600.0 … 0.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque -60000 … 0
20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 Defines the maximum torque limit 2 for the drive.
0.0 … 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque 0 … 60000
20.18 TORQ MIN PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.18 of parameter 20.13
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. 100 = 1%
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
20.19 TORQ MAX PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.19 of parameter 20.14
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on 100 = 1%
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference. FbEq for the torque value is 100 = 1%.
32768 … C.32767

126

20.20 MIN AI SCALE Defines how an analogue signal (mA or V) is converted to a torque minimum or
maximum limit (%). The figure below illustrate the converting, when analogue
input AI1 has been set the source for a torque limit by parameter 20.13 or
20.14.
Torque limit
20.21 13.01 Minimum setting for AI1

13.02 Maximum setting for AI1
20.20 Minimum torque
20.21 Maximum torque
20.20
13.01 13.02
Analogue signal
0.0 … 600.0% %-value that correspond to the minimum setting of the analogue input
20.21 MAX AI SCALE See parameter 20.20.
0.0 … 600.0% %-value that correspond to the maximum setting of the analogue input
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor.
21.01 START FUNCTION Selects the motor starting method.
AUTO Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the 1
flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart
function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the
motor flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as
well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under
all conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, no flying start or automatic restart is
possible by default. The flying start feature needs to be activated separately by
parameter 21.08.
DC MAGN DC magnetising should be selected if a high break-away torque is required. 2
The drive pre-magnetises the motor before the start. The pre-magnetising time
is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the
motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
CNST DC MAGN Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if 3
constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be
simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set
long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has
passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. Ensure
always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that
the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetisation and torque.

127

21.02 CONST MAGN TIME Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode. See
parameter 21.01. After the start command, the drive automatically pre-
magnetises the motor the set time.
30.0 … 10000.0 ms Magnetising time. To ensure full magnetising, set this value to the same value 30 … 10000
as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb
value given in the table below:
Motor Rated Power Constant Magnetising Time

< 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms
21.03 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop function.

COAST Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop. 1
WARNING! If the mechanical brake control function is on, the
application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST
(see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL).
RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL. 2
21.04 DC HOLD Activates/deactivates the DC hold function. DC Hold is not possible if
When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter
21.05, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC
into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.06. When the reference
speed exceeds parameter 21.05, normal drive operation continues.
SPEEDmotor
DC Hold
Ref. t
DC HOLD SPEED
t
Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off.
Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In
applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated
motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot
prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
21.05 DC HOLD SPEED Defines the DC Hold speed. See parameter 21.04.
0 … 3000 rpm Speed in rpm 0 … 3000
21.06 DC HOLD CURR Defines the DC hold current. See parameter 21.04.
0 … 100% Current in percent of the motor nominal current 0 … 100

128

21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC Selects the stop mode applied when the Run Enable signal is switched off. The
Run Enable signal is put into use by parameter 16.01.
Note: The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting (parameter 21.03)
when the Run Enable signal is switched off.
WARNING! The drive will restart after the Run Enable signal restores
(if the start signal is on).
RAMP STOP The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in 1
group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
COAST STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply 2
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed.
WARNING! If the brake control function is on, the application program
uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST STOP (see parameter
group 42 BRAKE CONTROL).
OFF2 STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply 3
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed. The
drive will restart only when the Run Enable signal is on and the start signal is
switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
OFF3 STOP The application program stops the drive along the ramp defined by parameter 4
22.07. The drive will restart only when the Run Enable is on and the start signal
is switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
21.08 SCALAR FLY START Activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode. See parameters
21.01 and 99.04.
OFF Inactive. 0
ON Active. 65535
21.09 START INTRL FUNC Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive
operation.
OFF2 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by coasting. 1
Drive stopped: 1 = Start allowed. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF2 STOP: Input is back to 1 and the drive receives rising edge
of the Start signal.
OFF3 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by ramp. The ramp time is 2
defined by parameter 22.07 EM STOP RAMP.
Drive stopped: 1 = Normal start. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF3 STOP: Start Interlock input = 1 and the drive receives rising
edge of the Start signal.

129

21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in
applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay
the drive knows accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay

Speed Speed
Speed controller Speed controller remains live.
switched off: Motor Motor is decelerated to true 0
coasts to stop. speed.
Zero Speed Zero Speed
Time Delay Time

No Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the
motor actual speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed
controller is switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor
coasts to standstill.
With Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the
actual motor speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero
speed delay function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed
controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetised and the drive is
ready for a quick restart.
0.0 … 60.0 s Delay time
22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times.
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL Selects the active acceleration/deceleration time pair.
ACC/DEC 1 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See parameters 22.02 1
and 22.03.
ACC/DEC 2 Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See parameters 22.04 2
and 22.05.
DI1 Acceleration/deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1. 0 = 3
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2
and deceleration time 2 are in use.
PAR 22.08&09 Acceleration and deceleration times given by parameters 22.08 and 22.09 15

130

22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 Defines the acceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from zero to the maximum speed.
- If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the acceleration rate.
- If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.
0.00 … 1800.00 s Acceleration time 0 … 18000
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from the maximum (see parameter 20.02) to zero.
- If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor
speed will follow the deceleration rate.
- If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt
about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage
control is on (parameter 20.05).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the
drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a brake
chopper and a brake resistor.
0.00 … 1800.00 s Deceleration time 0 … 18000
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 See parameter 22.02.
0.00 … 1800.00 s See parameter 22.02. 0 … 18000
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 See parameter 22.03.
0.00 … 1800.00 s See parameter 22.03. 0 … 18000
22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp.
SHPE
0.00 … 1000.00 s 0.00 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for 0 … 100000
slow ramps.
0.01 … 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors
carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
A rule of thumb Speed Linear ramp: Par. 20.06 = 0 s

A suitable relation between the Max
ramp shape time and the
acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
S-curve ramp:
Par. 20.06 > 0 s
time
Par. 22.02 Par. 22.06

131

22.07 EM STOP RAMP Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if
TIME - the drive receives an emergency stop command or
- the Run Enable signal is switched off and the Run Enable function has value
OFF3 (see parameter 21.07).
The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an
Emergency Stop module (optional). Consult the local ABB representative for
more information on the optional module and the related settings of the
Standard Application Program.
0.00 … 2000.00 s Deceleration time 0 … 200000
22.08 ACC PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on 100 = 1 s
32768 … C.32767
22.09 DEC PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on 100 = 1 s
32768 … C.32767
23 SPEED CTRL Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if parameter 99.04 =
SCALAR.
23.01 GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed
oscillation.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Error Value
Controller Output
Controller e = Error value
output = Kp · e
t
0.0 … 250.0 Gain 0 … 25000

132

23.02 INTEGRATION TIME Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time
defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is
constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value
is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable.
%
Controller Output
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
Kp · e TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp · e e = Error value
t
TI
0.01 … 999.97 s Integration time 10 …
999970
23.03 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts
the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time,
the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise
as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances.
Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is
used.
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms
∆e = Error value change between
% two samples
Controller Output
∆e
Kp · TD ·
Ts Kp · e
Error Value
Kp · e e = Error value
t
TI
0.0 … 9999.8 ms Derivation time value. 1 = 1 ms

133

23.04 ACC Defines the derivation time for acceleration compensation. In order to
COMPENSATION compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added
to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is
described for parameter 23.03.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100%
of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven
machine. (The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically, see
parameter 23.06.)
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is
accelerated along a ramp.
No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation
% % Speed reference
Actual speed
t t
0.00 … 999.98 s Derivation time 0 … 9999
23.05 SLIP GAIN Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full
slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is
100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of
the full slip compensation.
Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of
the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer
measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static
speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip
gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.
0.0 … 400.0% Slip gain value. 0 … 400
23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions:
- Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.
- Change the autotuning parameter 23.06 to YES.
Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.
NO No autotuning. 0
YES Activates the speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to NO. 65535
24 TORQUE CTRL Torque control variables.

Visible only if parameter 99.02 = T CNTRL and parameter 99.04 = DTC.
24.01 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time.
0.00 … 120.00 s Time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque. 0 … 12000
24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time.
0.00 … 120.00 s Time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero. 0 … 12000

134

25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate.
25.01 CRIT SPEED Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function.
SELECT Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to
1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges:
- activate the critical speeds function,
- set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
Motor speed
(rpm) 1 Par. 25.02 = 540 rpm
1560 2 Par. 25.03 = 690 rpm
3 Par. 25.04 = 1380 rpm
1380
4 Par. 25.05 = 1590 rpm
690
540 Drive speed reference
1 2 3 4 (rpm)
Note: If parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL, the critical speeds are not in use.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active. 65535
25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW Defines the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
0 … 18000 rpm Minimum limit. The value cannot be above the maximum (parameter 25.03). 0 … 18000
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz.
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH Defines the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
0 … 18000 rpm Maximum limit. The value cannot be below the minimum (parameter 25.02). 0 … 18000
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz.
25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW See parameter 25.02.
0 … 18000 rpm See parameter 25.02. 0 … 18000
25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH See parameter 25.03.
25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW See parameter 25.02.
25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH See parameter 25.03.
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates/deactivates the flux optimisation function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
26.02 FLUX BRAKING Activates/deactivates the flux braking function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535

135

26.03 IR-COMPENSATION Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The
function is useful in applications with high break-away torque, but no DTC
motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR
compensation.
Note: The function can be used only if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.
U /UN
(%)
Relative output voltage. IR
compensation set to 15%.
100%
Relative output voltage. No IR

15%
compensation.
f (Hz)
Field weakening point
0 … 30% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage 0 … 3000
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern
in the field weakening area of the frequency range (above 50/60 Hz).
OFF The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. Optimal selection in most 0
applications: Minimal losses at constant load. Maximal instantaneous torque is
not available in the field weakening range of the speed.
ON Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point (typically 65535
50 or 60 Hz) and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. Optimal
selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the
field weakening range of the speed. The losses at constant operation are
higher than with the selection NO.
26.06 FLUX REF PTR Selects the source for the flux reference, or sets the flux reference value.
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference. FbEq for the flux value is 100 = 1%. The range of the flux is 25
32768 … C.32767 … 140%.
27 BRAKE CHOPPER Control of the brake chopper.
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER Activates the brake chopper control.
CTL
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active. Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the 65535
overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 20.05).
27.02 BR OVERLOAD Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor. The user-adjustable
FUNC variables are parameters 27.03, 27.04 and 27.05.
NO Inactive 0
WARNING Active. If the drive detects an overload, it generates a warning. 1
FAULT Active. If the drive detects an overload, it trips on a fault. 2
27.03 BR RESISTANCE Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used in the
overload protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.00 … 100.00 ohm Resistance value 0 … 100

136

27.04 BR THERM TCONST Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in
the overload protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.000 … 10000.000 s Time constant.
27.05 MAX CONT BR Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor
POWER temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload
protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.00 …10000 kW Power
27.06 BC CTRL MODE Selects the control mode of the braking chopper.
AS GENERATOR Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit, 1
the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive.
The selection prevents the operation in case the intermediate circuit DC
voltage rises due to abnormally high supply voltage level. Long time supply
voltage rise would damage the chopper.
COMMON DC Chopper operation is allowed always when the DC voltage exceeds the 2
braking limit. The selection is to be used in applications where several
inverters are connected to the same intermediate circuit (DC bus).
WARNING! Excessive supply voltage will raise the intermediate
circuit voltage above the operation limit of the chopper. If the voltage
remains abnormally high for a long period, the braking chopper will be
overloaded and damaged.
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Programmable protection functions
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set
minimum limit.
Note: The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or
above (see parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS).
FAULT The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to stop. 1
NO Inactive 2
CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and sets the speed to 3
the value defined by parameter 12.16.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and freezes the speed 4
to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
30.02 PANEL LOSS Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break.
FAULT Drive trips on a fault and the motor stops as defined by parameter 21.03. 1
CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by 2
parameter 12.16.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
panel communication break.

137

LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was 3
operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous
10 seconds.
panel communication break.
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT Selects an interface for an external fault signal.

NOT SEL Inactive 1
DI1 External fault indication is given through digital input DI1. 0: Fault trip. Motor 2
coasts to stop. 1: No external fault.
30.04 MOTOR THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by
PROT the function defined by Parameter 30.05.
Note: The parameter has no effect if the motor temperature measurement has
been activated by parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
FAULT The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning 1
level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the
temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value).
WARNING The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning 2
level (95% of the allowed maximum value).
NO Inactive 3
30.05 MOT THERM P Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is
MODE detected, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 30.04.
DTC The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following 1
assumptions are used in the calculation:
- The motor is at ambient temperature (30 °C) when the power is switched on.
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load
curve and decreases if it operates below the curve.
- The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard self-
ventilated squirrel-cage motor.
It is possible to finetune the model by parameter 30.07.
Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (parameter 99.06 is
higher than 800 A).
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool
properly due to dust and dirt.

138

USER MODE The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and the 2
following basic assumptions:
- The motor is at ambient temperature (30 °C) when power is switched on.
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor
load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve.
The user-defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant
(parameter 30.06) and the motor load curve (parameters 30.07, 30.08 and
30.09). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs
from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor.
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool
properly due to dust and dirt.

139

THERMISTOR Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor 3
thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to
digital input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows:
DI6 Status (Thermistor resistance) Temperature

1 (0 … 1.5 kohm) Normal
0 (4 kohm or higher) Overtemperature
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor

thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation
between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation
entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O
terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay
must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use.
Change these settings before selecting THERMISTOR. In other
words, ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other
parameter.
The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor
end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not
possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
Alternative 1
Thermistor
relay
RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
T
Motor
Alternative 2 RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
T 10 nF
Motor

140

30.06 MOTOR THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the
TIME selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05).
Motor
Load
100%
Temperature
t
100%
63%
t
Motor thermal time constant
256.0 … 9999.8 s Time constant 256 … 9999
30.07 MOTOR LOAD Defines the load curve together by parameters 30.08 and 30.09. The load
CURVE curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER
MODE of parameter 30.05).
I/IN I = Motor current

(%) IN = Nominal motor current
150
30.07
100
50
30.08
30.09 Drive output frequency
50.0 … 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current. 50 … 150
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.09.
25.0 … 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor 25 … 150
current
30.09 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.08.
1.0 … 300.0 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 100 …
30000
30.10 STALL FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes
up if:
- the motor torque is at the internal stall torque limit (not user-adjustable)
- the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.11 and
- the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.12.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault. 1
WARNING The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the time set 2
by parameter 30.12.

141

NO Protection is inactive. 3
30.11 STALL FREQ HI Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
0.5 … 50.0 Hz Stall frequency 50 … 5000
30.12 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
10.00 … 400.00 s Stall time 10 … 400
30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if:
- the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30.15,
- output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and
- the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.14.
WARNING The drive generates a warning. 2
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
0 … 600 s Underload time 0 … 600
30.15 UNDERLOAD Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
CURVE
TM/TN
TM = Motor torque
(%) TN= Nominal motor torque
100 ƒN = Nominal motor frequency
80 3
70%
60 2
50%
40 1 5
30%
20
4
0
ƒN 2.4 * ƒN
1…5 Number of the load curve 1…5

30.16 MOTOR PHASE Activates the motor phase loss supervision function.
LOSS
NO Inactive 0
FAULT Active. The drive trips on a fault. 65535
30.17 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the
motor cable.
30.18 COMM FLT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break, i.e. when the
drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference
Data Set. The time delays are given by parameters 30.19 and 30.21.
FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on a fault and stops the motor as defined by 1
parameter 21.03.

142

CONST SP 15 Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the 3
value defined by parameter 12.16.
communication break.
LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to 4
the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
communication break.
30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference Dataset supervision. See
parameter 30.18.
0.1 … 60.0 s Time delay 10 … 6000
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue
output in a communication break. See groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 15
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and the chapter Fieldbus control. The delay for the
supervision function is given by parameter 30.21.
ZERO Relay output is de-energised. Analogue output is set to zero. 0
LAST VALUE The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. The 65535
analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss.
WARNING! After the communication recovers, the update of the relay
and the analogue outputs starts immediately without fault message
resetting.
30.21 AUX DS T-OUT Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference Dataset supervision. See
parameter 30.18. The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds
after power switch-on if the value is other than zero.
Note: The delay also applies for the function defined by parameter 30.20.
0.0 … 60.0 s Time delay. 0.0 s = The function is inactive. 0 … 6000
30.22 IO CONFIG FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in case an optional input or output channel has
been selected as a signal interface, but the communication to the appropriate
analogue or digital I/O extension module has not been set up accordingly in
parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
Example: The supervision function wakes up if parameter 16.01 is set to DI7,
but 98.03 is set to NO.
NO Inactive. 1
WARNING Active. The drive generates a warning. 2
31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic fault reset.
Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the
automatic reset function is activated for that fault type.
The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L
visible on the first row of the panel display).
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time
defined by parameter 31.02.
0…5 Number of the automatic resets 0
31.02 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 31.01.
1.0 … 180.0 s Allowed resetting time 100 …
18000

143

31.03 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an
automatic reset. See parameter 31.01.
0.0 … 3.0 s Resetting delay 0 … 300
31.04 OVERCURRENT Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage
fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link
undervoltage fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault AI SIGNAL<MIN
(analogue input signal under the allowed minimum level).
NO Inactive 0
YES Active. 65535
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long stop if the
analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature
will not cause danger.
32 SUPERVISION Supervision limits. A relay output can be used to indicate when the value is
above/below the limit.
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the speed supervision function and selects the type of
the supervision limit.
NO Supervision is not used. 1
LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit. 2
HIGH LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit. 3
ABS LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised 4
in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle.
speed/rpm
ABS LOW LIMIT
-ABS LOW LIMIT
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT Defines the speed supervision limit. See parameter 32.01.
- 18000 … 18000 rpm Value of the limit - 18000 …
18000
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION See parameter 32.01.
LOW LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 2
HIGH LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 3
ABS LOW LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 4
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT See parameter 32.01.

144

- 18000 … 18000 rpm See parameter 32.01. - 18000 …
18000
32.05 CURRENT Activates/deactivates the motor current supervision function and selects the
FUNCTION type of the supervision limit.
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor current supervision (see parameter 32.05).
0 … 1000 A Value of the limit 0 … 1000
32.07 TORQUE 1 Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the
32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.07).
-600 … 600% Value of the limit in percent of the motor nominal torque -6000 …
6000
32.09 TORQUE 2 Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.09).
-600 … 600% Value of the limit in percent of motor nominal torque -6000 …
6000
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the external reference REF1 supervision function and
selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.12 REF1 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF1 supervision (see parameter 32.11).
0 … 18000 rpm Value of the limit 0 … 18000
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates external reference REF2 supervision function and
selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.14 REF2 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF2 supervision (see parameter 32.13).
0 … 600% Value of the limit 0 … 6000
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT1 of the process
PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.

145

32.16 ACT1 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT1 supervision (see parameter 32.15).
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT2 of the process
PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT2 supervision (see parameter 32.17).
33 INFORMATION Program versions, test date
33.01 SOFTWARE Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive.
VERSION
Decoding key:
ASxxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.02 APPL SW VERSION Displays the type and the version of the application program.
Decoding key:
ASAxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Type
A = Application Program
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.03 TEST DATE Displays the test date.

Date value in format DDMMYY (day, month, year)

146

34 PROCESS - user variable and unit
VARIABLE - filtering for the actual signals speed and torque
- reset of the run time counter
34.01 SCALE Scales the selected drive variable into a desired user-defined variable, which is
stored as an actual signal 01.01. The block diagram below illustrates the use of
the parameters that define actual signal 01.01.
PARAMETER
TABLE
Select
00.00
•••
99.99
34.03 Mul.
34.01 01.01
Select
NO
Unit for actual
FPM signal 01.01
34.02
0.00 … 100000.00 Scaling factor 0 … 100000

34.02 P VAR UNIT Selects the unit for the process variable. See parameter 34.01.
NO No unit is selected. 1
rpm revolutions per minute 2
% percent 3
m/s metres per second 4
A ampere 5
V volt 6
Hz hertz 7
s second 8
h hour 9
kh kilohour 10
C celsius 11
lft labels per foot 12
mA milliampere 13
mV millivolt 14
kW kilowatt 15
W watt 16
kWh kilowatt hour 17
F fahrenheit 18
hp horsepower 19
MWh megawatt hour 20
m3h cubic metres per hour 21

147

l/s litres per second 22
bar bar 23
kPa kilopascal 24
GPM gallons per minute 25
PSI pounds per square inch 26
CFM cubic feet per minute 27
ft foot 28
MGD millions of gallons per day 29
iHg inches of mercury 30
FPM feet per minute 31
34.03 SELECT P VAR Selects the drive variable scaled into a desired process variable. See
parameter 34.01.
0 … 9999 Parameter index 0 … 9999
34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM Defines a filter time constant for the actual signal speed (01.02), the speed
value used in the speed supervision (parameters 32.01 and 32.03) and the
speed value read through an analogue output.
0 … 20000 ms Filter time constant 0 … 20000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM Defines a filter time for the actual signal torque (actual signal 01.05). Affects
also on the torque supervision (parameters 32.07 and 32.09) and the torque
read through an analogue output.
0 … 20000 ms Filter time constant 0 … 20000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
34.06 RESET RUN TIME Resets the motor running time counter (actual signal 01.43).
NO No reset. 0
YES Reset. The counter restarts from zero. 65535
35 MOT TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement. For the function description see the chapter
Program features.
35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type.
NOT IN USE The function is inactive. 1

148

1xPT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor. 2
Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor
resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over
the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analogue input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade.
2XPT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors. 3
See selection 1xPT100.
3XPT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors. 4
See selection 1xPT100.
1..3 PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to three PTC 5
sensors. Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s).
The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises
over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the
resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analogue input AI1 and converts it into ohms. The figure below shows typical
PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating
temperature.
Ohm
4000
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0 … 1.5 kohm 1330
Excessive > 4 kohm
550
100
35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C Limit in °C or ohms. °C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100) Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1..3 PTC.
35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C Limit in °C or ohms. °C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100) Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1..3 PTC.
35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL Activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type. Two motors can be protected only by using an optional analogue
extension module. Parameter 98.12 needs to be activated.
Note: If 98.12 is activated, the analogue I/O extension is also used for motor 1
temperature measurement (the standard I/O terminals are not in use).
NOT IN USE See 35.01 1
1xPT100 See 35.01 2
2XPT100 See 35.01 3
3XPT100 See 35.01 4
1..3 PTC See 35.01 5

149

35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The
alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C See 35.02 -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100)
35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function.
The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C See 35.03 -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100)
35.07 MOT MOD Selects whether measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model
COMPENSAT compensation.
NO The function is inactive. 1
YES The temperature is used in the motor model compensation. 2
Note: Selection is possible only when Pt 100 sensor(s) are used.
40 PID CONTROL - process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL)
- speed or torque reference trimming (99.02 is not PID CTRL)
- sleep function for the process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL)
For more information, see the chapter Program features.
40.01 PID GAIN Defines the gain of the process PID controller.
0.1 … 100.0 Gain value. The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the 10 … 10000
resulting speed changes when
- a 10% or 50% error value is connected to the controller
(error = process reference - process actual value).
- motor maximum speed is 1500 rpm (Parameter 20.02)
PID Gain Speed Change: Speed Change:

10% Error 50% Error
0.5 75 rpm 375 rpm
1.0 150 rpm 750 rpm
3.0 450 rpm 1500 rpm (limited)
40.02 PID INTEG TIME Defines the integration time for the process PID controller.
Error/Controller output
O I = controller input (error)
I
O = controller output
G·I G = gain
t = time
G·I Ti = integration time
time
Ti
0.02 … 320.00 s Integration time 2 … 32000
40.03 PID DERIV TIME Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative
component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive
error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME · (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which
TS = 12 ms sample time.
E = Error = Process reference - process actual value

150

0.00 … 10.00 s Derivation time. 0 … 1000
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative
component of the process PID controller.
0.04 … 10.00 s Filter time constant. 4 … 1000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
40.05 ERROR VALUE INV Inverts the error at the process PID controller input (error = process reference -
process actual value).
NO No inversion 0
YES Inversion 65535
40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL Selects the process actual value for the process PID controller: The sources
for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40.07 and
40.08.
ACT1 ACT1 1
ACT1-ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2. 2
ACT1+ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3
ACT1*ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4
ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5
MIN(A1,A2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6
MAX(A1,A2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7
sqrt(A1-A2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8
sqA1+sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 9
40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT1. See parameter 40.06.
40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT2. See parameter 40.06.

151

40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum and
maximum (40.10) settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal
received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used
by the process PID controller.
-1000 … 1000% Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range. The equation below -10000 …
instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a 10000
variable ACT1.
AI1min - 13.01
ACT1 MINIMUM = · 100%
13.02 - 13.01
AI1min The voltage value received from the measuring device when
the measured process actual value is at the desired minimum
level.
13.01 AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
13.02 AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum (40.09)
and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received
from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the
process PID controller.
-1000 … 1000% Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range. The -10000 …
equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is 10000
used as a variable ACT1.
AI1max - 13.01
ACT1 MAXIMUM = · 100%
13.02 - 13.01
AI1max The voltage value received from the measuring device when
the measured process actual value is at the desired maximum
level.
13.01 AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
13.02 AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 40.09.

-1000 … 1000% See parameter 40.09. -10000 …
10000
40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 40.10.
-1000 … 1000% See parameter 40.10. -10000 …

10000
40.13 PID INTEGRATION Activates the integration of the process PID controller.
OFF Inactive 1
ON Active 2

152

40.14 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional
trimming. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive
reference.
Example: A speed-controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs
to be considered: The speed reference is slightly adjusted (trimmed)
depending on the value of the measured line tension.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
OFF The trim function is deactivated. 1
PROPORTIONAL The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to the external %- 2
reference (REF2). See parameter 11.06.
DIRECT The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 3
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed, frequency or torque).
40.15 TRIM REF SEL Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not visible when parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
Example: AI5 as a trim reference
sclAI5
minAI5 = parameter 13.16
maxAI5 = parameter 13.17
sclAI5 = parameter 13.18
Trim reference
AI5 be used only with an optional

I/O extension module.
-sclAI5

PAR 40.16 Value of parameter 40.16 is used as the trim reference. 6
40.16 TRIM REFERENCE Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has the value PAR
40.16 selected. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 … 100.0% Trim reference - 10000 …
10000
40.17 TRIM RANGE Defines the multiplier for the PID controller output used as the trimming factor.
ADJUST Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 … 100.0% Multiplying factor - 10000 …
10000
40.18 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque
reference.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL.
SPEED TRIM Speed reference trimming 1

153

TORQUE TRIM Torque reference trimming 2
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME Defines the time constant for the filter through which the actual signals are
connected to the process PID controller.
0.04 … 10.00 s Filter time constant. 4 … 1000
%
100 I = filter input (step)
Filtered Signal t = time
t
T
40.20 SLEEP SELECTION Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
OFF Inactive 1
INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 40.21 and 2
40.23.
DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input DI1. 3
Activation: Digital input DI1 = 1. Deactivation: DI1 = 0.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 40.21 and 40.23 are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delays are effective (parameter 40.22 and 40.24).
40.21 SLEEP LEVEL Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor speed is below a set
level (40.21) longer than the sleep delay (40.22), the drive shifts to the sleeping
mode: the motor is stopped and the control panel shows the warning message
“SLEEP MODE”.
0.0 … 7200.0 rpm Sleep start level 0 … 7200
40.22 SLEEP DELAY Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 40.21. When the
motor speed falls below the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor
speed exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Sleep start delay 0 … 36000

154

40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL Defines the wake up limit for the sleep function. The drive wakes up if the
process actual value is below a set level (40.23) longer than the wake-up delay
(40.24).
0.0 … 100.0% The wake-up level in percent of the used process reference value. 0 … 10000
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See parameter 40.23. When
the process actual value falls below the wake-up level, the wake-up counter
starts. When the process actual value exceeds the wake-up level, the counter
resets.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Wake-up delay 0 …36000
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 40.25 of parameter 40.07.
32768 … C.32767
40.26 PID MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and
maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range.
Example: The process PID control is restricted to the forward rotation direction
of the motor by setting the PID minimum limit to 0% and the maximum to
100%.
-100 … 100% Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
40.27 PID MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum
and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed
range. See parameter 40.26.
-100 … 100% Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
42 BRAKE CONTROL Control of a mechanical brake. The function operates on a 100 ms time level.
For the function description, see the chapter Program features.
42.01 BRAKE CTRL Activates the brake control function.
OFF Inactive 1
ON Active 2
42.02 BRAKE Activates the external brake on/off supervision and selects the source for the
ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The use of the external on/off supervision signal is optional.
OFF Inactive 1
DI5 Active. Digital input DI5 is the signal source. DI5 = 1: The brake is open. 2
DI5 = 0: the brake is closed.
DI6 See DI5. 3
DI11 See DI5. 4
DI12 See DI5. 5
42.03 BRAKE OPEN Defines the brake open delay ( = the delay between the internal open brake
DELAY command and the release of the motor speed control). The delay counter
starts when the drive has magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to
the level required at the brake release (parameters 42.07 and 42.08).
Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake function energises the relay
output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening.
0.0 … 5.0 s Delay time. Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the 0 … 500
brake specified the brake manufacturer.

155

42.04 BRAKE CLOSE Defines the brake close delay. The delay counter starts when the motor actual
DELAY speed has fallen below the set level (parameter 42.05) after the drive has
received the stop command. Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake
control function de-energises the relay output controlling the brake and the
brake starts closing. During the delay, the brake function keeps the motor live
preventing the motor speed from falling below zero.
0.0 … 60.0 s Delay time. Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical make-up 0 … 6000
time of the brake (= operating delay when closing) specified by the brake
manufacturer.
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS Defines the brake close speed. See parameter 42.04.
SPD
0 … 1000 rpm Speed (an absolute value) 0 …100000
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the optional external brake
acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake
control function.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault: fault indication and drive stops the motor. 1
42.07 START TORQ REF Selects the source for the motor starting torque reference applied at the brake
SEL release. The value is read in percent of the motor nominal torque.
NO No source selected. This is the default value. 1
PAR 42.08 Defined by parameter 42.08. 7
MEMORY The motor torque stored at the previous brake close command. 8
42.08 START TORQ REF Defines the motor starting torque at brake release if parameter 42.07 has value
PAR 40.28.
-300 … 300% Torque value in percent of the motor nominal torque -30000 …
30000
42.09 EXTEND RUN T Defines an extended run time for the brake control function at stop. During the
delay, the motor is kept magnetised and ready for an immediate restart.

156

0.0 … 60.0 s 0.0 s = Normal stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay has passed.
0.1 … 60.0 s = Extended stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay and the extended run
time have passed. During the extended run time, a zero torque reference is
applied, and the motor is ready for a immediate restart.
Start/Stop
Motor magnetised
Actual speed
1 = brake close speed
2 = brake close delay
3 = extended run time
1
t
2 3
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD Activates a brake hold function and defines the hold delay for it. The function
stabilises the operation of the brake control application when the motor
operates near zero speed and there is no measured speed feedback available
(pulse encoder).
0.0 … 60.0 s 0.0 s = inactive.
0.1 s … 60.0 s = active. When the absolute value of the motor speed reference
falls below the brake close speed:
- The brake hold delay counter starts.
- The brake is closed according to normal stop routine of the brake control
function.
During the delay, the function keeps the brake closed despite of the speed
reference value and the value of start command. When the set delay has
passed, the normal operation resumes.
50 ENCODER MODULE Encoder connection. Visible only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is
installed and activated by parameter 98.01.
The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is
changed.
50.01 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution.
0 … 29999 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr) 0 … 29999
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated.
A -- B DIR Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 0
A --- Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel B: not 1
used.
A --- B DIR Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: 2
direction.
A --- B --- All edges of the signals are calculated. 3

157

50.03 ENCODER FAULT Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication
between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module, or
between the module and the drive. Encoder supervision function activates if
either of the following conditions is valid:
-The difference between estimated and measured speed is greater than 20%
of the motor nominal speed.
- No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time (see
parameter 50.04) and the motor torque is at the allowed maximum value.
WARNING The drive generates a warning indication. 1
FAULT The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor. 65535
50.04 ENCODER DELAY Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See parameter
50.03).
0 … 50000 ms Time delay 0 … 50000
50.05 ENCODER DDCS Defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the drive
CHANNEL program reads the signals coming from the pulse encoder interface module.
The setting is valid only if the module is connected to the drive via the DDCS
link (i.e. not to the option slot of the drive).
CHANNEL 1 Signals via channel 1 (CH1). The pulse encoder interface module must be 1
connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a
Master station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). See also parameter 70.03.
CHANNEL 2 Signals via channel 2 (CH2). Can be used in most cases. 2
50.06 SPEED FB SEL Defines the speed feedback value used in control.
INTERNAL Calculated speed estimate 0
ENCODER Actual speed measured with an encoder 65535
51 COMM MOD DATA The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus
adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.02. For
details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and the
chapter Fieldbus control.
These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is
changed.
52 STANDARD The settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not
allowed on-line.
1 … 247 Address
52.02 BAUDRATE Defines the transfer rate of the link.
600 600 bit/s 1
1200 1200 bit/s 2
2400 2400 bit/s 3
4800 4800 bit/s 4
9600 9600 bit/s 5
19200 19200 bit/s 6
52.03 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all
on-line stations.
NONE1STOPBIT No parity bit, one stop bit 1
NONE2STOPBIT No parity bit, two stop bits 2

158

ODD Odd parity indication bit, one stopbit 3
EVEN Even parity indication bit, one stopbit 4
60 MASTER/ Master/Follower application. For more information, see the chapter Program
FOLLOWER features and a separate Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430
[English]).
60.01 MASTER LINK MODE Defines the role of the drive on the Master/Follower link.
NOT IN USE The Master/Follower link is not active. 1
MASTER Master drive 2
FOLLOWER Follower drive 3
STANDBY Follower drive which reads the control signals through a fieldbus interface, not 4
from the Master/Follower link as usual.
60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR Selects the reference used in motor torque control. Typically, the value needs
to be changed only in the Follower station(s).
The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL.
External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable torque selector.
SPEED The follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque 1
control. The drive is speed-controlled. SPEED can be used both in the
Follower and in the Master if
- the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly. (A slight
speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible/allowed.)
- drooping is used (see parameter 60.06).
TORQUE The drive is torque-controlled. The selection is used in the Follower(s) when 2
the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are coupled solidly to each other
by gearing, a chain or other means of mechanical power transmission and no
speed difference between the drives is allowed or possible.
Note: If TORQUE is selected, the drive does not restrict the speed variation as
long as the speed is within the limits defined by parameters 20.01 and 20.02.
More definite speed supervision is often needed. In those cases, the selection
ADD should be used instead of TORQUE.
MINIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed 3
controller output, and the smaller of them is used as the reference for the
motor torque control. MINIMUM is selected in special cases only.
MAXIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed 4
controller output and the greater of them is used as the reference for the motor
torque control. MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only.
ADD The torque selector adds the speed controller output to the direct torque 5
reference. The drive is torque-controlled in the normal operating range. The
selection ADD, together with the window control, forms a speed supervision
function for a torque-controlled Follower drive. See parameter 60.03.
ZERO This selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero. 6
60.03 WINDOW SEL ON Activates the Window control function. The Window control, together with
selection ADD at parameter 60.02, forms a speed supervision function for a
torque-controlled drive. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is
T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable window
control.
NO Inactive 0

159

YES Window control is active. Selection YES is used only when parameter 60.02 65535
has value ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed
Reference - Actual Speed). In the normal operating range, window control
keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if:
- the speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60.04 or
- the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of
parameter 60.05.
When the speed error moves outside the window, the exceeding part of the
error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces
a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller
(parameter 23.01) which the torque selector adds to the torque reference. The
result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive.
Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is
decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed. If window control
were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive
were reached.
60.04 WINDOW WIDTH Defines the supervision window width above the speed reference. See
POS parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 … 1500 rpm Positive window width 0… 20000
60.05 WINDOW WIDTH Defines the supervision window width below the speed reference. See
NEG parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 … 1500 rpm Negative window width 0… 20000

160

60.06 DROOP RATE Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both
the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled:
- External control location 1 (EXT1) is selected (see parameter 11.02 or
- External control location 2 (EXT2) is selected (see parameter 11.02) and
parameter 60.02 is set to SPEED.
The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower. The
correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice.
The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by
allowing a slight speed difference between them. The drooping slightly
decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed
decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and
the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed
controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the
DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the
decreasing load.
Speed Decrease =
Speed Controller Output · Drooping · Max. Speed
Motor Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is
Speed 1%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.
% of Speed decrease = 0.50 · 0.01 · 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm
nominal
No Drooping
100% } Par. 60.06 DROOP RATE
Drooping
Speed Controller Drive load

100% Output / %
0 … 100% Droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed 0 … 1000

60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 1
(speed reference).
0000 … 9999 Parameter index 0000 …
9999
60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 2
(torque reference).
0000 … 9999 Parameter index 0000 …
9999
70 DDCS CONTROL Settings for the fibre optic channels 0, 1 and 3.
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the
same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is
connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of
the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another
drive.
1 … 125 Address. 1 … 125
70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same
address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is
connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the
DriveWindow® program running.
1 … 254 Address. 1 … 254

161

70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE The communication speed of channel 1. Typically the setting needs to be
changed only if the pulse encoder interface module is connected to channel 1
instead of channel 2. Then the speed must be changed to 4 Mbits. See also
parameter 50.05.
8 Mbits 8 megabits per second 0
70.04 CH0 DDCS HW Selects the topology of the channel 0 link.
CONN
RING Devices are connected in ring topology. 0
STAR Devices are connected in a star topology. 65535
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see the
Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]).
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program.
STOP Stop. The program cannot be edited.
RUN Run. The program cannot be edited.
EDIT Stop to edit mode. Program can be edited.
83.02 EDIT COMMAND Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter
83.03. The program must be in editing mode (see parameter 83.01).
NO Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command
has been executed.
PUSH Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and the following blocks
one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by
programming the Block Parameter Set as usual.
Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block
number four (parameters 84.20 … 84.25) and five (parameters 84.25 …
84.29).
In order to do this:
- Shift the program to the editing mode by parameter 83.01.
- Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by
parameter 83.03.
- Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location
forward by parameter 83.02.(selection PUSH )
- Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as
usual.
DELETE Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and shifts the
following blocks one step down.

162

PROTECT Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows:
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05).
- Change parameter 83.02 to PROTECT.
When activated:
- All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden
(read protected).
- It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (parameter 83.01).
- Parameter 83.05 is set to 0.
UNPROTECT Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Inactivate as follows:
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05).
- Change parameter 83.02 to UNPROTECT.
Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by
changing the application macro setting (parameter 99.02).
83.03 EDIT BLOCK Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter
83.02.
1 … 15 Block location number.
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid
for all blocks.
12 ms 12 milliseconds
83.05 PASSCODE Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is
needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See parameter 83.02.
0… Passcode. The setting restores to 0 after the protection is activated/
inactivated. Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a
safe place.
84 ADAPTIVE - selections of the function blocks and their input connections.
PROGRAM - diagnostics
For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code:
3AFE 64527274 [English]).
84.01 STATUS Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows
the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display.
Bit Display Meaning
0 1 Stopped
1 2 Running
2 4 Faulted
3 8 Editing
4 10 Checking
5 20 Pushing
6 40 Popping
8 100 Initialising
84.02 FAULTED PAR Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program.

163

84.05 BLOCK1 Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See the Adaptive
Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]).
ABS
ADD
AND
COMPARE
EVENT
FILTER
MAX
MIN
MULDIV
NO
OR
PI
PI-BAL
SR
SWITCH-B
SWITCH-I
TOFF
TON
TRIGG
XOR
84.06 INPUT1 Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value: -
+255.255.31 / C.- - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
32768 … C.32767 effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows:
- Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The application
program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.)
- If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value
(-01.17.01.).
84.07 INPUT2 See parameter 84.06.
-255.255.31 … See parameter 84.06. -
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
84.08 INPUT3 See parameter 84.06.
-255.255.31 … See parameter 84.06. -
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
84.09 OUTPUT Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1.
… …
84.79 OUTPUT Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15.

164

85 USER CONSTANTS Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more
information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE
64527274 [English]).
85.01 CONSTANT1 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.11 STRING1 Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
MESSAGE1 Message
MESSAGE2 Message
MESSAGE3 Message
MESSAGE4 Message
MESSAGE5 Message
90 D SET REC ADDR - Addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written.
- Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see the chapter Fieldbus control.
90.01 AUX DS REF3 Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
0 … 8999 Parameter index

165

90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference
REF1 and Reference REF2.
1 … 255 Data set number
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3, REF4 and
REF5.
1 … 255 Data set number
92 D SET TR ADDR Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master
station.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see the chapter Fieldbus control.
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from. Fixed value,
WORD not visible.
302 (fixed) Parameter index
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data
Set.
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data
Set.
92.04 AUX DS ACT3 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
Set.
Set.
96 EXTERNAL AO Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module
(optional).
The parameters are visible only when the module is installed and activated by
parameter 98.06.
96.01 EXT AO1 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.

166

COM.REF4 See parameter 15.01. 15
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension
module.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active. The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal 65535
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
Note: Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but
fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero.
Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue output.
- The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (parameter 99.08).
- 96.02 is NO.
- 96.05 is 100%.
The analogue output value as a function of the speed is shown below.
Analogue output
mA
20
Analogue output
signal minimum
12 1 0 mA
10 2 4 mA
3 10 mA
4 2 2 4 12 mA
4
3 1 1
-1000 -500 0 500 1000

Speed/rpm
0 mA 0 mA 1
4 mA 4 mA 2
10 mA 10 mA 3
12 mA 12 mA 4
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.04.
0.00 … 10.00 s Filtering time constant 0 … 1000
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
10 … 1000% Scaling factor 100 …
10000
96.06 EXT AO2 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module.

167

COM.REF5 See parameter 15.01. 15
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension
module. The analogue signal is at its minimum level when the drive signal
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 Defines the minimum value for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
0 mA 0 mA 1
4 mA 4 mA 2
10 mA 10 mA 3
12 mA 12 mA 4
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
0.00 … 10.00 s Filtering time constant 0 … 1000
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
10 … 1000% Scaling factor 100 …
10000
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.11 of parameter 96.01. 1000 =
1 mA
32768 … C.32767
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.12 of parameter 96.06. 1000 =
1 mA
32768 … C.32767

168

98 OPTION MODULES Activation of the option modules.
The parameter settings will remain the same even though the application
macro is changed (parameter 99.02).
98.01 ENCODER MODULE Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. See also
parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE.
NTAC Communication active. Module type: NTAC module. Connection interface: 0
Fibre optic DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Installation
and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY
58919730 [English]).
NO Inactive 1
RTAC-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option 2
slot 1 of the drive.
RTAC-SLOT2 Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option 3
slot 2 of the drive.
RTAC-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Optional I/O 4
module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see User’s
Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).
98.02 COMM. MODULE Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See the
LINK chapter Fieldbus control.
NO No communication 1
FIELDBUS The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 1 of the 2
drive, or via CH0 on the RDCO board. See also parameter group 51 COMM
MOD DATA.
ADVANT The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on the 3
RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL.
STD MODBUS The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter 4
Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter 52
STANDARD MODBUS.
CUSTOMISED The drive communicates via a customer specified link. The control sources are 5
defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05.
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional)
and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs: See parameter 98.09 for the use of the inputs in the drive
application program.
Module outputs: See parameters 14.10 and 14.11 for selecting the drive states
that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NDIO Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: 1
58919730 [English]).
NO Inactive 2
RDIO-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3
of the drive.
of the drive.

169

RDIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5
DDCS link.
58919730 [English]).
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
of the drive.
DDCS link.
58919730 [English]).
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
of the drive.
DDCS link.

170

98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module (optional),
Module inputs:
- Values AI5 and AI6 in the drive application program are connected to module
inputs 1 and 2.
- See parameters 98.13 and 98.14 for the signal type definitions.
Module outputs:
- See parameters 96.01 and 96.06 for selecting the drive signals that are
indicated through module outputs 1 and 2.
NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic 1
DDCS link.
58919730 [English]).
NO Communication inactive 2
RAIO-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3
of the drive.
of the drive.
RAIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5
DDCS link.
Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).
98.07 COMM PROFILE Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another
drive is based. Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02.
ABB DRIVES ABB Drives profile.
GENERIC Generic drive profile. Typically used with the fieldbus modules that have the
type designation of form Rxxx (installed in the option slot of the drive).
CSA 2.8/3.0 Communication profile used by application program versions 2.8 and 3.0.
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 1 in the drive
application program. See parameter 98.03.
DI7,8 DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module 1
inputs are named DI7 and DI8.
REPL DI1,2 DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2. 2
The inputs are named DI1 and DI2.
DI7,8,9 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The 3
module inputs are named DI7, DI8 and DI9.
REPL DI1,2,3 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2 4
and DI3. The inputs are named DI1, DI2 and DI3.

171

DI10,11,12 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The 3
module inputs are named DI10, DI11 and DI12.
REPL DI4,5,6 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2 4
and DI3. The inputs are named DI4, DI5 and DI6.
98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module and
reserves the module for the use of the motor temperature measurement
function. The parameter also defines the type and connection interface of the
module.
For more information on the temperature measurement function, see
parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
The use of the analogue inputs (AI) and outputs (AO) of the module is shown in
the table below.
Motor 1 temperature measurement

AO1 Feeds a constant current to motor 1 temperature sensor. The current
value depends on the setting of parameter 35.01:
- AO1 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100
- AO1 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC
AI1 Measures voltage over motor 1 temperature sensor.
Motor 2 temperature measurement
AO2 Feeds a constant current to motor 2 temperature sensor. The current
value depends on the setting of parameter 35.04:
- AO2 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100,
- AO2 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC
AI2 Measures voltage over motor 2 temperature sensor.
Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are
appropriate for the motor temperature measurement:
1. The module node number is 9.
2. The input signal type selections are the following:
- for one Pt 100 sensor measurement, set the range to 0 … 2 V.
- for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to
0 … 10 V.
3. The operation mode selection is unipolar.
NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic 1
DDCS link.
Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. For instructions,
see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules
(Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]).
NO Inactive 2

172

of the drive.
Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. The node number
is not required. For directions, see User’s Manual for RAIO Module (Code:
of the drive.
Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. The node number
is not required. For directions, see User’s Manual for RAIO Module (Code:
RAIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5
DDCS link.
Note: Set the module node number to 9. For directions, see User’s Manual for
RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI5 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06.
UNIPOLAR AI5 Unipolar 1
BIPOLAR AI5 Bipolar 2
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI6 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06.
UNIPOLAR AI6 Unipolar 1
BIPOLAR AI6 Bipolar 2
99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
99.01 LANGUAGE Selects the display language.
ENGLISH British English 0
ENGLISH AM American English. If selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW. 1
DEUTSCH German 2
ITALIANO Italian 3
ESPANOL Spanish 4
PORTUGUES Portuguese 5
NEDERLANDS Dutch 6
FRANCAIS French 7
DANSK Danish 8
SUOMI Finnish 9
SVENSKA Swedish 10
CESKY Czech 11
POLSKI Polish 12
PO-RUSSKI Russian 13

173

99.02 APPLICATION Selects the application macro. See the chapter Application macros for more
MACRO information.
Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new
settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive
is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings
(factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See parameter
99.03.
FACTORY Factory for basic applications 1
HAND/AUTO Two control devices are connected to the drive: 2
- device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control
location EXT1.
- device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control
location EXT2.
- EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching through a digital input.
PID-CTRL PID control. For application in which the drive controls a process value. E.g. 3
pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump. Measured
pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive.
T-CTRL Torque Control macro 4
SEQ CTRL Sequential Control macro. For applications that are frequently run through a 5
pre-defined speed pattern (constant speeds and acceleration and deceleration
ramps).
USER 1 LOAD User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 6
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
USER 1 SAVE Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 7
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
USER 2 LOAD User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 8
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
USER 2 SAVE Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 9
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE Restores the original settings of the active application macro (99.02).
- If a standard macro (Factory, ... , Sequential Control) is active, the parameter
values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exceptions:
parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged. The motor
model remains unchanged.
- If User Macro 1 or 2 is active, the parameter values are restored to the last
saved values. In addition, the last saved motor model are restored. Exceptions:
Settings of parameters 16.05 and 99.02 remain unchanged.
Note: The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to
the same principles when a macro is changed to another.
NO No action 0
YES Restoring 65535
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode.
DTC Direct Torque Control mode is suitable for most applications. 0

174

SCALAR Scalar control is suitable in special cases where the DTC cannot be applied. 65535
The scalar control mode is recommended:
- for multimotor drives with variable number of motors
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output
current of the drive (inverter)
- the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Note: The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved
in scalar control. The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes
are pointed out in this manual in relevant parameter lists. There are some
standard features that are disabled in the scalar control mode: Motor
Identification Run (group 99 START-UP DATA), Speed Limits (group 20
LIMITS), Torque Limit (group 20 LIMITS), DC Hold (group 21 START/STOP),
DC Magnetizing (group 21 START/STOP), Speed Controller Tuning (group 23
SPEED CTRL), Torque Control (group 24 TORQUE CTRL), Flux Optimization
(group 26 MOTOR CONTROL), Flux Braking (group 26 MOTOR CONTROL),
Underload Function (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Phase Loss
Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Stall Protection (group 30
FAULT FUNCTIONS).
99.05 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor
VOLTAGE rating plate.
1/2 … 2 · UN Voltage. Allowed range is 1/2 … 2 · UN of the drive. 1=1V
Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive
supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is
lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
99.06 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor
CURRENT rating plate.
Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor
does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.
0 … 2 · I2hd Allowed range: approx. 1/6 … 2 · I2hd of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = DTC). 1 = 0.1 A
Allowed range: approx. 0 … 2 · I2hd of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = SCALAR).
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency.
8 … 300 Hz Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically) 800 …
30000
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must
not be given instead!
Note: If the value of parameter 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in parameter
group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well.
1 … 18000 rpm Nominal motor speed 1 … 18000
99.09 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate.
POWER
0 … 9000 kW Nominal motor power 0 … 90000

175

99.10 MOTOR ID RUN Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive
MODE will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID
Run Procedure is described in the chapter Start-up; and control through the I/
O.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide
speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) cannot be performed if
ID MAGN No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the 1
motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. This can be selected in most applications.
STANDARD Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID Run 2
takes about one minute.
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 … 80% of
the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
REDUCED Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run: 3
- if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be de-
coupled from the driven equipment)
- if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a
motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 … 80% of
the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
99.11 DEVICE NAME Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the
control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be
typed only by using a drive PC tool.

176

177
Fault tracing
Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and
corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety
Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read
before you start working with the drive.
Warning and fault indications

A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status.
Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information.
If not, an ABB representative should be contacted.
If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel
mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted
with the LEDs as standard).
The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus
communication (see the chapter Fieldbus control).
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or
fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been
removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and
warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected.
See the chapter Control panel for more information.
Fault tracing
178
Warning messages generated by the drive

WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO
ACS 800 TEMP The drive temperature is excessive. Check ambient conditions.
(4210) Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
AI < MIN FUNC An analogue control signal is below minimum Check for proper analogue control signal
(8110) allowed value. This can be caused by incorrect levels.
(programmable signal level or a failure in the control wiring. Check the control wiring.
Fault Function Check Fault Function parameters.
30.01)
BACKUP USED A PC-stored backup of drive parameters is Wait until download is completed.
downloaded into use.
BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of brake acknowledge See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL.
(ff74) signal. Check connection of brake acknowledgement
signal.
BR OVERHEAT Brake resistor overload. Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
(7112) Check parameter settings of resistor overload
protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
CALIBRA DONE Calibration of output current transformers Continue normal operation.

completed.
CALIBRA REQ Calibration of output current transformers Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a
required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar while.
control (parameter 99.04) and scalar flystart
feature is on (parameter 21.08).
CHOKE OTEMP Excessive temperature of drive output filter. Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient
(ff82) Supervision is in use in step-up drives. temperature. Check filter fan rotates in correct
direction and air flows freely.
COMM MODULE Cyclical communication between the drive and Check the status of fieldbus communication.
(7510) the master is lost. See the chapter Fieldbus control, or
(programmable appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
Fault Function) Check parameter settings:
- group 51 (for fieldbus adapter)
- group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)
Check cable connections.
Check if the bus master is not configured, or
does not send/receive messages.
EARTH FAULT Drive has detected load unbalance typically Check motor.
(2330) due to earth fault in motor or motor cable. Check motor cable.
(programmable Check there are no power factor correction
Fault Function capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor
30.17) cable.
Fault tracing
179
ENCODER A<>B Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is Interchange the connection of pulse encoder
(7302) connected to terminal of phase B and vice phases A and B.
versa.
ENCODER ERR Communication fault between the pulse Check the pulse encoder and its wiring, the
(7301) encoder and the pulse encoder interface pulse encoder interface module and its wiring,
module and between the module and the drive. parameter group 50 settings.
ID DONE The drive has performed the motor Continue drive operation.
identification magnetisation and is ready for
operation. This warning belongs to the normal
start-up procedure.
ID MAGN Motor identification magnetisation is on. This Wait until the drive indicates that motor
warning belongs to the normal start-up identification is completed.
procedure.
ID MAGN REQ Motor identification is required. This warning Start the Identification Magnetisation by
belongs to the normal start-up procedure. The pressing the Start key, or select the ID Run
drive expects the user to select how the motor and start (see parameter 99.10).
identification should be performed: By
Identification Magnetisation or by ID Run.
ID N CHANGED The ID number of the drive has been changed Change the ID number back to 1. See the
from 1. chapter Control panel.
ID RUN SEL Motor Identification Run is selected, and the Press Start key to start the Identification Run.
drive is ready to start the ID Run. This warning
belongs to the ID Run procedure.
IO CONFIG An input or output of an optional I/O extension Check fault function description (parameter
or fieldbus module has been selected as a 30.22) and parameter group 98 OPTION
signal interface in the application program but MODULES. Correct settings where necessary.
the communication to the appropriate I/O
extension module has not been set
accordingly.
MACRO CHANGE Macro is restoring or User macro is being Wait until the drive has finished the task.
saved.
MOTOR STALL The motor is operating in the stall region. This Check motor load and the ratings of the drive.
(7121) can be caused by excessive load or insufficient Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable motor power.
Fault Function
30.10)
MOTOR STARTS Motor Identification Run starts. This warning Wait until the drive indicates that motor
belongs to the ID Run procedure. identification is completed.
MOTOR TEMP The motor temperature is excessive. This can Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
(4310) be caused by excessive load, insufficient motor Check start-up data.
(programmable power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up
Check Fault Function parameters.
data.
Fault Function
30.04 … 30.09)
Fault tracing
180
MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check the value of the alarm limit.
(4312) the alarm limit set by parameter 35.02. Check that the actual number of the sensors
corresponds to the parameter set value.
Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check the value of the alarm limit.
(4313) the alarm limit set by parameter 35.05. Check that the actual number of the sensors
corresponds to the parameter set value.
Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
PANEL LOSS A control panel selected as the active control Check the panel connection (see the hardware
(5300) location for the drive has ceased manual).
(programmable communicating. Check control panel connector.
Fault Function Replace control panel in the mounting
30.02) platform.
POINTER ERROR Source selection (pointer) parameter points to Check source selection (pointer) parameter
not existing parameter index. settings.
REPLACE FAN Running time of the inverter cooling fan has Change the fan. Reset fan run time counter
exceeded its estimated life time. 01.44.
SHORT CIRC Short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor. Check motor and motor cable.
(2340) *) Check there are no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor
cable.
Output bridge of the converter unit is faulty. Consult ABB representative.
SLEEP MODE The sleep function has entered the sleeping See parameter group 40 PID CONTROL.
mode.
SYNCRO SPEED The value of the motor nominal speed set to Check nominal speed from motor rating plate
parameter 99.08 is not correct: The value is too and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.
near the synchronous speed of the motor.
Tolerance is 0.1%.
THERMISTOR The motor temperature is excessive. Motor Check motor ratings and load.
(4311) thermal protection mode selection is Check start-up data.
(programmable THERMISTOR.
Check thermistor connections to digital input
Fault Function DI6.
30.04 … 30.05)
T MEAS ALM Motor temperature measurement is out of the Check connections of the motor temperature
acceptable range. measurement circuit. See parameter group 35
MOT TEMP MEAS for circuit diagram.
UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a Check for a problem in the driven equipment.
(ff6a) release mechanism in the driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13)
Fault tracing
181
Warning messages generated by the control panel

DOWNLOADING Download function of the panel has failed. No Make sure the panel is in local mode.
FAILED data has been copied from panel to Retry (there might be interference on the link).
drive.
Contact ABB representative.
DRIVE Program versions in the panel and drive do not Check program versions (see parameter group
INCOMPATIBLE match. It is not possible to copy data from 33 INFORMATION).
DOWNLOADING panel to the drive.
NOT POSSIBLE
DRIVE IS Downloading is not possible while the motor is Stop motor. Perform downloading.
RUNNING running.
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
NO Cabling problem or a hardware malfunction on Check Panel Link connections.

COMMUNICATION the Panel Link. Press RESET key. The panel reset may take
(X) up to half a minute, please wait.
(4) = Panel type not compatible with version of Check panel type and version of the drive
the drive application program. application program. The panel type is printed
on the cover of the panel. The application
program version is stored in parameter 33.02.
NO FREE ID The Panel Link already includes 31 stations. Disconnect another station from the link to free
NUMBERS ID an ID number.
NUMBER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
NOT UPLOADED No upload function has been performed. Perform the upload function before
DOWNLOADING downloading. See the chapter Control panel.
NOT POSSIBLE
UPLOADING Upload function of the panel has failed. No Retry (there might be interference on the link).
FAILED data has been copied from the drive to the Contact ABB representative.
panel.
WRITE ACCESS Certain parameters do not allow changes while Stop motor, then change parameter value.
DENIED motor is running. If tried, no change is
PARAMETER accepted, and a warning is displayed.
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE Parameter lock is on. Open the parameter lock (see parameter
16.02).
Fault tracing
182
Fault messages generated by the drive

FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO
ACS 800 TEMP Excessive internal temperature. Check ambient conditions.

(4210) Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
AI < MIN FUNC Analogue control signal is below minimum Check for proper analogue control signal
(8110) allowed value due to incorrect signal level or levels.
(programmable failure in the control wiring. Check control wiring.
Fault Function Check Fault Function parameters.
30.01)
BACKUP ERROR Failure when restoring PC-stored backup of Retry. Check connections. Check that
drive parameters. parameters are compatible with drive.
BC OVERHEAT Brake chopper overload. Stop drive. Let chopper cool down.
(7114) Check parameter settings of resistor overload
protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
Check that the supply AC voltage of the drive
is not excessive.
BC SHORT CIR Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s). Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor
(7113) is connected and not damaged.
BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of the brake acknowledge See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL.
(ff74) signal. Check connection of the brake
acknowledgement signal.
BR BROKEN Brake resistor is not connected or it is Check the resistor and the resistor connection.
(7110) damaged. Check that the resistance rating meets the
The resistance rating of the brake resistor is specification. See the drive hardware manual.
too high.
BR OVERHEAT Overload of the brake resistor. Stop drive. Let the resistor cool down.
(7112) Check parameter settings of the resistor
overload protection function (see parameter
group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets the allowed
limits.
Check that the supply AC voltage of the drive
is not excessive.
BR WIRING (7111) Wrong connection of brake resistor. Check resistor connection. Ensure brake
resistor is not damaged.
Fault tracing
183
COMM MODULE Cyclical communication with drive and master Check status of fieldbus communication. See
(7510) station is lost. the chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate
(programmable fieldbus adapter manual.
Fault Function) Check parameter settings:
- group 51 (for fieldbus adapter), or
- group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)
Check cable connections.
Check if master can communicate.
CURR MEAS Current transformer failure in output current Check current transformer connections to Main
(2211) measurement circuit. Circuit Interface Board, INT.
DC HIGH RUSH Drive supply voltage is excessive. When Check supply voltage level, rated voltage of
(FF80) supply voltage is over 124% of the voltage the drive and allowed voltage range of the
rating of the unit (415, 500 or 690 V), motor drive.
speed rushes to trip level (40% of the nominal
speed).
DC OVERVOLT Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. DC Check that the overvoltage controller is on
(3210) overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 · U1max, where (Parameter 20.05).
U1max is the maximum value of the mains Check mains for static or transient overvoltage.
voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V.
Check brake chopper and resistor (if used).
For 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. Actual voltage
in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the Check deceleration time.
mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
units and 877 VDC for 500 V units. Retrofit the frequency converter with a brake
chopper and a brake resistor.
DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check mains supply and fuses.
(3220) due to missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a
rectifier bridge internal fault.
DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 · U1min, where

U1min is the minimum value of the mains
voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units,
U1min is 380 V. Actual voltage in the
intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains
voltage trip level is 334 VDC.
EARTH FAULT Drive has detected load unbalance typically Check motor.
(2330) due to earth fault in motor or motor cable. Check motor cable.
(programmable Check there are no power factor correction
Fault Function capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor
30.17 cable.
ENCODER A<>B Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is Interchange the connection of pulse encoder
(7302) connected to terminal of phase B and vice phases A and B.
versa.
ENCODER ERR Communication fault between pulse encoder Check pulse encoder and its wiring, module
(7301) and pulse encoder interface module or and its wiring and parameter group 50 settings.
between module and drive.
Fault tracing
184
EXTERNAL FLT Fault in one of the external devices. Check external devices for faults.
(9000) (This information is configured through one of Check parameter 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT.
(programmable the programmable digital inputs.)
Fault Function
30.03)
FAN OVERTEMP Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan. Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient
(ff83) Supervision is in use in step-up drives. temperature. Check fan rotates in correct
ID RUN FAIL Motor ID Run is not completed successfully. Check maximum speed (Parameter 20.02). It
should be at least 80% of the nominal speed of
the motor (Parameter 99.08).
IN CHOKE TEMP Excessive input choke temperature. Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient
(ff81) temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct
I/O COMM ERR Communication error on the control board, Check connections of fibre optic cables on
(7000) channel CH1. channel CH1.
Electromagnetic interference. Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to
channel CH1.
Check for proper earthing of the equipment.
Check for highly emissive components nearby.
LINE CONV (ff51) Fault on the line side converter. Shift panel from motor-side converter control
board to line-side converter control board.
See line side converter manual for fault
description.
MOTOR PHASE One of the motor phases is lost due to fault in Check motor and motor cable.
(ff56) the motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used) Check thermal relay (if used).
(programmable or internal fault.
Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this
Fault Function protection.
30.16)
MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region due to e.g. Check motor load and the drive ratings.
(7121) excessive load or insufficient motor power. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10 … 30.12)
MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be Check motor ratings and load.
(4310) too high) due to excessive load, insufficient Check start-up data.
(programmable motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect
Fault Function start-up data.
30.04 … 30.09)
MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of fault limit. Let the motor cool
(4312) the fault limit set by parameter 35.03. down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check
cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of fault limit. Let the motor cool
(4313) fault limit set by parameter 35.06. down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check
cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.
Fault tracing
185
NO MOT DATA Motor data is not given or motor data does not Check motor data given by parameters
(ff52) match with inverter data. 99.04 … 99.09.
OVERCURRENT Output current exceeds the trip limit. Check motor load.
(2310) *) Check acceleration time.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing).
Check there are no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor
cable.
Check encoder cable (including phasing).
OVERFREQ (7123) Motor is turning faster than the highest allowed Check minimum/maximum speed settings.
speed due to incorrectly set minimum/ Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or
Check applicability of torque control.
changes in the load when using torque
reference. Check need for a brake chopper and
resistor(s).
Trip level is 40 Hz over the operating range
absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque
Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active). The operating range limits are
set by parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC
mode active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar
Control active).
PANEL LOSS A control panel or Drives Window selected as Check panel connection (see appropriate
(5300) active control location for the drive has ceased hardware manual).
(programmable communicating. Check control panel connector.
Fault Function Replace control panel in the mounting
30.02) platform.
Check DrivesWindow connection.
PPCC LINK (5210) Fibre optic link to the INT board is faulty. Check fibre optic cables.
*)
RUN DISABLE No Run enable signal received. Check the setting of parameter 16.01. Switch
on the signal or check the wiring of the
selected source.
SC (INU 1) Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel Check motor and motor cable.
SC (INU 2) inverter modules. The number refers to the Check power semiconductors (IGBT power
faulty inverter module number. plates) of inverter module. (INU 1 stands for
SC (INU 3)
inverter module 1 etc.).
SC (INU 4)
*) INT board fibre optic connection fault in Check connection from inverter module Main
inverter unit consisting of several parallel Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC
inverter modules. The number refers to the Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is
inverter module number. connected to PBU CH1 etc.)
SLOT OVERLAP Two option modules have the same connection Check connection interface selections in group
interface selection. 98 OPTION MODULES.
START No Start Interlock signal received. Check the circuit connected to the Start
INTERLOCK Interlock input on the RMIO board.
Fault tracing
186
SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating Check mains fuses.

(3130) due to missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a Check for mains supply imbalance.
rectifier bridge internal fault.
A trip occurs when the DC voltage ripple is 13
per cent of the DC voltage.
THERMAL MODE Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC See parameter 30.05.
for a high-power motor.
THERMISTOR Excessive motor temperature (detected by the Check motor ratings and load.
(4311) motor thermal protection function, which has Check start-up data.
(programmable selection THERMISTOR active) .
Check thermistor connections.
Fault Function
Check thermistor cabling.
30.04 … 30.05)
UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low due to e.g. release Check for a problem in the driven equipment.
(ff6a) mechanism in the driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13 … 30.15)
USER MACRO No User Macro saved or the file is defective. Create User Macro.
*) More detailed information on the high power units with parallel inverters is given in fault word 03.12.
Fault tracing
187
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system – usually a fieldbus
controller – via an adapter module mounted in expansion slot 1 of the drive or via a
fieldbus adapter connected to channel CH0 of an RDCO (DDCS Communication
Option) module. (For connection to an Advant Fieldbus 100 system, an external
AF 100 interface is used.)
Fieldbus
Controller
Fieldbus
ACS800 Other
devices
Fieldbus Adapter (* (* (*
Rxxx
Slot 1 (* Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and
RMIO Board
an RMBA-01 adapter can be

RMBA-01 Adapter connected simultaneously.
Std. Modbus Link
Slot 1 or 2 Fieldbus Adapter
Nxxx
RDCO Comm. CH0
or
Module (DDCS)
AF 100 Interface
(eg. AC 80)
Data Flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Process I/O (Cyclic)
Status Word (SW)
Actual Values
Parameter R/W Requests/Responses Service Messages (Acyclic)
Figure 1 Fieldbus control.
Fieldbus control
188
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, e.g. digital and analogue inputs.
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module

Note: For instructions on setting up an RMBA-01 module, see Setting up
communication through the Standard Modbus Link below.
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the
Hardware Manual of the drive, and the module manual.
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is then
activated by setting parameter 98.02. After the communication is initialised, the
configuration parameters of the module become available in the drive at parameter
group 51.
Table 1 Communication set-up parameters for fieldbus adapter connection.
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information
settings fieldbus control
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02 NO; FIELDBUS; FIELDBUS Initialises communication between drive

ADVANT; STD and fieldbus adapter module. Activates
MODBUS; module set-up parameters (Group 51).
CUSTOMISED
98.07 ABB DRIVES; ABB DRIVES, Selects the communication profile used by
GENERIC; GENERIC or the drive. See section Communication
CSA 2.8/3.0 CSA 2.8/3.0 Profiles below.
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION
51.01 MODULE TYPE – – Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter

module.
51.02 (FIELDBUS These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual.
PARAMETER 2) Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.
•••
51.26 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 26)
51.27 FBA PAR (0) DONE; – Validates any changed fieldbus parameter
REFRESH* (1) REFRESH settings. After refreshing, the value reverts
automatically to DONE.
51.28 FILE CPI FW xyz (binary coded – Displays the CPI firmware revision of the
REV* decimal) fieldbus adapter configuration file stored in
the memory of the drive. x = major revision
number; y = minor revision number;
z = correction number. Example: 107 =
revision 1.07.
Fieldbus control
189
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information

settings fieldbus control
51.29 FILE CONFIG xyz (binary coded – Displays the fieldbus adapter module
ID* decimal) configuration file identification stored in the
memory of the drive. This information is
drive application program-dependent.
51.30 FILE CONFIG xyz (binary coded – Displays the fieldbus adapter module
REV* decimal) configuration file revision stored in the
memory of the drive. x = major revision
number; y = minor revision number;
z = correction number. Example: 1 =
revision 0.01.
51.31 FBA STATUS (0) IDLE; – Displays the status of the adapter module.
(1) EXEC. INIT; IDLE = Adapter not configured.
(2) TIME OUT;
EXEC. INIT = Adapter initialising.
(3) CONFIG
ERROR; TIME OUT = A timeout has occurred in the
(4) OFF-LINE; communication between the adapter and
(5) ON-LINE; the drive.
(6) RESET CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration
error. The major or minor revision code of
the CPI firmware revision stored in the
adapter differs from that stated in the
configuration file in the memory of the drive.
OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line.
ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line.
RESET = Adapter performing a hardware
reset.
51.32 FBA CPI FW – – Displays the CPI program revision of the

REV module. x = major revision number;
y = minor revision number; z = correction
number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
51.33 FBA APPL FW – – Displays the application program revision of

REV the module. x = major revision number;
y = minor revision number; z = correction
number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible with a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter installed.
After the parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown
in Table 4) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 51.27 is activated.
Fieldbus control
190
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link

An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface
called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for
external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only).
It is possible to switch the control between the Standard Modbus Link and another
fieldbus adapter, in which case the RMBA-01 is installed in slot 2, the fieldbus
adapter in slot 1 (or connected to CH0 of the optional RDCO-0x board).
Communication set-up
The communication through the Standard Modbus Link is initialised by setting
parameter 98.02 to STD MODBUS. Then, the communication parameters in group
52 must be adjusted. See the table below.
Table 2 Communication set-up parameters for the Standard Modbus Link.
Parameter Alternative Setting for Control Function/Information
Settings through the Standard
Modbus Link
98.02 NO; FIELDBUS; STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive

ADVANT; STD (Standard Modbus Link) and Modbus-
MODBUS; protocol controller. Activates
CUSTOMISED communication parameters in group 52.
98.07 ABB DRIVES; ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by
GENERIC; the drive. See section Communication
CSA 2.8/3.0 profiles below.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
52.01 1 to 247 – Specifies the station number of the drive

on the Standard Modbus Link.
52.02 600; 1200; 2400; – Communication speed for the Standard

4800; 9600; 19200 Modbus Link.
52.03 ODD; EVEN; – Parity setting for the Standard Modbus

NONE1STOPBIT; Link.
NONE2STOPBIT
After the parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown
in Table 4) should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
Fieldbus control
191
Modbus addressing
In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the
references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Address Contents Address Contents
40001 Control Word 40004 Status Word
40002 Reference 1 40005 Actual 1
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website

http:\\www.modicon.com.
Fieldbus control
192
Setting up an Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) connection

The connection of a drive to an AF (Advant Fieldbus) 100 bus is similar to other
fieldbusses, with the exception that one of the AF 100 interfaces listed below is
substituted for the fieldbus adapter. The AF 100 interface is connected to channel
CH0 on the RDCO board inside the drive using fibre optic cables.
The following is a list of suitable AF 100 interfaces:
• CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI)
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required
• Advant Controller 70 (AC 70)
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required
• Advant Controller 80 (AC 80)
Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical
ModuleBus Port Interface required
DriveBus connection: Connectible to RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-01
Communication Option.
One of the above interfaces may already be present on the AF 100 bus. If not, an
Advant Fieldbus 100 Adapter kit (NAFA-01) is separately available, containing the
CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface, TB810 and TB811 Optical ModuleBus
Port Interfaces, and a TC505 Trunk Tap. (More information on these components is
available from the S800 I/O User’s Guide, 3BSE 008 878 [ABB Industrial Systems,
Västerås, Sweden]).
Optical component types
The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical
components, while the TB810 has 10 MBd components. All optical components on a
fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not match
10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811 depends on the
equipment it is connected to.
The TB811 (5 MBd) should be used when connecting to a drive with the following
equipment:
• RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-02 Communication Option
• RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-03 Communication Option.
The TB810 (10 MBd) should be used when connecting to the following equipment:
• RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-01 Communication Option
• NDBU-85/95 DDCS Branching Units.
Fieldbus control
193
Communication Set-up
The communication between the drive and the AF 100 interface is activated by
setting parameter 98.02 to ADVANT.
Table 3 Communication set-up parameters for AF 100 connection.
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Control Function/Information
through CH0
98.02 NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT Initialises communication between drive

ADVANT; STD (fibre optic channel CH0) and AF 100
MODBUS, interface. The transmission speed is
CUSTOMISED 4 Mbit/s.
98.07 ABB DRIVES; ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by
GENERIC; CSA 2.8/3.0 the drive. See section Communication
profiles below.
After the communication activation parameters have been set, the AF 100 interface
must be programmed according to its documentation, and the drive control
parameters (shown in Table 4) checked and adjusted where necessary.
In an Optical ModuleBus connection, the channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is
calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database
element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows:
1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16.
2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.
For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the
value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must
be set to 16 × 1 + 10 = 26.
In an AC 80 DriveBus connection, the drives are addressed 1 to 12. The drive
address (set with parameter 70.01) is related to the value of the DRNR terminal of
ACSRX PC element.
Fieldbus control
194
Drive control parameters

After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters
listed in Table 4 below should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later under The
fieldbus control interface.
Table 4 Drive control parameters to be checked and adjusted for fieldbus control.
Parameter Setting for Function/Information
fieldbus control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
10.01 COMM.CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
See also par. 10.07.
10.02 COMM.CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
10.03 FORWARD, REVERSE or Enables rotation direction control as defined by

REQUEST parameters 10.01 and 10.02. The direction control is
explained later under Reference handling.
10.07 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par.

10.01 so that the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive
communication profile selected (see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
10.08 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par.

11.03 so that Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when
EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive
communication profile selected (see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
11.02 COMM.CW Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control

Word bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC.
11.03 COMM.REF1, Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is

FAST COMM, selected as the active control location. See section
COM.REF1+AI1, References below for information on the alternative
COM.REF1+AI5, settings.
COM.REF1*AI1 or
COM.REF1*AI5
Fieldbus control
195

fieldbus control
11.06 COMM.REF2, Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is

FAST COMM, selected as the active control location. See section
COM.REF2+AI1, References below for information on the alternative
COM.REF2+AI5, settings.
COM.REF2*AI1 or
COM.REF2*AI5
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION
14.01 COM.REF3 Enables Relay output RO1 control by fieldbus

reference REF3 bit 13.


15.01 COMM.REF4 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to

Analogue output AO1. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA
15.06 COMM.REF5 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to

Analogue output AO2. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
16.01 COMM.CW Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through
fieldbus Control Word bit 3.
Note: Must be set to YES when the Generic Drive
communication profile is selected (see par. 98.07).
16.04 COMM.CW Enables fault reset through fieldbus Control Word

bit 7.
16.07 DONE; SAVE Saves parameter value changes (including those

made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.18 FAULT; NO; CONST SP15; Determines drive action in case fieldbus
LAST SPEED communication is lost.
Note: The communication loss detection is based on
monitoring of received Main and Auxiliary data sets
(whose sources are selected with parameters 90.04
and 90.05 respectively).
30.19 0.1 … 60.0 s Defines the time between Main Reference data set
loss detection and the action selected with parameter
30.18.
30.20 ZERO; LAST VALUE Determines the state in which Relay outputs RO1 to
RO3 and Analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 are left
upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set.
Fieldbus control
196

fieldbus control
30.21 0.0 … 60.0 s Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set
loss detection and the action selected with parameter
30.18.
Note: This supervision function is disabled if this
parameter, or parameters 90.01, 90.02 and 90.03 are
set to 0.
FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)
90.01 0 … 8999 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of
fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
Format: xxyy, where xx = parameter group (10 to 89),
yy = parameter Index. E.g. 3001 = parameter 30.01.
Format: see parameter 90.01.
90.04 1 (Fieldbus Control) or If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter

81 (Standard Modbus selects the source from which the drive reads the Main
Control) Reference data set (comprising the fieldbus Control
Word, fieldbus reference REF1, and fieldbus
reference REF2).
90.05 3 (Fieldbus Control) or If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter

83 (Standard Modbus selects the source from which the drive reads the
Control) Auxiliary Reference data set (comprising fieldbus
references REF3, REF4 and REF5).
ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)
92.01 302 (Fixed) The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of
the Main Actual Signal data set.
92.02 0 … 9999 Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be

transmitted as the second word (ACT1) of the Main
Actual Signal data set.
Format: (x)xyy, where (x)x = actual signal group or
parameter group, yy = actual signal or parameter
index. E.g. 103 = actual signal 1.03 FREQUENCY;
2202 = parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1.
Note: With the Generic Drive communication profile
active (par. 98.07 = GENERIC), this parameter is fixed
to 102 (actual signal 1.02 SPEED – in DTC motor
control mode) or 103 (1.03 FREQUENCY – in Scalar
mode).

transmitted as the third word (ACT2) of the Main
Fieldbus control
197

fieldbus control

transmitted as the first word (ACT3) of the Auxiliary

transmitted as the second word (ACT4) of the
Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.

transmitted as the third word (ACT5) of the Auxiliary
Fieldbus control
198
The fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets.
One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words
(DW). The ACS 800 Standard Application Program supports the use of four data
sets, two in each direction.
The two data sets for controlling the drive are referred to as the Main Reference data
set and the Auxiliary Reference data set. The sources from which the drive reads the
Main and Auxiliary Reference data sets are defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05
respectively. The contents of the Main Reference data set are fixed. The contents of
the Auxiliary Reference data set can be selected using parameters 90.01, 90.02 and
90.03.
The two data sets containing actual information on the drive are referred to as the
Main Actual Signal data set and the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. The contents of
both data sets are partly selectable with the parameters at group 92.
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Word Contents Selector Word Contents Selector
*Index Main Reference data set DS1 *Index Main Actual Signal data set DS2
1 1st word Control Word (Fixed) 4 1st word Status Word (Fixed)
2 2nd word Reference 1 (Fixed) 5 2nd word Actual 1 **Par. 92.02
3 3rd word Reference 2 (Fixed) 6 3rd word Actual 2 Par. 92.03
*Index Auxiliary Reference data set DS3 *Index Aux. Actual Signal data set DS4
7 1st word Reference 3 Par. 90.01 10 1st word Actual 3 Par. 92.04
8 2nd word Reference 4 Par. 90.02 11 2nd word Actual 4 Par. 92.05
9 3rd word Reference 5 Par. 90.03 12 3rd word Actual 5 Par. 92.06
*The index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined
via the fieldbus parameters at group 51. This function is dependent on the type of the
fieldbus adapter.
**With the Generic Drive communication profile active, Actual 1 is fixed to actual
signal 01.02 SPEED (in DTC motor control mode) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (in Scalar
mode).
The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6
milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets, it is
100 milliseconds.
Fieldbus control
199
The Control Word and the Status Word

The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. It is effective when the active control location (EXT1 or EXT2, see
parameters 10.01 and 10.02) is set to COMM.CW, or if par. 10.07 is set to 1 (with
Generic Drive communication profile only).
The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches
between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word.
The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller.
See text under Communication profiles below for information on the composition of
the Control Word and the Status Word.
References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating
reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from
the corresponding positive reference value.
Fieldbus reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COM.REF in signal selection contexts) is selected by
setting a Reference selection parameter – 11.03 or 11.06 – to COMM.REFx, FAST
COMM, COM.REFx+AI1, COM.REFx+AI5, COM.REFx*AI1 or COM.REFx*AI5.
(With Generic Drive communication profile, fieldbus reference is also selected when
par. 10.08 is set to 1.) The latter four selections enable correction of the fieldbus
reference using analogue inputs as shown below. (An optional RAIO-01 Analogue
I/O Extension Module is required for use of Analogue input AI5).
COMM.REF1 (in 11.03) or COMM.REF2 (in 11.06)
The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction.
FAST COMM
The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. The reference is
read every 2 milliseconds if either of the following conditions is met:
• Control location is EXT1, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, and par. 40.14
TRIM MODE is OFF
• Control location is EXT2, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, par. 40.14
TRIM MODE is OFF, and a torque reference is used.
In any other event, the fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds.
Note: The FAST COMM selection disables the critical speed function.
Fieldbus control
200
COM.REF1+AI1; COM.REF1+AI5; COM.REF1*AI1; COM.REF1*AI5 (in 11.03)

COM.REF2+AI1; COM.REF2+AI5; COM.REF2*AI1; COM.REF2*AI5 (in 11.06)
These selections enable the correction of the fieldbus reference as follows:
Parameter Setting Effect of AI1/AI5 Input Voltage on Fieldbus Reference
COM.REFx+AI1
Fieldbus Reference
COM.REFx+AI5 Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 × [par. 13.03])%
100%
(100 – 0.5 × [par. 13.03])%

0 5V 10 V AI1/AI5 Input
Voltage
COM.REFx*AI1
COM.REFx*AI5 Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
100%
50%
0%
0 5V 10 V AI1/AI5 Input
Voltage
Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they
can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how group 10
parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference
REF1/REF2.
Notes:
• With the ABB Drives communication profile, the limit “Max.Ref.” is defined by
parameters 11.05 (REF1) and 11.08 (REF2). With the Generic Drive
communication profile, the limit “Max.Ref.” is defined by parameters 99.08 (in
DTC motor control mode) or 99.07 (Scalar mode).
• External reference scaling parameters 11.04 and 11.07 are also in effect.
• The use of REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive communication profile.
For information on the scaling of the fieldbus reference, see Fieldbus reference
scaling below (ABB Drives profile) or the manual delivered with the fieldbus adapter
(Generic Drive profile).
Fieldbus control
201
*Direction determined by the sign of Direction determined by digital command,

COM.REF eg. digital input, control panel
par. 10.03 Resultant Resultant

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2
FORWARD
Max.Ref. Max.Ref.
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2 Ref. 1/2
-100% 100% -100% 100%
-163% 163% -163% 163%
–[Max.Ref.] –[Max.Ref.]

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2
REVERSE
Max.Ref. Max.Ref.
-163% 163% -163% 163%

Fieldbus -100% 100% Fieldbus -100% 100%
Ref. 1/2 Ref. 1/2

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2 Direction Command:
REQUEST FORWARD
Max.Ref. Max.Ref.
-163%
Fieldbus -100% Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2 Ref. 1/2
100% -100% 100%
163% -163% 163%
Direction Command:
REVERSE
*Direction is determined by the sign of COM.REF when

par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR is set to COMM.CW
OR
par. 11.03/11.06 EXT REFx SELECT is set to FAST COMM.
Actual Values
Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations
of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group
92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the
selected function; please refer to the chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Fieldbus control
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx
202
fieldbus adapter is used DI1 11.02
•
•
COMM.CW •
10.01 03.01
DI1 MAIN CW
Fieldbus control
30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC
DATA •
Fieldbus Words 1 … n ** 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT •
SET COMM.CW •
Adapter TABLE
Slot1 10.02
Word 1 NO MAIN
1 AI1
(Control word) DS 1 FIELD- REFERENCE
2 •
BUS DATA SET • 01.11
Word 2 3 COMM.REF •
(Speed/freq ref.*) 4 ADVANT EXT REF1
DS CW
Word 3 5 DS 2 STD 11.03
PAR 6 MODBUS REF1
3 AI1
… 7 CUSTOM- REF2 •
8 DS 3 ISED • 01.12
DS COMM.REF •
Word n 9 EXT REF2
PAR 10 98.02 11.06
n
11 DS 4
12
13
14 DS 5 PARAMETER
15 Bits
13…15 90.01 TABLE
••• Relay Outputs

(see 14.01…14.03) 10.01
NO
Fieldbus specific selectors 97
FIELD-
in Group 51** 98 DS 33 BUS
Addresses for words 3 … n in 99 AUXILIARY 10.02
ADVANT
format xxyy REFERENCE
••• STD DATA SET
xx Address MODBUS
00 yy = word no. in data set 90.02 •••
CUSTOM- REF3
table ISED Analogue Output
01 … xx = par. group REF4 AO1 (see 15.01) 89.99
99 yy = par. index 98.02 REF5
in parameter table
•••
90.03 •••
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO Analogue Output
30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT AO2 (see 15.06)
•••
* Depends on the selected motor control mode (parameter 99.04).

** See the fieldbus adapter user’s manual for more information.
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx
fieldbus adapter is used
DATA SET
TABLE
ACTUAL SIGNAL/ 1 Words 1 … n *** Fieldbus

PARAMETER 92.01 * DS 1 2 Adapter
TABLE 3 (Slot 1)
4 Word 1
MAIN DS 2 5 (STATUS WORD)
1.01 ACTUAL SIGNAL 6 Word 2
DATA SET 7 (ACT1**)
DS
92.02 ** DS 3 8 Word 3
1.02 STATUS WORD*
9 PAR 3
ACT1**
10 …
ACT2 DS 4 11
••• DS
12 Word n
PAR n
92.03 •••
3.99
97
DS 33 98
••• 99
•••
10.01 92.04 Fieldbus specific selectors
in Group 51 ***
••• AUXILIARY Addresses for words 3 … n in
ACTUAL SIGNAL format xxyy
DATA SET xx Address
••• 92.05 ACT3 00 yy = word no. in data set
table
ACT4
01 … xx = par. group
ACT5
••• 99 yy = par. index
in parameter table
99.99 92.06
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD.

** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC control) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
*** See the fieldbus adapter user’s manual for more information.
203
Fieldbus control
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx
204
DI1 11.02
•
DATA 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC •
COMM.CW •
Fieldbus control
SET 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT
TABLE 10.01 03.01
NO DI1 MAIN CW
3 words FIELD- MAIN •
DS 1 •
Fieldbus (6 bytes) BUS REFERENCE COMM.CW •
Adapter ADVANT DATA SET
10.02
(CH0) DS 2 STD
MODBUS
CW AI1
1 REF1 •
• CUSTOM- • 01.11
3 words DS 3 • ISED COMM.REF •
• REF2 EXT REF1
(6 bytes)
255 11.03
90.04 98.02
DS 4 AI1
•
• 01.12
COMM.REF •
Modbus EXT REF2
•••
Controller 11.06
40001 3 words
40002 DS 81
(6 bytes)
40003 Standard NO
Modbus FIELD-
DS 82 Bits
PARAMETER
Link BUS
13…15 90.01 TABLE
(RMBA) ADVANT
40007 (Slot 1/2) AUXILIARY Relay Outputs
3 words STD
40008 DS 83 REFERENCE (see 14.01…14.03) 10.01
(6 bytes) MODBUS
40009 DATA SET
1 CUSTOM-
•
DS 84 • ISED REF3
• 10.02
255
98.02 REF4
90.05
••• REF5
90.02 •••
Analogue Output
AO1 (see 15.01) 89.99
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO
30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT •••
90.03
Analogue Output
AO2 (see 15.06)
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx
DATA SET
TABLE
ACTUAL SIGNAL/
PARAMETER 92.01* DS 1
TABLE
MAIN 3 words
DS 2
1.01 (6 bytes) Fieldbus
ACTUAL SIGNAL
DATA SET Adapter
92.02 DS 3 (CH0)
1.02 STATUS WORD*
ACT1**
ACT2 3 words
DS 4
••• (6 bytes)
92.03 •••
3.99
Modbus
DS 81 Controller
•••
40004
3 words
DS 82 40005
10.01 (6 bytes) Standard
92.04 40006
Modbus
DS 83 Link
••• AUXILIARY
ACTUAL SIGNAL 40010
DATA SET 3 words
DS 84 40011
99.99 (6 bytes)
92.05 40012
ACT3
ACT4
•••
ACT5
92.06
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD.

** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC motor control) or 0103 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
205
Fieldbus control
206
Communication profiles
The ACS800 supports three communication profiles:
• ABB Drives communication profile
• Generic Drive communication profile.
• CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
The ABB Drives communication profile should be selected with type Nxxx fieldbus
adapter modules, and when the manufacturer-specific mode is selected (via the
PLC) with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules.
The Generic Drive profile is supported by type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules only.
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility
with Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0. This eliminates the need for
reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above-mentioned program versions
are replaced.
ABB Drives communication profile

The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
ABB DRIVES. The Control Word, Status Word, and reference scaling for the profile
are described below.
The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control Word commands are in effect when par. 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever
control location is active) is set to COMM.CW.
Fieldbus control
207
Table 5 The Control Word (Actual Signal 3.01) for the ABB Drives communication
profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 2.
Bit Name Value Enter STATE/Description
0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (22.03/22.05). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE;
proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by par. 22.07. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed
to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT_ 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable signal must be active; see
OPERATION parameter 16.01. If par. 16.01 is set to COMM.CW, this bit also activates the Run
Enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 Normal operation.
ZERO Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
ZERO 0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0Þ1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 Continue normal operation.
8 INCHING_1 1 Not in use.
1Þ0 Not in use.
9 INCHING_2 1 Not in use.
1Þ0 Not in use.
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW.
12 … Reserved
15
Fieldbus control
208
Table 6 The Status Word (Actual Signal 3.02) for the ABB Drives communication
profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 2.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.
0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.
0 OPERATION INHIBITED.
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT.
0 No fault.
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive.
0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive.
0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm.
0 No Warning/Alarm.
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance
limits).
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit
(par. 32.02). Valid in both rotation directions regardless of value of par. 32.02.
0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External Control Location EXT2 selected.
0 External Control Location EXT1 selected.
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received.
0 No External Run Enable received.
13, 14 Reserved
15 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic
channel CH0).
0 Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK.
Fieldbus control
209
SWITCH-ON
MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
ABB Drives
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
Communication
NOT READY Profile
TO SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=0)
A B C D
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
I = Input Current
(CW Bit3=0)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
READY TO f = Frequency
OPERATION SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=1)
INHIBITED (SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
inhibited
Fault
READY TO
FAULT
OPERATE (SW Bit1=1) (SW Bit3=1)
from any state

(CW Bit7=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) and SW Bit12=1)
OFF1 from any state from any state

ACTIVE (SW Bit1=0) Emergency Stop Emergency OFF
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
(CW Bit3=1
n(f)=0 / I=0 and OFF3 OFF2
SW Bit12=1)
B C D ACTIVE (SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE (SW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(CW Bit4=0)
OPERATION
C D
ENABLED (SW Bit2=1)
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
D RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
B
(CW Bit6=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
C
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
OPERATING
(SW Bit8=1)
D
Figure 2 State Machine for the ABB Drives communication profile.
Fieldbus control
210
Fieldbus reference scaling

With the ABB Drives communication profile active, fieldbus references REF1 and
REF2 are scaled as shown in the table below.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see above) is applied before scaling.
Ref. Application Range Reference Type Scaling Notes
No. Macro Used
(par. 99.02)
REF1 (any) -32768 ... Speed or Frequency -20000 = -[par. 11.05] Final reference limited by
32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.04] 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
FAST COMM) 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
0 = [par. 11.04]
20000 = [par. 11.05]
Speed or Frequency -20000 = -[par. 11.05] Final reference limited by

with FAST COMM 0=0 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20.07/20.08 [frequency].
20000 = [par. 11.05]
REF2 FACTORY, -32768 ... Speed or Freq. (not -20000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by
HAND/AUTO, 32767 with FAST COMM) -1 = -[par. 11.07] 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
or SEQ CTRL 0 = [par. 11.07] 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
20000 = [par. 11.08]
Speed or Freq. with -20000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by

FAST COMM 0=0 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20000 = [par. 11.08] 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
T CTRL or -32768 ... Torque (not with -10000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by
M/F (optional) 32767 FAST COMM) -1 = -[par. 11.07] par. 20.04.
0 = [par. 11.07]
10000 = [par. 11.08]
Torque with -10000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by

FAST COMM 0=0 par. 20.04.
10000 = [par. 11.08]
PID CTRL -32768 ... PID Reference -10000 = -[par. 11.08]

32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.07]
FAST COMM) 0 = [par. 11.07]
10000 = [par. 11.08]
PID Reference with -10000 = -[par. 11.08]

FAST COMM 0=0
10000 = [par. 11.08]
Fieldbus control
211
Generic Drive communication profile

The Generic Drive communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
GENERIC. The Generic Drive profile realises the device profile for drives – speed
control only – as defined by specific fieldbus standards such as PROFIDRIVE for
PROFIBUS, DriveCom for InterBus-S, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet, Drives and
Motion Control for CANopen, etc. Each device profile specifies its Control and Status
Words, Reference and Actual value scaling. The profiles also define Mandatory
services which are transferred to the application interface of the drive in a
standardised way.
The proper functioning of the Generic Drive profile requires that Control Word
commands are enabled by setting parameter 10.01 to COMM.CW (or par. 10.07
to 1).
Note 1: The Generic Drive communication profile requires the use of EXT1 as the
active control location.
Note 2: The Generic Drive profile is only available with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter
modules.
Table 7 Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile.
Name Description
STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the active deceleration ramp
(parameter 22.03 or 22.05).
START The drive accelerates to the set reference value according to the active acceleration ramp (par.
22.02 or 22.04). The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the reference value and the
setting of par. 10.03.
COAST STOP The drive coasts to stop, i.e. the drive stops modulating. However, this command can be
overridden by the Brake Control function, which forces the drive to decelerate to zero speed by
the active deceleration ramp.
QUICK STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed within the emergency stop deceleration time
defined by par. 22.07.
CURRENT LIMIT The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the set current limit (par. 20.03) or
STOP (CLS) torque limit (20.04), whichever is first reached. The same procedure is valid in case of a Voltage
Limit Stop (VLS).
INCHING1 With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 12 (defined by par.
12.13). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
INCHING2 With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 13 (defined by par.
12.14). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
RAMP OUT ZERO When active, forces the output of the reference function generator to zero.
RAMP HOLD When active, freezes the reference function generator output.
FORCED TRIP Trips the drive. The drive will indicate a fault “FORCED TRIP”.
RESET Resets an active fault.
Fieldbus control
212
Speed reference and actual speed scaling

Both the nominal speed reference value given via the fieldbus interface and the
actual speed value received from the drive are related to the motor nominal speed
(DTC motor control mode) or motor nominal frequency (Scalar motor control mode)
as follows:
Motor control Speed reference/Actual speed Notes
mode scaling
DTC 0% = 0 rpm The filter time of the actual

100% = [par. 99.08] rpm speed value can be adjusted
using par. 34.04.
Scalar 0% = 0 Hz –
100% = [par. 99.07] Hz
Fieldbus control
213
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile

The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
CSA 2.8/3.0. The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below.
Table 8 Control Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
Bit Name Value Description
0 Reserved
1 ENABLE 1 Enabled
0 Coast to stop
2 Reserved
3 START/STOP 0 Þ 1 Start
0 Stop according to parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION
4 Reserved
5 CNTRL_MODE 1 Select control mode 2
0 Select control mode 1
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 RESET_FAULT 0 Þ 1 Reset drive fault
9 … 15 Reserved
Table 9 Status Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.

Bit Name Value Description
0 READY 1 Ready to start
0 Initialising, or initialising error
1 ENABLE 1 Enabled
0 Coast to stop
2 Reserved
3 RUNNING 1 Running with selected reference
0 Stopped
4 Reserved
5 REMOTE 1 Drive in Remote mode
0 Drive in Local mode
6 Reserved
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive at reference
0 Drive not at reference
8 FAULTED 1 A fault is active
0 No active faults
9 WARNING 1 A warning is active
0 No active warnings
10 LIMIT 1 Drive at a limit
0 Drive at no limit
11 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
214
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words

Table 10 The Auxiliary Status Word (Actual Signal 3.03).
Bit Name Description
0 Reserved
1 OUT OF WINDOW Speed difference is out of the window (in speed

control)*.
2 Reserved
3 MAGNETIZED Flux has been formed in the motor.
4 Reserved
5 SYNC RDY Position counter synchronised.
6 1 START NOT Drive has not been started after changing the motor
DONE parameters in group 99.
7 IDENTIF RUN Motor ID Run successfully completed.

DONE
8 START INHIBITION Prevention of unexpected start-up active.
9 LIMITING Control at a limit. See actual signal 3.04 LIMIT

WORD 1 below.
10 TORQ CONTROL Torque reference is followed*.
11 ZERO SPEED Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero

speed limit (4% of synchronous speed).
12 INTERNAL SPEED Internal speed feedback followed.

FB
13 M/F COMM ERR Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication

error*.
14 … 15 Reserved
*See Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFY 58962180 [English]).
Fieldbus control
215
Table 11 Limit Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.04).

Bit Name Active Limit
0 TORQ MOTOR LIM Pull-out limit.
1 SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM Speed control torque min. limit.
2 SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM Speed control torque max. limit.
3 TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM User-defined current limit.
4 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM Internal current limit.
5 TORQ_MIN_LIM Any torque min. limit.
6 TORQ_MAX_LIM Any torque max. limit.
7 TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM Torque reference min. limit.
8 TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM Torque reference max. limit.
9 FLUX_MIN_LIM Flux reference min. limit.
10 FREQ_MIN_LIMIT Speed/Frequency min. limit.
11 FREQ_MAX_LIMIT Speed/Frequency max. limit.
12 DC_UNDERVOLT DC undervoltage limit.
13 DC_OVERVOLT DC overvoltage limit.
14 TORQUE LIMIT Any torque limit.
15 FREQ_LIMIT Any speed/frequency limit.
Table 12 Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.05).

0 SHORT CIRC For the possible causes and remedies, see the
chapter Fault tracing.
1 OVERCURRENT
2 DC OVERVOLT
3 ACS 800 TEMP
4 EARTH FAULT
5 THERMISTOR
6 MOTOR TEMP
7 SYSTEM_FAULT A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word

(Actual Signal 3.07).
8 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies, see the

9 OVERFREQ
10 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
216
Table 13 Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 3.06).

0 SUPPLY PHASE For the possible causes and remedies, see

the chapter Fault tracing.
1 NO MOT DATA
2 DC UNDERVOLT
3 Reserved
4 RUN DISABLED For the possible causes and remedies, see

5 ENCODER FLT
6 I/O COMM
7 CTRL B TEMP (4100)
8 EXTERNAL FLT
9 OVER SWFREQ Switching overfrequency fault.
10 AI < MIN FUNC For the possible causes and remedies, see
11 PPCC LINK
12 COMM MODULE
13 PANEL LOSS
14 MOTOR STALL
15 MOTOR PHASE
Fieldbus control
217
Table 14 The System Fault Word (Actual Signal 3.07).

0 FLT (F1_7) Factory default parameter file error.
1 USER MACRO User Macro file error.
2 FLT (F1_4) FPROM operating error.
3 FLT (F1_5) FPROM data error.
4 FLT (F2_12) Internal time level 2 overflow.
8 FLT (F2_16) State machine overflow.
9 FLT (F2_17) Application program execution error.
10 FLT (F2_18) Application program execution error.
11 FLT (F2_19) Illegal instruction.
12 FLT (F2_3) Register stack overflow.
13 FLT (F2_1) System stack overflow.
14 FLT (F2_0) System stack underflow.
15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
218
Table 15 Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.08).

0 START INHIBIT For the possible causes and remedies, see

1 Reserved
2 THERMISTOR For the possible causes and remedies, see

3 MOTOR TEMP
4 ACS 800 TEMP
5 ENCODER ERR
6 T MEAS ALM
7 … 11 Reserved
12 COMM MODULE For the possible causes and remedies, see

13 Reserved
14 EARTH FAULT For the possible causes and remedies, see

15 Reserved
Table 16 Alarm Word 2 (Actual Signal 3.09).

0 Reserved
1 UNDERLOAD (ff6A) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
2, 3 Reserved
4 ENCODER For the possible causes and remedies, see the

5, 6 Reserved
7 POWFAIL FILE Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF.
8 ALM (OS_17) Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF.
9 MOTOR STALL (7121) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
10 AI < MIN FUNC (8110)
11, 12 Reserved
13 PANEL LOSS (5300) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
14, 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
219
Table 17 The INT Fault Info Word (Actual Signal 3.12). The Word includes
information on the location of faults PPCC LINK, OVERCURRENT, EARTH FAULT
and SHORT CIRCUIT (see Table 12 Fault Word 1, Table 13 Fault Word 2, and the
0 INT 1 FLT INT 1 board fault*
1 INT 2 FLT INT 2 board fault *
4 PBU FLT PBU board fault *
5 - Not in use
6 U-PH SC U Phase U upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
7 U-PH SC L Phase U lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
8 V-PH SC U Phase V upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
9 V-PH SC L Phase V lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
10 W-PH SC U Phase W upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
11 W-PH SC L Phase W lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
12 ... 15 Not in use
* In use only with parallel inverters. INT 0 is connected to PBU CH1, INT 1 to CH2 etc.
Inverter Block Diagram
RMIO Motor Control and I/O Board

Upper-leg IGBTs INT Main Circuit Interface Board
RMIO INT PBU PPCS Link Branching Unit
Lower-leg IGBTs
U V W
Inverter Unit Block Diagram (two to four parallel Inverters)
PBU CH3
RMIO
CH1 CH2
1 2 3
INT INT INT
U V W U V W U V W ...
Fieldbus control
220
Table 18 Auxiliary Status Word 3 (Actual Signal 3.13)

0 REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction.
1 EXT CTRL External control is selected.
2 REF 2 SEL Reference 2 is selected.
3 CONST SPEED A Constant Speed (1…15) is selected.
4 STARTED The drive has received a Start command.
5 USER 2 SEL User Macro 2 has been loaded.
6 OPEN BRAKE The Open Brake command is ON. See group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL.
7 LOSS OF REF The reference has been lost.
8 STOP DI STATUS The state of the interlock input on the RMIO board.
9 … 15 Reserved
Table 19 Auxiliary Status Word 4 (Actual Signal 3.14)

0 SPEED 1 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision

limit 1. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
1 SPEED 2 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision

limit 2. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
2 CURRENT LIM Motor current has exceeded or fallen below the set
supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
3 REF 1 LIM Reference 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set

4 REF 2 LIM Reference 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set

5 TORQUE 1 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the
TORQUE1 supervision limit. See group 32
SUPERVISION.
6 TORQUE 2 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the
TORQUE2 supervision limit. See group 32
SUPERVISION.
7 ACT 1 LIM PID controller actual value 1 has exceeded or fallen below
the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
8 ACT 2 LIM PID controller actual value 2 has exceeded or fallen below
the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
9 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
221
Table 20 Fault Word 4 (Actual Signal 3.15)

0 Reserved
1 MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see

2 MOTOR 2 TEMP
3 BRAKE ACKN
4 … 15 Reserved
Table 21 Alarm Word 4 (Actual Signal 3.16)

0 Reserved
1 MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see

2 MOTOR 2 TEMP
3 BRAKE ACKN
4 SLEEP MODE
5 … 15 Reserved
Table 22 Fault Word 5 (Actual Signal 3.17)

0 BR BROKEN For the possible causes and remedies, see

1 BR WIRING
2 BC SHORT CIR
3 BR OVERHEAT
4 … 15 Reserved
Table 23 Alarm Word 5 (Actual Signal 3.18)

0 REPLACE FAN For the possible causes and remedies, see

1 SYNCRO SPEED
2 BR OVERHEAT
3 Reserved
4 IN CHOKE TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see

5 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
222
Table 24 INT board init fault (Actual Signal 3.19)

0 FAULT Wrong EPLD version
1 FAULT Wrong AINT board revision
2 FAULT du/dt limitation hardware failure
3 FAULT Current measurement scaling error
4 FAULT Voltage measurement scaling error
5 … 15 Not in use
Fieldbus control
223
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the use of analogue extension module RAIO as an speed
reference interface of ACS800 equipped with Standard Application Program.
Speed control through the analogue extension module

Two variants are described:
• Bipolar Input in Basic Speed Control
• Bipolar Input in Joystick Mode
Only the use of a bipolar input (± signal range) is covered here. The use of unipolar
input corresponds to that of a standard unipolar input when:
• the settings described below are done, and
• the communication between the module and the drive is activated by parameter
98.06.
Basic checks
Ensure the drive is:
• installed and commissioned, and
• the external start and stop signals are connected.
Ensure the extension module:
• settings are adjusted. (See below.)
• is installed and reference signal is connected to AI1.
• is connected to the drive.
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive

• Set the module node address to 5 (not required if installed to the option slot of the
drive).
• Select the signal type for the module input AI1 (switch).
• Select the operation mode (unipolar/bipolar) of the module input (switch).
• Ensure the drive parameter settings correspond to the mode of the module inputs
(parameter 98.13 and 98.14).
• Set the drive parameters (see the appropriate subsection on the following pages).

224
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control

The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed reference
received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of the drive).
Parameter Setting
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE RAIO-SLOT1
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC BIPO AI5
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI5
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM minREF1
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM maxREF1
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 minAI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 maxAI5
13.18 SCALE AI5 100%
13.20 INVERT AI5 NO
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION (2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module .
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST1)
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST1)
-scaled
maxREF1

1) For
the negative speed range, the drive must receive a separate reverse command.
2)
Set if supervision of living zero is used.

225
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode

The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed and
direction reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of
the drive).
Parameter Setting
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE RAIO-SLOT1
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC BIPO AI5
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI5/JOYST
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM minREF1
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM maxREF1
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 minAI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 maxAI5
13.18 SCALE AI5 100%
13.20 INVERT AI5 NO
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION (2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module in joystick mode.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST1)
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST1)
-scaled
maxREF1

1) Enables the use of both positive and negative speed range.

2)
Set if supervision of living zero is used.

226

227
Chapter overview
This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For
the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters.

Term Definition
PB Profibus equivalent for drive parameters communicating through

the NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on

the panel and the integer used in serial communication.
Absolute Maximum Frequency Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit
is greater than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum Speed Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the
minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit.
Fieldbus addresses
Modbus and Modbus Plus address: 4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number.
Type Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA, RIBA, etc.): See the appropriate user’s
manual.
Profibus-DP NPBA-12 module: See the tables below.
Interbus-S NIBA-01 module:
• xxyy · 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal (xxyy = drive parameter number)
• Example: The index for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 = 351D.

228
Actual signals
Index Name Short name FbEq Unit Range PB
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE PROC VAR 1=1 According to 1
parameter 34.02
01.02 SPEED SPEED -20000 = -100% rpm 2
20000 = 100% of
motor absolute max.
speed
01.03 FREQUENCY FREQ -100 = -1 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 3
Hz
01.04 CURRENT CURRENT 10 = 1 A A 4
01.05 TORQUE TORQUE -10000 = -100% % 5
10000 = 100% of
motor nominal torque
01.06 POWER POWER 1000 = -100% 1000 % 6
= 100% of motor
nominal power
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V DC BUS V 1=1V V 7
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE MAINS V 1=1V V 8
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUT VOLT 1=1V V 9
01.10 ACS800 TEMP ACS TEMP 1 = 1 °C C 10
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 EXT REF1 1 = 1 rpm rpm 11
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 EXT REF2 0 = 0% 10000 = % 12
100% 1)
01.13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC (1,2) LOCAL; (3) LOCAL; EXT1; EXT2 13
EXT1; (4) EXT2
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER OP HOURS 1=1h h 14
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS KW HOURS 1 = 100 kWh kWh 15
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL OUT 0 = 0% 10000 = % 16
100%
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS DI6-1 17
01.18 AI1 [V] AI1 [V] 1 = 0.001 V V 18
01.19 AI2 [mA] AI2 [mA] 1 =0.001 mA mA 19
01.20 AI3 [mA] AI3 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 20
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS RO3-1 21
01.22 AO1 [mA] AO1 [mA] 1 =0.001 mA mA 22
01.23 AO2 [mA] AO2 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 23
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 ACT VAL1 0 = 0% 10000 = % 24
100%
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 ACT VAL2 0 = 0% 10000 = % 25
100%
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION CONT DEV -10000 = -100% % 26
10000 = 100%
01.27 APPLICATION MACRO MACRO 1…7 According to 27
parameter 99.02
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO1 1 = 0.001 mA mA 28
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA] EXT AO2 1 = 0.001 mA mA 29
01.30 PP 1 TEMP PP 1 TEM 1 = 1 °C °C 30
01.31 PP 2 TEMP PP 2 TEM 1 = 1 °C °C 31
01.32 PP 3 TEMP PP 3 TEM 1 = 1 °C °C 32
01.33 PP 4 TEMP PP 4 TEM 1 = 1 °C °C 33
01.34 ACTUAL VALUE ACT V 0 = 0% 10000 = % 34
100%
01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP M 1 TEMP 1 = 1 °C °C 35
01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP M 2 TEMP 1 = 1 °C °C 36
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST MOTOR TE 1 = 1 °C °C 37
01.38 AI5 [mA] AI5 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 38

229

01.39 AI6 [mA] AI6 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 39
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS DI7..12 1=1 40
01.41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO 1=1 41
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED 1=1 % 42
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME MOTOR RUN TIME 1 = 10 h h 43
01.44 FAN ON-TIME FAN TIME 1 = 10 h h 44
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP CTRL B T 1 = 1 °C °C 45
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2 S REF 2 0 = 0% 20000 = rpm 51
02.02 SPEED REF 3 S REF 3 100% of motor rpm 52
absolute max. speed
02.09 TORQUE REF 2 T REF 2 0 = 0% 10000 = % 59
02.10 TORQUE REF 3 T REF 3 100% of motor % 60
02.13 TORQ USED REF T USED R nominal torque % 63
02.14 FLUX REF FLUX REF 0 = 0% 10000 = % 64
100%
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED ES 0 = 0% 20000 = rpm 67
02.18 SPEED MEASURED SPEED ME 100% of motor rpm 68
absolute max. speed
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS 2)
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD MAIN CW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 76
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD MAIN SW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 77
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD AUX SW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 78
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 LIMIT W1 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 79
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT W1 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 80
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT SYS FLT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 82
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM W1 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 83
03.11 FOLLOWER MCW FOLL MCW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 86
03.12 INT FAULT INFO INT FAUL 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 87
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 AUX SW 3 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 88
03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 AUX SW 4 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 89
3.19 INT INIT FAULT INT INIT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 94
3.20 LATEST FAULT LAST FLT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 95
3.21 2.LATEST FAULT 2.FAULT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 96
3.25 LATEST WARNING LAST WRN 0 ... 65535 (Decimal)
3.26 2.LATEST WARNING 2.WARN 0 ... 65535 (Decimal)
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01 AI1 SCALED AI1 SCAL 20000 = 10 v 0 … 20000 -
09.02 AI2 SCALED AI2 SCAL 20000 = 20 mA 0 … 20000 -
09.06 DS MCW DS MCW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) -
09.07 MASTER REF1 M REF1 -32768 … 32767 -32768 … 32767 -
09.08 MASTER REF2 M REF2 -32768 … 32767 -32768 … 32767 -
09.09 AUX DS VAL1 AUX DSV1 -32768 … 32767 -32768 … 32767 -

230

09.10 AUX DS VAL2 AUX DSV2 -32768 … 32767 -32768 … 32767 -
09.11 AUX DS VAL3 AUX DSV3 -32768 … 32767 -32768 … 32767 -
1) Percent of motor max. speed / nominal torque / max. process reference (depending on the ACS800
macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in the chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of
Actual Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430 [English]).
Parameters
Index Name/Selection FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T-CTRL SEQ CTRL PB
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 (US: DI1,2 DI1 DI1,2 DI1,2 101
DI1P,DI2P)
10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR NOT SEL DI6,5 DI6 DI1,2 NOT SEL 102
10.03 REF DIRECTION FORWARD REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST REQUEST 103
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR 0 0 0 0 104
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR 0 0 0 0 0 105
10.06 JOG SPEED SELECT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 106
10.07 NET CONTROL 0 0 0 0 0 107
10.08 NET REFERENCE 0 0 0 0 0 108
11 REFERENCE SELECT
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) 126
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1 DI3 DI3 DI3 EXT1 127
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 128
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 129
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 130
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT KEYPAD AI2 AI1 AI2 AI1 131
11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 132
11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 133
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR 0 0 0 0 0 134
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 135
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 136
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL DI5,6 DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4,5,6 151
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 152
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 176
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 177
13.03 SCALE AI1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 178
13.04 FILTER AI1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 179
13.05 INVERT AI1 NO NO NO NO NO 180
13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 181

231

13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 182
13.08 SCALE AI2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 183
13.09 FILTER AI2 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 184
13.13 SCALE AI3 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 188
13.14 FILTER AI3 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 189
13.18 SCALE AI5 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 193
13.19 FILTER AI5 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 194
13.23 SCALE AI6 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 198
13.24 FILTER AI6 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 199
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT READY READY READY READY READY 201
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING 202
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) 203
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 204
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 205
14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 READY READY READY READY READY 210
14.11 DIO MOD1 RO2 RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING 211
14.12 DIO MOD2 RO1 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 212
14.13 DIO MOD2 RO2 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 213
14.14 DIO MOD3 RO1 REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL 214
14.15 DIO MOD3 RO2 AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED 215
14.16 RO PTR1 0 0 0 0 0 216
14.17 RO PTR2 0 0 0 0 0 217
14.18 RO PTR3 0 0 0 0 0 218
14.19 RO PTR4 0 0 0 0 0 219
14.20 RO PTR5 0 0 0 0 0 220
14.21 RO PTR6 0 0 0 0 0 221
14.22 RO PTR7 0 0 0 0 0 222
14.23 RO PTR8 0 0 0 0 0 223
14.24 RO PTR9 0 0 0 0 0 224
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 226
15.02 INVERT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO 227
15.03 MINIMUM AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 228
15.04 FILTER AO1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 229
15.05 SCALE AO1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 230
15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 231
15.07 INVERT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO 232
15.08 MINIMUM AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 233
15.09 FILTER AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 234
15.10 SCALE AO2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 235
15.11 AO1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 236
15.12 AO2 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 237

232

16 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS
16.01 RUN ENABLE YES YES DI5 DI6 YES 251
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 252
16.03 PASS CODE 0 0 0 0 0 253
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 254
16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 255
16.06 LOCAL LOCK OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 256
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE 257
16.08 RUN ENA PTR 0 0 0 0 0 258
16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY INTERNAL 24V INTERNAL 24V INTERNAL 24V INTERNAL 24V INTERNAL 24V 259
20 LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 351
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 352
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT type specific type specific type specific type specific type specific 353
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 354
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL ON ON ON ON ON 355
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL ON ON ON ON ON 356
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz 357
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 358
20.11 P MOTORING LIM 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 361
20.12 P GENERATING LIM -300% -300% -300% -300% -300% 362
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX 363
TORQ TORQ TORQ TORQ TORQ
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 364
20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 365
20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 366
20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 367
20.18 TORQ MIN PTR 0 0 0 0 0 368
20.19 TORQ MAX PTR 0 0 0 0 0 369
20.20 MIN AI SCALE 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 370
20.21 MAX AI SCALE 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 371
21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 376
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 377
21.03 STOP FUNCTION COAST COAST COAST COAST RAMP 378
21.04 DC HOLD NO NO NO NO NO 379
21.05 DC HOLD SPEED 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 380
21.06 DC HOLD CURR 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 381
21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP 382
21.08 SCALAR FLY START NO NO NO NO NO 383
21.09 START INTRL FUNC OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP 384
21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 385
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL DI4 ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1 DI5 DI3 401
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 402
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 403
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 404
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 405
22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 406
22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 407
22.08 ACC PTR 0 0 0 0 0 408
22.09 DEC PTR 0 0 0 0 0 409
23 SPEED CTRL
23.01 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 426
23.02 INTEGRATION TIME 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 427
23.03 DERIVATION TIME 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 428
23.04 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.12 s 429
23.05 SLIP GAIN 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 430

233

23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN NO NO NO NO NO 431
24 TORQUE CTRL
24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s 451
24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s 452
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 476
25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 477
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 478
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION NO NO NO NO NO 501
26.02 FLUX BRAKING YES YES YES YES YES 502
26.03 IR-COMPENSATION 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 503
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN NO NO NO NO NO 504
26.06 FLUX REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 506
27 BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO
27.03 BR RESISTANCE
27.04 BR THERM TCONST 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s
27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW
27.06 BC CTRL MODE AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 601
30.02 PANEL LOSS FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 602
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 603
30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT NO NO NO NO NO 604
30.05 MOT THERM P MODE DTC/USER DTC/USER DTC/USER DTC/USER DTC/USER 605
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 606
30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 607
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 608
30.09 BREAK POINT 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 609
30.10 STALL FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 610
30.11 STALL FREQ HI 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 611
30.12 STALL TIME 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 612
30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO 613
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 614
30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 1 1 1 1 615
30.16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO NO NO NO NO 616
30.17 EARTH FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 617
30.18 COMM FLT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 618
30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 619
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO 620
30.21 AUX DS T-OUT 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 621
30.22 IO CONFIG FUNC WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 622
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 0 0 0 0 626
31.02 TRIAL TIME 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 627
31.03 DELAY TIME 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 628
31.04 OVERCURRENT NO NO NO NO NO 629
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO NO 630
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO 631
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN NO NO NO NO NO 632

234

32 SUPERVISION
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 651
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 652
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 653
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 654
32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 655
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT 0 0 0 0 0 656
32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 657
32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 658
32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 659
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 660
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 661
32.12 REF1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 662
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 663
32.14 REF2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 664
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 665
32.16 ACT1 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 666
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 667
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 668
33 INFORMATION
33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) 676
33.02 APPL SW VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) 677
33.03 TEST DATE (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) 678
34 PROCESS VARIABLE
34.01 SCALE 100 100 100 100 100 701
34.02 P VAR UNIT % % % % % 702
34.03 SELECT P VAR 142 142 142 142 142 703
34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 704
34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 705
34.06 RESET RUN TIME NO NO NO NO NO 706
35 MOT TEMP MEAS
35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 726
35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110 727
35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130 728
35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 729
35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110 730
35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130 731
35.07 MOT MOD COMPENSAT YES YES YES YES YES 732
40 PID CONTROL
40.01 PID GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 851
40.02 PID INTEG TIME 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 852
40.03 PID DERIV TIME 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 853
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 854
40.05 ERROR VALUE INV NO NO NO NO NO 855
40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 856
40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 857
40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 858
40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 0 0 0 0 859
40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 860
40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 861
40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 862
40.13 PID INTEGRATION ON ON ON ON ON 863
40.14 TRIM MODE OFF OFF OFF OFF 864
40.15 TRIM REF SEL AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 865
40.16 TRIM REFERENCE 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 866
40.17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 867
40.18 TRIM SELECTION SPEED TRIM 868
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 869

235

40.20 SLEEP SELECTION not visible not visible OFF not visible not visible 870
40.21 SLEEP LEVEL not visible not visible 0.0 rpm not visible not visible 871
40.22 SLEEP DELAY not visible not visible 0.0 s not visible not visible 872
40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL not visible not visible 0% not visible not visible 873
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY not visible not visible 0.0 s not visible not visible 874
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 875
40.26 PID MINIMUM -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% 876
40.27 PID MAXIMUM 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 877
42 BRAKE CONTROL
42.01 BRAKE CTRL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm -
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT -
42.07 START TORQ REF SEL NO NO NO NO NO -
42.08 START TORQ REF 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% -
42.09 EXTEND RUN T 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
50 ENCODER MODULE
50.01 PULSE NR 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 1001
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- 1002
50.03 ENCODER FAULT WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 1003
50.04 ENCODER DELAY 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1004
50.05 ENCODER DDCS CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 1005
CHANNEL
50.06 SPEED FB SEL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL 1006
51 COMM MOD DATA 1026
...
52 STANDARD MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1 1 1 1 1 1051
52.02 BAUDRATE 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 1052
52.03 PARITY ODD ODD ODD ODD ODD 1053
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER
60.01 MASTER LINK MODE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 1195
60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR not visible not visible not visible TORQUE not visible 1196
60.03 WINDOW SEL ON not visible not visible not visible NO not visible 1167
60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible 1198
60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible 1199
60.06 DROOP RATE 0 0 0 0 0 1200
60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 202 202 202 202 202 1201
60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 213 213 213 213 213 1202
70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1375
70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1376
70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 1377
70.04 CH0 DDCS HW CONN RING RING RING RING RING 1378
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT 1609
83.02 EDIT COMMAND NO NO NO NO NO 1610
83.03 EDIT BLOCK 0 0 0 0 0 1611
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 1612
83.05 PASSCODE 0 0 0 0 0 1613
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
84.01 STATUS 1628
84.02 FAULTED PAR 1629
84.05 BLOCK1 NO NO NO NO NO 1630
84.06 INPUT1 0 0 0 0 0 1631

236

84.07 INPUT2 0 0 0 0 0 1632
84.08 INPUT3 0 0 0 0 0 1633
84.09 OUTPUT 0 0 0 0 0 1634
… … …
1644
84.79 OUTPUT 0 0 0 0 0 -
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1 0 0 0 0 0 1645
85.02 CONSTANT2 0 0 0 0 0 1646
85.03 CONSTANT3 0 0 0 0 0 1647
85.04 CONSTANT4 0 0 0 0 0 1648
85.05 CONSTANT5 0 0 0 0 0 1649
85.06 CONSTANT6 0 0 0 0 0 1650
85.07 CONSTANT7 0 0 0 0 0 1651
85.08 CONSTANT8 0 0 0 0 0 1652
85.09 CONSTANT9 0 0 0 0 0 1653
85.10 CONSTANT10 0 0 0 0 0 1654
85.11 STRING1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 1655
90 D SET REC ADDR
90.01 AUX DS REF3 0 0 0 0 0 1735
90.02 AUX DS REF4 0 0 0 0 0 1736
90.03 AUX DS REF5 0 0 0 0 0 1737
90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 1 1 1 1 1 1738
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE 3 3 3 3 3 1739
92 D SET TR ADDR
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD 302 302 302 302 302 1771
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 102 102 102 102 102 1772
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 105 105 105 105 105 1773
92.04 AUX DS ACT3 305 305 305 305 305 1774
92.05 AUX DS ACT4 308 308 308 308 308 1775
92.06 AUX DS ACT5 306 306 306 306 306 1776
96 EXTERNAL AO
96.01 EXT AO1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 1843
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO 1844
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1845
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 1846
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 1847
96.06 EXT AO2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1848
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO 1849
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1850
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 1851
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 1852
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1853
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1854
98 OPTION MODULES
98.01 ENCODER MODULE NO NO NO NO NO 1901
98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK NO NO NO NO NO 1902
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 NO NO NO NO NO 1903
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE NO NO NO NO NO 1906
98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES 1907
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 1909
98.10 DI/O EXT2 DI FUNC DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 1910

237

98.11 DI/O EXT3 DI FUNC DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 1911
98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP NO NO NO NO NO 1912
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI5 1913
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC UNIPOLAR AI6 UNIPOLAR AI6 UNIPOLAR AI6 UNIPOLAR AI6 UNIPOLAR AI6 1914
99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 1926
99.02 APPLICATION MACRO FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T CTRL SEQ CTRL 1927
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE NO NO NO NO NO 1928
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC 1929
99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 1930
99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 1931
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 1932
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1933
99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 1934
99.10 MOTOR ID RUN MODE ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN 1935
99.11 DEVICE NAME 1936

238

239
Chapter overview
Diagram Related
diagrams
Reference control chain, sheet 1 Continued on

Valid when FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL or T CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02). sheet 2
Reference control chain, sheet 1 Continued on

Valid when PID CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02). sheet 2
Reference control chain, sheet 2 Continued from

Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02). sheet 1
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable Start Interlock -

Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02).
Handling of Reset and On/Off -

Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02).

240
Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and

T CTRL macros (continued on the next page …)

241
… continued from the previous page

242
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next
page …)

243

244
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page …)

245

246
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock

247
Handling of Reset and On/Off

The diagram below is a detail to the previous diagram (Handling of Start, Stop, Run
Enable and Start Interlock).

248

3AFE 64527592 REV D / EN
ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Drives and Power Electronics
P.O. Box 184 16250 West Glendale Drive
FIN-00381 HELSINKI New Berlin, WI 53151
FINLAND USA
Telephone +358 10 22 211 Telephone 262 785-3200
Telefax +358 10 22 22681 800 243-4384
Internet http://www.abb.com Telefax 262 780-5135
ABB Drives User’s Manual
Modbus Adapter Module

RMBA-01
Modbus Adapter Module
RMBA-01
User’s Manual
3AFE 64498851 REV A EN
EFFECTIVE: 1.3.2002

Safety instructions
Overview This chapter states the general safety instructions that

must be followed when installing and operating the
RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module.
The material in this chapter must be studied before
attempting any work on, or with, the unit.
In addition to the safety instructions given below, read
the complete safety instructions of the specific drive you
are working on.
General safety WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance

instructions work on the drive should be carried out by qualified
electricians only.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly
earthed.
Do not attempt any work on a powered drive. After
switching off the mains, always allow the intermediate
circuit capacitors 5 minutes to discharge before working
on the frequency converter, the motor or the motor
cable. It is good practice to check (with a voltage
indicating instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged
before beginning work.
The motor cable terminals of the drive are at a
dangerously high voltage when mains power is applied,
regardless of motor operation.
There can be dangerous voltages inside the drive from
external control circuits even when the drive mains
power is shut off. Exercise appropriate care when
working on the unit. Neglecting these instructions can
cause physical injury or death.
RMBA-01 User’s manual iii

Safety instructions
iv RMBA-01 User’s manual

Table of contents
Safety instructions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Table of contents
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What this manual contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Terms used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
RMBA-01 Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Broadcast write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
4XXXX register area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Chapter 2 – Overview
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Introduction to Modbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
The RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Warranty and liability information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Chapter 3 – Installation
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Terminal designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Bus termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
RMBA-01 User’s manual v

Table of contents
Chapter 4 – Programming
Configuring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Modbus connection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Control locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chapter 5 – Communication
Register read and write. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Register mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Data update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Chapter 6 – Fault tracing

Installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Drive setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
PLC programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Appendix A – Technical data

RMBA-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Fieldbus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
vi RMBA-01 User’s manual

Intended The manual is intended for the people who are

audience responsible for commissioning and using a RMBA-01
Modbus Adapter module with the ACS 800 drive. The
reader is expected to have a basic knowledge of
electrical fundamentals, electrical wiring practices and
how to operate the drive.
Before you start It is assumed that the drive is installed and ready to
operate before starting the installation of the extension
module.
In addition to conventional installation tools, have the
drive manuals available during the installation as they
contain important information not included in this
manual. The drive manuals are referred to at various
points of this document.
RMBA-01 User’s manual 1-1

What this manual This manual contains information on the wiring,

contains configuration and use of the RMBA-01 module.
Safety instructions are featured in the first few pages
of this manual.
Chapter 2 – Overview contains a short description of
the RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module, a delivery
checklist and warranty information.
Chapter 3 – Installation contains instructions for
module hardware settings, mounting and cabling.
Chapter 4 – Programming explains how to program
the master station and the drive before the
communication through the adapter module can be
started.
Chapter 5 – Communication contains a description of
how data is transmitted through the RMBA-01 module.
Chapter 6 – Fault tracing explains fault tracing and the
LED indications of the RMBA-01 module.
Appendix A contains technical data.
1-2 RMBA-01 User’s manual

Terms used in
this manual
Parameter A parameter is an operating instruction for the drive.

Parameters can be read and programmed with the drive
control panel, or through the RMBA-01 module.
Communication Communication module is a parameter name/
module parameter selection name for a device (e.g. a fieldbus
adapter) through which the drive is connected to an
external serial communication network (e.g. a fieldbus).
The communication with the communication module is
activated with a drive parameter.
RMBA-01 Modbus The RMBA-01 Adapter module is one of the optional
Adapter module fieldbus adapter modules available for ACS 800 drives.
The RMBA-01 is a device through which an ACS 800
drive is connected to a Modbus serial communication
bus.
Broadcast write Modbus network allows the Modbus master to perform
a write to every slave station at the same time. This
write is called Broadcast. This service does not give
verification back to the master that the value has been
received by each one of the slaves properly.
4XXXX register area Modicon PLCs have a signed integer data table area,
which is used for analogue output modules and for
storing temporary or set-point values. These registers
are in the address area starting from 40001. The last
register address available on PLCs depends on the
available memory, but is 49999 at most. The drive
simulates this area by providing a read and write
access to its parameters through this register address
area.


Overview This chapter contains a short description of the Modbus

protocol and the RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module, a
delivery checklist, and warranty information.
Introduction to Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. The

Modbus Modbus protocol does not specify the physical
interface. Typical physical interfaces are RS-232 and
RS-485. The RMBA-01 provides a galvanically-isolated
RS-485 interface.
Modbus is designed for integration with Modicon PLCs
or other automation devices, and the services closely
correspond to the PLC architecture. The RMBA-01
supports the RTU protocol only.
The RMBA-01 The RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module is an optional

Modbus Adapter device for ABB drives which enables the connection of
module the drive to a Modbus system. The drive is considered
as a slave on the Modbus network. Through the
RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module it is possible to:
• Give control commands to the drive
(Start, Stop, Run enable, etc.)
• Feed a motor speed or torque reference to the drive
• Give a process actual value or a process reference to
the PID controller of the drive
• Read status information and actual values from the
drive
• Change drive parameter values
• Reset a drive fault

The Modbus commands and services supported by the

RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module are discussed in
Chapter 5. Please refer to the user documentation of
the drive as to which commands are supported by the
drive.
Master
station
Slave Fixing screw (GND)
stations Module status LEDs
ABB Drive
RMBA-01
MODBUS ADAPTER
GND
INIT
RXD
TXD
WD/
ABB Drive
X1
S1
CHASSIS
TERM.
SHLD
GND
BUS
B+
A-
1234
Fixing screw Bus termination switch (S1)

(CHASSIS)
Terminal block for bus
cable connection (X1)
Figure 2-1 The construction of the Modbus link and the RMBA-01 Adapter
module layout.
Delivery check The option package for the RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter
module contains:
• RMBA-01 module
• Two screws (M3×8 mm)
• This manual.

Compatibility The RMBA-01 is compatible with ACS 800 Standard

Application Program version ASXR7000 or later.
Warranty and The warranty for your ABB drive and options covers
liability manufacturing defects. The manufacturer carries no
information responsibility for damage due to transport or unpacking.
In no event and under no circumstances shall the
manufacturer be liable for damages and failures due to
misuse, abuse, improper installation, or abnormal
conditions of temperature, dust, or corrosives, or
failures due to operation above rated capacities. Nor
shall the manufacturer ever be liable for consequential
and incidental damages.
The period of manufacturer's warranty is 12 months,
and not more than 18 months, from the date of delivery.
Extended warranty may be available with certified start-
up. Contact your local distributor for details.
Your local ABB Drives company or distributor may have
a different warranty period, which is specified in their
sales terms, conditions, and warranty terms.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive,
contact your local distributor or ABB Drives office.
The technical data and specifications are valid at the
time of printing. ABB reserves the right to subsequent
alterations.


WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in this

guide and in the ACS 800 Hardware Manual.
Mounting The RMBA-01 is to be inserted into the position marked

SLOT 1 on the drive. The module is held in place with
plastic retaining clips and two screws. The screws also
provide the earthing of the I/O cable shield connected to
the module, and interconnect the GND signals of the
module and the RMIO board.
On installation of the module, the signal and power
connection to the drive is automatically made through a
38-pin connector.
The module can alternatively be mounted on a DIN rail-
mountable AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter (not available
at the time of publication).
Mounting procedure:
1. Insert the module carefully into SLOT 1 on the
RMIO board until the retaining clips lock the module
into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
3. Set the bus termination switch of the module to the
required position.
Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation
of the module.

Wiring See the Hardware Manual of the drive for cable routing
information.
Arrange the bus cables as far away from the motor
cables as possible. Avoid parallel runs. Use bushings at
cable entries.
The terminal block (X1) on the RMBA-01 is of the
detachable type for easy connection.
The Modbus cable shield may be directly earthed at
one node only. At other nodes, the cable shield should
be earthed via an RC circuit.
Terminal
designations X1
1 2 3 4
Bus termination switch (S1)
Figure 3-1 RMBA-01 terminal designations
X1 Marking Description
1 A Data negative (Conductor 1 in twisted pair).
2 B Data positive (Conductor 2 in twisted pair).
Data ground (Conductor 3 in a three-wire

system). Used in a three-wire system as a
common reference potential for all devices on
3 DG
the bus. Three-wire connection is highly
recommended as it improves noise immunity.
See the wiring diagrams below.
Modbus cable shield AC earthing (via an RC
4 SHLD
circuit to the frame).

Wiring Diagrams
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
X1 X1
SHLD
SHLD
GND
DG
DG
B
A
Modbus
Master RMBA-01 RMBA-01
[Station 1]
... [Station N]
Termination: ON Termination: OFF Termination: ON
Figure 3-2 Two-wire connection
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
X1 X1
SHLD
SHLD
GND
DG
DG
B
Modbus
Master RMBA-01 RMBA-01
[Station 1]
... [Station N]
Termination: ON Termination: OFF Termination: ON
Figure 3-3 Three-wire connection (preferred practice)

Bus termination The built-in active bus termination must be switched on

if the RMBA-01 module is installed at the end of the
bus. Otherwise the bus termination must be switched
off. Bus termination prevents signal reflections from the
bus cable ends.
Bus termination OFF Bus termination ON
ON ON
Figure 3-4 Bus termination switch (S1)
Note: The built-in termination circuitry of the RMBA-01

is of the active type, so the module has to be powered
for the termination to work. If the module needs to be
switched off during operation of the network, the bus
can be terminated by connecting a 220 ohm, 1/4 W
resistor between the A and B lines.

Configuring the After the RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module has been
system mechanically and electrically installed according to the
instructions in Chapter 3, the master station and the
drive must be prepared for communication with the
module.
Please refer to the master station documentation for
information on configuring the system for
communication with the RMBA-01.
Modbus To establish communication between the RMBA-01 and

connection the Modbus controller, the parameters in group 52 must
configuration be checked and adjusted where necessary (see the
drive manuals).
The detailed procedure of activating the module for the
control of the drive is described in the drive
documentation.
Control locations ABB drives can receive control information from

multiple sources including digital inputs, analogue
inputs, the drive control panel and a communication
module (e.g. RMBA-01). ABB drives allow the user to
separately determine the source for each type of control
information (Start, Stop, Direction, Reference, Fault
Reset, etc.). In order to give the fieldbus master station
the most complete control over the drive, the
communication module must be selected as source for
this information. See the user documentation of the
drive for information on the selection parameters.


Register read and The drive parameter and data set information is
write mapped into a 4xxxx register area. This holding register
area can be read from an external device, and an
external device can modify the register values by writing
to them.
There are no setup parameters for mapping the data to
the 4xxxx register. The mapping is pre-defined and
corresponds directly to the drive parameter grouping
which is being used by the local drive panel.
All parameters are available for both reading and
writing. The parameter writes are verified for correct
value, and for valid register addresses. Some
parameters never allow writing (e.g. actual values),
some parameters allow writing only when the drive is
stopped (e.g. setup variables), and some can be
modified at any time (e.g. actual reference values).
Register mapping The drive parameters are mapped to the 4xxxx area
such that:
• 40001 – 40096 are reserved for data sets.
• 40101 – 49999 are reserved for parameters.
In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds
correspond to the group number, while the tens and
ones correspond to the parameter number within a
group. Register addresses 4GGPP are shown in Table
5-1 Parameter mapping. In this table GG is the group
number, and PP is the parameter number within the
group.

Table 5-1 Parameter mapping

4GGPP GG PP
40001 – 00 Data sets 01 Data word 1.1
40096 02 Data word 1.2
Data sets 03 Data word 1.3
04 Data word 2.1
Each data set 05 Data word 2.2
consists of 3 data 06 Data word 2.3
words. For example,
07 Data word 3.1
Data word 2.3 refers
to 3rd word in data ...
set 2. 94 Data word 32.1
95 Data word 32.2
96 Data word 32.3
40101 – 01 Group 01 01 Parameter 01
40199 02 Parameter 02
...
99 Parameter 99
40299 02 Parameter 02
Parameters ...
99 Parameter 99
… ... ...
49999 …
99 Parameter 99
The register addresses which are not allocated to any

drive parameter or data set are invalid. No reads or
writes are allowed for these addresses. If there is an
attempt to read or write outside the parameter
addresses, the Modbus interface will return an
exception code to the controller.
Refer to the drive manuals for its data sets, group and
parameter numbers supported.

Exception codes The RMBA-01 supports the Modbus exception codes

shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Exception codes.
Code Name Reason
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported command.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Address does not exist or is
read/write protected.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE Value is outside min-max
limits. Parameter is read-only.
Data update The RMBA-01 module has been designed for time-
optimised, reliable data transfer between the Modbus
network and the drive.
Table 5-3 Function codes.
Code Name Meaning
03 Read holding Reads the binary contents of
registers holding registers
(4X references) in the slave.
06 Preset single Presets a value into a single
register holding register (4X reference).
When broadcast, the function
presets the same register
reference in all attached slaves.
16 Preset multiple Presets values into a sequence
(10 hex) registers of holding registers
(4X references). When
broadcast, the function presets
the same register references in
all attached slaves.
Data set registers are updated in a cyclic interval.
Updating of parameter registers happens at a slower
interval.


Installation Verify all the connections on the module. Check that

problems
• the Modbus cable is connected correctly to terminal
block X1.
• the RMBA-01 module is correctly connected on the
RMIO board using the fixing screws.
Drive setup Drive parameters can be read, but control commands

(Start/Stop or Reference) do not work.
• Activate the fieldbus module according to the
instructions in the drive manual.
• Check that the drive has the Modbus Adapter
selected as the source of these commands (see the
Firmware Manual of the drive).
PLC programming PLC program is beyond ABB support. Contact the

manufacturer for assistance.

Diagnostic LEDs There are three diagnostic LEDs on the RMBA-01

module. Two green LEDs show the transmit and receive
activity. A yellow LED shows the status of the module.
The RxD LED blinks every time a Modbus message is
received by the RMBA-01 (independent of the node
address setting). The TxD LED blinks every time the
RMBA-01 sends a Modbus message over the bus.
The yellow LED lights at power-up and remains lit until
the drive has configured the module. If the LED lights
again after a successful configuration of the module, the
module has gone to reset state due to e.g. power loss.
In case the LED does not go out after one second:
• The configuration has failed.
- Switch off and restart the power supply of the drive.
• The module has a hardware failure.
- Ensure the 38-pin connector is properly inserted.
- Contact an ABB service representative.

RMBA-01 Enclosure:
34 mm
CHASSIS
RMBA-01
MODBUS ADAPTER
GND
1234
A-
B+
RXD
GND
X1
TXD
SHLD
WD/
95 mm
BUS INIT
TERM. S1
20
62 mm
mm
Mounting: Into an option slot of the RMIO board of the

drive or onto external I/O Module Adapter (AIMA-01).
Degree of protection: IP 20
Ambient conditions: The applicable ambient
conditions specified for the drive in its Hardware Manual
are in effect.
Connectors:
• 38-pin parallel bus connector
• One 4-pole terminal block for connection of the
fieldbus cable, detachable (max 1.5 mm2)
Hardware settings:
• One DIP switch for bus termination selection
Settings: Via drive interface (control panel)
RMBA-01 User’s manual A-1

General:
• Max. power consumption: 140 mA (5 V), supplied by
the RMIO board
• Estimated min. lifetime: 100 000 h
• All materials UL/CSA-approved
• Complies with EMC Standards EN 50081-2 and
EN 50082-2
Fieldbus link Compatible devices: Any Modbus device capable of

Modbus communication as a master
Size of the link: 247 stations including repeaters (31
stations and 1 repeater per segment)
Medium: Shielded, twisted pair RS485 cable
• Termination: built in, active type
• Modbus cable: Belden 9841 (2-wire),
Belden 9842 (4-wire), or equivalent
• Maximum Bus Length: 1200 m
Topology: Multi-drop
Serial communication type: Asynchronous, half
Duplex
Transfer rate: 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU
A-2 RMBA-01 User’s manual

EFFECTIVE: 1.3.2002
RMBA-01
ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Drives & Power Products
FIN-00381 Helsinki New Berlin, WI 53151
FINLAND USA
Telephone:+358 10 22 11 Telephone:262 785-8378
Fax: +358 10 222 2681 800 243-4384
Internet: www.abb.com Fax: 262 780-5135
ABB Drives User’s Manual
Analogue I/O Extension Module

RAIO-01
Analogue I/O Extension Module
RAIO-01
User’s Manual
EFFECTIVE: 1.2.2002

Safety instructions
Overview This chapter states the general safety instructions that

must be followed when installing and operating the
RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension module.
The material in this chapter must be studied before
attempting any work on, or with, the unit.
In addition to the safety instructions given below, read
the complete safety instructions of the specific drive you
are working on.
General safety WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance

instructions work on the drive should be carried out by qualified
electricians only.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly
earthed.
Do not attempt any work on a powered drive. After
switching off the mains, always allow the intermediate
circuit capacitors 5 minutes to discharge before working
on the frequency converter, the motor or the motor
cable. It is good practice to check (with a voltage
indicating instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged
before beginning work.
The motor cable terminals of the drive are at a
dangerously high voltage when mains power is applied,
regardless of motor operation.
There can be dangerous voltages inside the drive from
external control circuits even when the drive mains
power is shut off. Exercise appropriate care when
working on the unit. Neglecting these instructions can
cause physical injury or death.
RAIO-01 User’s manual iii

Safety instructions
iv RAIO-01 User’s manual

Table of contents
Safety instructions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Table of contents
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What this manual contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
The RAIO-01 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Module layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Warranty and liability information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Removing and refitting the cover of the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Input mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Input signal type selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Terminal designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Node ID selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
RAIO-01 User’s manual v

Table of contents

Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Option slot installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
I/O Module Adapter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
vi RAIO-01 User’s manual

Intended The manual is intended for the people who are

audience responsible for commissioning and using an RAIO-01
Analogue I/O Extension module with the ACS 800 drive.
The reader is expected to have a basic knowledge of
electrical fundamentals, electrical wiring practices and
how to operate the drive.
Before you start It is assumed that the drive is installed and ready to
operate before starting the installation of the extension
module.
In addition to conventional installation tools, have the
drive manuals available during the installation as they
contain important information not included in this
manual. The drive manuals are referred to at various
points of this document.
RAIO-01 User’s manual 1-1

What this manual This manual contains information on the wiring,

contains configuration and use of the RAIO-01 module.
Safety instructions are featured in the first few pages
of this manual.
Chapter 2 – Overview contains a short description of
the RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension module, a delivery
checklist and warranty information.
Chapter 3 – Installation contains instructions for
module hardware settings, mounting and cabling.
Chapter 4 – Fault tracing explains fault tracing and
the LED indications of the RAIO-01 module.
Appendix A contains technical data.
1-2 RAIO-01 User’s manual

Overview This chapter contains a short description of the

Analogue I/O Extension module, a delivery checklist
and warranty information.
The RAIO-01 The RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension module offers

module two bipolar current (±0[4]…20 mA) or voltage
(±0[2]…10 V or ±0…2 V) inputs and two unipolar
current (0[4]…20 mA) outputs with 12-bit resolution.
The analogue inputs and outputs are galvanically
isolated as a group from each other and the power
supply.
Module layout
Fixing screw (GND) 345

F0 1 2
67
89
AB E
CD
Node ID selector
RAIO-01
Node ID
GND
ANALOGUE I/O EXTENSION
WD/
INIT
Module status LED

X2
X1
CHASSIS
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
AO1+
AO2+
AO1-
AO2-
AI1+
AI2+
AI1-
AI2-
Configuration switch
(behind cover)
123456 123456
Fixing screw
(CHASSIS)
Terminal block for
analogue outputs (X2)
Terminal block for
analogue inputs (X1)
Figure 2-1 Module layout

Delivery check The option package contains:

• RAIO-01 module
• Two screws (M3×8 mm)
• This manual.
Compatibility The RAIO-01 is compatible with the ACS 800 Standard

Application Program version ASXR7000 or later.
Warranty and The warranty for your ABB drive and options covers
liability manufacturing defects. The manufacturer carries no
information responsibility for damage due to transport or unpacking.
In no event and under no circumstances shall the
manufacturer be liable for damages and failures due to
misuse, abuse, improper installation, or abnormal
conditions of temperature, dust, or corrosives, or
failures due to operation above rated capacities. Nor
shall the manufacturer ever be liable for consequential
and incidental damages.
The period of manufacturer's warranty is 12 months,
and not more than 18 months, from the date of delivery.
Extended warranty may be available with certified start-
up. Contact your local distributor for details.
Your local ABB Drives company or distributor may have
a different warranty period, which is specified in their
sales terms, conditions, and warranty terms.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive,
contact your local distributor or ABB Drives office.
The technical data and specifications are valid at the
time of printing. ABB reserves the right to subsequent
alterations.

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in this

guide and in the ACS 800 Hardware Manual.
Mounting The RAIO-01 is to be inserted into the position marked

SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the drive. The module is held in
place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The
screws also provide the earthing of the I/O cable shield
connected to the module, and interconnect the GND
signals of the module and the RMIO board.
On installation of the module, the signal and power
connection to the drive is automatically made through a
38-pin connector.
The module can alternatively be mounted on a DIN rail-
mountable AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter (not available
at the time of publication).
Mounting procedure:
1. Insert the module carefully into SLOT 1 or SLOT 2
on the RMIO board until the retaining clips lock the
module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
3. Remove the cover of the module enclosure –
directions are given below.
4. Set the configuration DIP switches of the module to
the required position and refit the cover.
Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation
of the module.

Removing and To choose operating mode and input signal type, the
refitting the cover cover of the module enclosure must be removed. This
of the enclosure can be done by carefully bending the two cover
retaining clips with a small screwdriver (see Figure 3-1)
and lifting the cover off.
Refit the cover by pushing it back into its place until the
retaining clips lock it into position.
Retaining clips
Cover Base
Figure 3-1 Removing and refitting the cover
Switches
Node ID selector (S1)

3 45
Pos. 0,1,2,…,E,F ID 0,1,2,…,14,15

F0 1 2
67
89
AB E
CD
Configuration switch (S2) ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
AI1 signal mode

AI1 signal level 123456 123456
AI2 signal mode
AI2 signal level X2 X1
Figure 3-2 Top view of the module, cover removed

Input mode The operating mode of the analogue inputs can be

selection selected using the configuration DIP switch (S2) on the
circuit board of the module. The drive parameters must
be set accordingly.
In bipolar mode, the analogue inputs can handle
positive and negative signals. The resolution of the A/D
conversion is 11 data bits (+ 1 sign bit). The way the
drive interprets the negative range of the inputs
depends on the settings of the drive. See the Firmware
Manual of the drive.
In unipolar mode (default), the analogue inputs can
handle positive signals only. The resolution of the A/D
conversion is 12 data bits.
DIP switch setting

Input signal type
Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2
ON ON
±0(4)…20 mA
±0(2)…10 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
±0…2 V
ON ON 0(4)…20 mA
0(2)…10 V
0…2 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Default)

Input signal type Each input can be used with a current or voltage signal.
selection The selection is made with the configuration DIP switch
(S2) on the circuit board of the module.
Input signal DIP switch settings

type Analogue input 1 Analogue input 2
ON ON
Current signal
±0(4)…20 mA
(Default) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON ON
Voltage signal
±0(2)…10 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON ON
Voltage signal
±0…2 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Terminal The RAIO-01 is equipped with two 6-pole non-

designations detachable screw-type connectors. Terminal block X1
provides the connection for the analogue input signals,
and X2 provides the connection for the analogue output
signals. Each terminal block includes two terminals for
the cable shield (see also Figure 3-3).
Current signal Voltage signal

Analogue
1 AI1-
±0(4)…20 mA ±0(2)…10 V or ±0…2 V
input 1
2 AI1+ Input impedance 100 9 Input impedance 200 k9
Galvanically isolated as a Galvanically isolated as a

Analogue
3 AI2- group (1.5 kV AC, 1 minute) group (1.5 kV AC, 1 minute)

input 2
from the analogue outputs, from the analogue outputs,

power supply and earth. power supply and earth.
4 AI2+
5 SHLD Cable shield AC earthing. Connected via an RC circuit to the

6 SHLD frame.
1 AO1+
output 1
Current
Current signal
0(4)...20 mA
2 AO1-
Load resistance max. 700 9
3 AO2+
output 2
Current
Galvanically isolated as a group (1.5 kV AC, 1 minute) from

the analogue inputs, power supply and earth.
4 AO2-
5 SHLD
Cable shield AC earthing (via an RC circuit to the frame).
6 SHLD

Wiring 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 twisted pair cable with individual and/or
overall shields should be used for analogue signals.
The shields should be connected to the SHLD terminals
on the RAIO-01 module. See the example below.
RAIO-01
Transducer 1 X1 X2 Indicator 1
AI1+ AO1+
AI1- AO1-
P
SHLD SHLD
AI2+ AO2+
AI2- AO2- T
SHLD SHLD
Transducer 2 Indicator 2
Figure 3-3 Wiring example
Note: If the transducers or indicators are located far

away from each other, earth the shield at one unit
through a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF/400 V) to avoid
circulating earth current flow.
Note: X1 and X2 have separate RC circuits as shown

above, i.e. the SHLD terminals on one terminal block
are connected together and earthed through a common
RC circuit.

Node ID selection If the RAIO-01 module is mounted onto the external I/O
Module Adapter (AIMA-01), choose the proper node ID
for the module using the node ID selector (S1, range
1…15). Setting the node ID is not required when the
module is mounted into SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the drive.
The default setting of selector S1 is 5.
Programming The communication between the module and the drive

is activated by a drive parameter. (Ensure that the
parameter settings correspond to the mode switch
setting of the module.) The RAIO-01 can replace and/or
extend certain standard inputs and outputs. See the
drive Firmware Manual, Parameter Group 98.
Note: The new settings take effect only when the

module is powered up.


Status LED There is one status LED (WD/INIT, yellow) on the

RAIO-01 module. The LED is lit when the drive is
configuring the module at power-up.
Option slot In case the LED does not go out after one second:
installation
• The configuration has failed.
- Cycle the power supply of the drive.
• The module has a hardware failure.
I/O Module Adapter • There is no communication with the drive.
installation
- Check that the drive is powered.
- Check the module node ID.
- Check that the fibre optic cables are connected
correctly (transmitters to receivers) and the
connectors properly inserted.
- Check the fibre optic cables visually for dirt or
flaws.
- Try new fibre optic cables.


Dimensions:
34 mm
CHASSIS
RAIO-01
ANALOGUE I/O EXTENSION
GND
F01
23
BCDE
45
Node ID 89 A
67
123456 123456
AO1+
AO1-
95 mm
WD/
AO2+ INIT
AO2-
X2
SHLD
SHLD
AI1-
S2
AI1+
AI2-
AI2+
X1
SHLD
SHLD
20
62 mm
mm
Mounting: Into an option slot of the RMIO board of the

drive or onto external I/O Module Adapter (AIMA-01).
Degree of protection: IP 20
Ambient conditions: The applicable ambient
conditions specified for the drive in its Hardware Manual
are in effect.
Hardware settings:
• Rotary switch for node ID selection (range 1…15)
• One DIP switch per input for selection between
bipolar mode (default) and unipolar mode
• Two DIP switches per input for signal type and level
selection
Connectors:
• 38-pin parallel bus connector
• Two 6-pin screw-type terminal blocks for max.
2.5 mm2 wires, non-detachable
RAIO-01 User’s manual A-1

Analogue inputs:
• Signal types: ±(0)4…20 mA, ±(0)2…10 V, ±0…2 V
• Input impedance: 100 9 (current), 200 k9 (voltage)
• Resolution in unipolar mode: 0.024% (12 data bits)
• Resolution in bipolar mode: 0.048% (11 data bits +
sign)
• Inaccuracy: ±0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C
Temperature coefficient: ±100 ppm/°C max.
• Isolated from the analogue outputs, power supply
and earth. Test voltage: 1.5 kV AC, 1 minute
• Common mode voltage: ±15 V max.
• HW filtering: 2 ms approx.
Analogue outputs:
• Signal type: 0(4)...20 mA
• Load resistance max.: 700 9
• Resolution: 0.024% (12 bits)
• Inaccuracy: ±0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C
Temperature coefficient: ±100 ppm/°C max.
• Isolated from the analogue inputs, power supply and
earth. Test voltage: 1.5 kV AC, 1 minute
General
• Max. power consumption:
100 mA (5 V) + 120 mA (24 V)
Both voltages supplied by the RMIO board
• Estimated min. lifetime: 100 000 h
• All materials UL/CSA-approved
• Complies with EMC standards EN 50081-2 and
EN 50082-2
A-2 RAIO-01 User’s manual

EFFECTIVE: 1.2.2002
RAIO-01
ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Drives & Power Products
FIN-00381 Helsinki New Berlin, WI 53151
FINLAND USA
Telephone:+358 10 22 11 Telephone:262 785-8378
Fax: +358 10 222 2681 800 243-4384
Internet: www.abb.com Fax: 262 780-5135

VSDS Manual-ABB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VSDS Manual-ABB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VSDS Manual-ABB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACS800

HARDWARE MANUALS (appropriate manual is included in the

ACS800-01/U1 Hardware Manual 0.55 to 160 kW (0.75 to 200 HP)

FIRMWARE MANUALS, SUPPLEMENTS AND GUIDES

Standard Control Program Firmware Manual

OPTION MANUALS (delivered with optional equipment)

Fieldbus Adapters, I/O Extension Modules etc.

© 2007 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

What this chapter contains

Use of warnings and notes

Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause

General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by

Installation and maintenance work

• The brake control terminals (UDC+, UDC-, R+ and R- terminals) carry a

• Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V)

• Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by

• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective

• In first environment (EU EMC Directive): make a 360° high frequency

• As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA

Mechanical installation and maintenance

• Handle the unit carefully.

• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power

• Ensure sufficient cooling.

• Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.

Printed circuit boards

• The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic

Fibre optic cables

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause equipment malfunction

• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Control Program if

Permanent magnet motor

Installation and maintenance work

Start-up and operation

ACS800 Single Drive Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

About this manual

Planning the cabinet assembly

Planning the electrical installation

Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Motor control and I/O board (RMIO)

“C-tick” marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

About this manual

What this chapter contains

Categorization according to the frame size

Categorization according to the + code

About this manual

About this manual

Installation and commissioning flowchart

Plan the installation. Technical data

Check the installation site. Mechanical installation: Before installation

If the drive is about to be connected to an IT ACS800-04/U4: Type code

Install the drive in a cabinet. Mechanical installation

Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

About this manual

Check the installation. Installation checklist

Commission the drive. Appropriate Firmware Manual

Commission the optional brake chopper (if present). Resistor braking

Product and service inquiries

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

About this manual

Terms and abbreviations

CDP312R Drive control panel